BA01245C/07/EN/08.22-00
71569838
2022-04-21

Products

Solutions

Services

Valid as of version
01.12.01 (Device firmware)

Operating Instructions
Memosens
Sensor inputs with Memosens protocol
For all devices in the Liquiline family: CM44x, CM44xR,
CM44P, CSFXX, CSP44, CA80XX

Memosens

Table of contents

Table of contents
1

Document information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

12

1.1
1.2
1.3

Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

12.1 Basic settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
12.2 Extended setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

2

Information on sensors with
Memosens protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

3Electrical connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

3.1
3.2
3.3

Sensor types with Memosens protocol . . . . . . . 8
Connecting sensors with Memosens protocol . . 8
Sensor types with Memosens protocol for
hazardous area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

4

Inputs: General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

5

Inputs:pH/ORP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5

Basic settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Extended setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Tag control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Sensor change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Data processing factory setting . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

6Inputs: Conductivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

17

6.1
6.2

Basic settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Extended setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

17.1 Process errors without messages . . . . . . . . . 141
17.2 Overview of diagnostic information . . . . . . . 149
17.3 Sensor information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

7

Inputs: Oxygen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

7.1
7.2

Basic settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Extended setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

8Inputs: disinfection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

8.1
8.2

Basic settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Extended setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

9Inputs: Drinking water turbidity . . . . 74

9.1
9.2

Basic settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Extended setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

10

Inputs: Turbidity and solids . . . . . . . . 83

10.1 Basic settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
10.2 Extended setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

11

Inputs: SAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

11.1 Basic settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
11.2 Extended setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

Endress+Hauser

Inputs: Nitrate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

13

Inputs: ISE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

13.1
13.2
13.3

Basic settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Extended setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Electrode slot menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

14

Inputs: Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

14.1 Basic settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
14.2 Tank configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
14.3 Sensor signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
14.4 Extended setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

15

Inputs: Spectrometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

15.1 Basic settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
15.2 Extended setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

16

Inputs: Fluorescence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

16.1 Basic settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
16.2 Extended setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

Diagnostics and troubleshooting . . 141

18

Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

18.1
18.2
18.3

Cleaning digital sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Cleaning assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Performing a decade resistance test on digital
inductive conductivity sensors . . . . . . . . . . . 168

19

Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

19.1 Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
19.2 Terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
19.3 Calibration instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
19.4 pH sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
19.5 ORP sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
19.6 Conductivity sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
19.7 Oxygen sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
19.8 Disinfection sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
19.9 Ion-selective sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
19.10 Turbidity and solids sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
19.11 SAC sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
19.12 Nitrate sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
19.13 Spectrometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
19.14 Fluorescence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
19.15 Calibration accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222

3

Table of contents

Memosens

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224

4Endress+Hauser

Memosens

Document information

1

Document information

1.1

Warnings

Structure of information

Meaning

LDANGERThis symbol alerts you to a dangerous situation.
Failure to avoid the dangerous situation will result in a fatal or serious
injury.

Causes (/consequences)If necessary, Consequences of
non-compliance (if applicable)‣ Corrective action

LWARNING
Causes (/consequences)If necessary, Consequences of
non-compliance (if applicable)‣ Corrective action

LCAUTION
Causes (/consequences)If necessary, Consequences of
non-compliance (if applicable)‣ Corrective action
NOTICE
Cause/situation
If necessary, Consequences of
non-compliance (if applicable)‣ Action/note

1.2

This symbol alerts you to a dangerous situation.
Failure to avoid the dangerous situation can result in a fatal or serious
injury.

This symbol alerts you to a dangerous situation.
Failure to avoid this situation can result in minor or more serious injuries.

This symbol alerts you to situations which may result in damage toproperty.

Symbols
Additional information, tips
Permitted or recommended
Not permitted or not recommended
Reference to device documentation
Reference to page
Reference to graphicEndress+Hauser

Result of a step5Document information

Memosens

1.3

Documentation

The following manuals complement these Operating Instructions and are available on the
product pages on the Internet:• Operating Instructions• Liquiline CM44x, BA00444C• Liquiline CM44xR, BA01225C• Liquiline CM44P, BA01570C• Liquistation CSF48, BA00443C• Liquiport CSP44, BA00465C• Liquistation CSF34, BA00478C• Liquistation CSF39, BA01407C• Liquisystem CA80AM, BA01240C• Liquisystem CA80PH, BA01416C and BA01435C• Liquisystem CA80NO, BA01574C• Liquisystem CA80CR, BA01575C• Liquisystem CA80AL, BA001585C• Liquisystem CA80FE, BA01586C• Liquisystem CA80COD, BA01354C• Liquisystem CA80TP, BA01593C• Liquisystem CA80HA, BA01772C• Liquisystem CA80SI, BA01650C• Brief Operating Instructions for the devices mentioned• Technical Information for the devices mentioned• Liquiline Operating Instructions for HART communication, BA00486C• Onsite settings and installation instructions for HART
• Description of HART driver• Guidelines for communication via fieldbus and web server• HART, SD01187C• PROFIBUS, SD01188C• Modbus, SD01189C• Web server, SD01190C• EtherNet/IP, SD01293C

6

Endress+Hauser

Memosens

Information on sensors with Memosens protocol

2

Information on sensors with Memosens
protocolSensors with Memosens protocol have an integrated electronics unit that stores calibration
data and other information. Once the sensor has been connected, the sensor data aretransferred automatically to the transmitter and used to calculate the measured value.

‣ Call up the sensor data via the corresponding DIAG menu.
Digital sensors can store measuring system data in the sensor. These include the following:• Manufacturer data
• Serial number• Order code
• Date of manufacture• Calibration data
• Calibration date
• Calibration values• Number of calibrations• Serial number of the transmitter used to perform the last calibration or adjustment• Operating data
• Temperature application range• Date of initial commissioning• Hours of operation under extreme conditions• Sensor monitoring data
Which exact data are recorded and communicated to the transmitter is dependent on
the sensor. Even within a sensor type, differences may occur. This means that,
depending on which sensor is connected, menu items may or may not be available.
Please note the relevant information in this manual.
Example:The amperometric oxygen sensor COS51D cannot be sterilized. For this reason, limit
values for sterilization cannot be defined in the diagnostic settings for this sensor.
However, these menu items are available for a sterilizable amperometric sensor, e.g.
COS22D.

Endress+Hauser

7Electrical connection

Memosens

3

Electrical connection

LWARNING
Device is live!
Incorrect connection may result in injury or death!
‣ The electrical connection may be performed only by an electrical technician.
‣ The electrical technician must have read and understood these Operating Instructions
and must follow the instructions contained therein.
‣ Prior to commencing connection work, ensure that no voltage is present on any cable.

3.1

Sensor types with Memosens protocol

Sensors with Memosens protocol
Sensor types

Sensor cable

Sensors

Digital sensors without
additional internal power
supplyWith plug-in
connection andinductive signaltransmission• pH sensors• ORP sensors• Combined sensors• Oxygen sensors (amperometric and optical)• Conductivity sensors with conductive measurementof conductivity• Chlorine sensors (disinfection)

Fixed cable

Conductivity sensors with inductive measurement ofconductivity

Fixed cable• Turbidity sensors• Sensors for interface measurement• Sensors for measuring the spectral absorption
coefficient (SAC)• Nitrate sensors• Optical oxygen sensors• Ion-sensitive sensors

Digital sensors withadditional internal power
supplyThe following rule applies if connecting CUS71D sensors:• CM442R• Only one CUS71D is possible; an additional sensor is not permitted.
• The second sensor input may also not be used for another type of sensor.
• CM444R
No restrictions. All the sensor inputs can be used as required.
• CM448R• If a CUS71D is connected, the number of sensor inputs that can be used is limited to a
maximum of 4.
• Of these, all 4 inputs can be used for CUS71D sensors.
• Every combination of CUS71D and other sensors is possible, provided that the total
number of connected sensors does not exceed 4.

3.2

Connecting sensors with Memosens protocol

Connection Types of connection• Direct connection of the sensor cable to the terminal connector of the , basic module-L, H or -E (→  1 ff.)
• Optional: Sensor cable plug connected to the M12 sensor socket on the underside of thedeviceWith this type of connection, the device is already wired at the factory (→  4).
1.

8

Sensor cable connected directly
Connect the sensor cable to the Memosens terminal connector of the 2DS, or of theBASE2-L, -H or -E module.
Endress+Hauser

Memosens

Electrical connection

2.

If connected via M12 connector
Connect the sensor connector to an M12 sensor socket which has been previously
installed or is supplied on delivery.

PK

BN
WH
GN
YE

GY

98 97 88 87

98 97 88 87

86 85 86 85

86 85 86 85

Sensor cable connected directly

SensorGN
YE

Sensor
A0039629

1

sensors without additional supply voltage

A0039622

2

sensors with additional supply voltage

85

GY

86

2

85

1

PK

86

2DS

Sensor

98 97 88 87

Sensor 1

GN
YE

98 97 88 87

Sensor 2

BN
WH
GN
YE

Sensor

A0033206

3

Sensors with and without additional supply
voltage at sensor module 2DS

In the case of a single-cannel device:
The left-hand Memosens input on basic module must be used!

Endress+Hauser

9Electrical connection

Memosens

Device versions with a pre-installed
M12 socket are ready-wired upondelivery.

PK
GY

1

2

85

86

1

85

connection via M12 connection
Only for connection in non-hazardous area.

Version without a pre-installed M12
socket

7

NC

86

2

3
4

98 97 88 87

6
5

Sensor 1

1.

Insert an M12 socket(accessory) into a suitableopening in the base of the
housing.

2.

Connect the cable to a
Memosens terminal as per thewiring diagram.

BN
WH
GN
YE

2

1
7

3

NC
6

4

Connecting the sensor

5‣ Connect the sensor cable
A0018021

5

1

1
2
A00180193
4
M12 connection (e.g. on
4sensor module)
5
6
1
Sensor cable with M127,connectorNC

connector (→  4item 1) directly
to M12 socket.

M12 assignment, top:socket, bottom: connector Please note the following:(top view in each case)• The internal device wiring is always
the same regardless of what kind ofPK (24 V)
sensor you connect to the M12
GY (Ground 24 V)
socket (plug&play).
BN (3 V)•The signal or power supply cables
WH (Ground 3 V)
are assigned in the sensor head in
GN (Memosens)such a way that the PK and GY
YE (Memosens)
power supply cables are either used
Not connected(e.g. optical sensors) or not (e.g. pH
or ORP sensors).

When connecting intrinsically safe sensors to transmitters with sensor
communication module type 2DS Ex i, the M12 plug-in connector is not permitted.

3.3

Sensor types with Memosens protocol for hazardous
area

Sensors with Memosens protocol
Sensor types

Sensor cable

Sensors

Digital sensors without
additional internal power
supplyWith plug-in connection
and inductive signaltransmission• pH sensors• ORP sensors• Combined sensors• Oxygen sensors (amperometric and optical)• Conductivity sensors with conductive
measurement of conductivity• Chlorine sensors (disinfection)

Fixed cable

Conductivity sensors with inductive measurementof conductivity

Intrinsically safe sensors for use in explosive atmospheres may only be connected tothe sensor communication module type 2DS Ex-i. Only the sensors covered by thecertificates may be connected (see XA).
The sensor connections for non-Ex sensors on the base module are disabled.

10

Endress+Hauser

Memosens

Inputs: General

4

Inputs: General

An input can be configured in one of two ways:• Configuration where a sensor is not connected• Configuration where a sensor is connected
Configuration where a sensor is not connected
Some settings require sensor communication. You cannot make these settings if a sensor is
not connected.
It is also possible to save a setup and transfer it to another device (→ Operating
Instructions for the device, →  7). This function might meet the requirements ofyour application better than a configuration when a sensor is not connected.
1.

Select the relevant channel.

2.

From the list, select the sensor type that you want to configure.

3.

Configure the channel as explained in the following sections.

4.

At a later point, connect a sensor of the selected type.
 The channel is ready for operation immediately.

Configuration where a sensor is connected‣ Configure the channel as explained in the following sections.

Endress+Hauser

11Inputs:pH/ORP

Memosens

5

Inputs:pH/ORP

5.1

Basic settings

5.1.1

Sensor identification

Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: sensor type
Function

Options

Info

ChannelSelection
• Off
• On

On
The channel display is switched on in themeasuring mode

Factory settingOn

OffThe channel is not displayed in the measuringmode, regardless of whether a sensor isconnected or not.

Read only(Only available if a sensor
is connected)

Connected sensor type

Sensor type
Order code

5.1.2

Order code of the connected sensor

Main value

Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: pH or ORP or pH/ORP
Function

Options

Info

Main value

Selection• pH 1)• mV 2)• ORP mV 3)• ORP % 3)
• pH/ORP/rH 4)

Select how the main value should be displayed.
Subsequent configuration options depend on theoption selected here.
You can display the main value of a pH sensor asa pH value or as a raw value in mV. If using an
ORP sensor, here you decide which ORP mode touse: mV or %. If you have connected a combined
sensor, you can also select the rH value.

Factory setting• pH 1)• ORP mV 5)

1)
2)
3)
4)
5)

Note the following for pH/ORP combined
sensors
Select pH/ORP/rH as the main value if you wantto calibrate pH and ORP.

pH sensor and pH/ORP combined sensor
pH sensor
ORP sensor and pH/ORP combined sensor
pH/ORP combined sensor
ORP sensor

5.1.3

Damping

The damping causes a floating average curve of the measured values over the time
specified.
Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: Sensor type
Function

Options

Info

Depends on the sensor 1)

0 to 600 s

Damping temp.

Factory setting
0s

The damping of the main value and of theintegrated temperature sensor can be specified.

1)

12

Damping pH or Damping ORP or Damping Cond or Damping DO or Damping DI or Damping nitrate or
Damping SAC or Damping turbidity or Damping PAHphe

Endress+Hauser

Memosens

Inputs:pH/ORP

5.1.4

Manual holdMenu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: Sensor type
Function

Options

Info

Manual holdSelection
• Off
• On

On
You can use this function to set the channel
manually to "Hold".

Factory setting
Off

Off
No channel-specific hold

5.2

Extended setup

5.2.1

Temperature and medium compensation (only pH and pH/
ORP)

Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: pH or pH/ORP/

Extended setup

Function

Options

Info

Temp. compensation

Selection• Off• Automatic• Manual

Determine compensation of fluid temperature:• Automatically using the temperature sensor
of your sensor (ATC)• Manually by entering the medium
temperature• No compensation

Factory setting
Automatic
TemperatureTemp. compensation =Manual-50 to 250 °C (-58 to
482 °F)

Specify the medium temperature.

Factory setting
25 °C (77 °F)

This setting only refers to compensation during measurement. Enter the compensation for calibration in thecalibration settings.
Medium comp.

Selection• Off• 2-point calibration• TableTake a sample of the medium and determine its
pH value at different temperatures in the lab.
Decide whether you want to compensate using
two points or several points in a table.

Factory settingOff
dissociation of water changes with increasing temperature. The balance shifts towards the protons;
 The
the pH value drops. It is possible to compensate for this effect with the Medium comp. function.
Internal buffer

pH 0 to 14
Factory setting
pH 7.00

5.2.2

Measured value formats

Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: pH or ORP or pH/ORP/

Extended setup

Function

Options

Info

Main value format

Selection• #.#• #.##

Specify the number of decimal places

Only pH and pH/ORP
Temperature format

Endress+Hauser

Only change the value if you are using a sensor
with an internal buffer other than pH 7.

Factory setting#.#

13Inputs:pH/ORP

Memosens

5.2.3

Customer ID (only for E-sensors)

You can enter an individual identifier for the sensor. This can then be found in the menu
DIAG/Sensor information/Channel No. <Sensor type>/General information.

5.2.4

Cleaning holdMenu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: <Sensor type>/

Extended setup

Function

Options

Info

Cleaning holdSelection• None• Cleaning 1 ... 4‣ For selecting one or more cleaning programs(multiple selection).
 For the programs defined, the channel
switches to "Hold" while cleaning is inprogress.

Factory setting
None

Cleaning programs are executed:• At a specified interval
For this, the cleaning program must be
started.
• If a diagnostics message is pending on thechannel and a cleaning has been specified forthis message (→ Inputs/Channel: Sensor
type/Diagnostics settings/Diag. behavior/
Diagnostic number/Cleaning program).

The cleaning programs are defined in the menu: Setup/Additional functions/Cleaning.

5.2.5

External holdA hold can be triggered for all the devices of a measuring point via a digital signal, e.g. afieldbus signal. Make sure that the hold signal is not used elsewhere. An external hold canbe assigned individually to every sensor input.
The function only appears in the Inputs menu if the signals for the external hold wereconfigured beforehand in the general hold settings:
Menu/Setup/General settings/Hold settings/External hold.
Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: <Sensor type>/Extended setup/
Function

Options

Info

SourceSelection• Binary inputs• Fieldbus signals

1.

For selecting the signal source of theexternal hold.
 Multiple selection is possible.

Factory setting
None

2.

OK: Confirm your selection.

5.2.6

Sterilization settings (only hygienic sensors)

Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: <Sensor type>/Extended setup/

Sterilization settings

Function

Options

Info

Temperature threshold

120 to 150 °C

This temperature must be exceeded for thesterilization counter to start and a sterilization
cycle to be counted.

Factory setting
121 °C
Duration

1 to 250 min
Factory setting
20 min14

External hold

The set temperature must be reached during thistime for a sterilization cycle to be counted.

Endress+Hauser

Memosens

Inputs:pH/ORP

5.2.7

CIP settings (only hygienic sensors)

Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: <Sensor type>/Extended setup/

CIP settings

Function

Options

Info

Mode

Selection
• On
• Off

Switch the counter for the CIP cycles on or off

Factory setting
Off
Signal type

Selection• Acidic• Alkaline‣ Specify whether an acidic or alkaline CIP
should be recognized.

Factory setting
AcidicpH threshold

pH 2.0 to 11.0
Factory setting
pH 11.0

Upper temp. threshold

Factory setting
85 °C

Lower temp. threshold

Factory setting
75 °C

Duration

1 to 250 min
Factory setting
20 min5.2.8

A CIP cycle is counted if the temperaturethreshold is exceeded and, simultaneously, thepH threshold is exceeded or undershot,
depending on the selected type.
• Signal type = Acidic→ The device counts when the pH threshold isundershot• Signal type = Alkaline→ The device counts when the pH threshold isexceeded
A CIP cycle is taken into consideration within thetemperature thresholds.
• Upper temp. threshold:If the temperature measured value exceeds
this limit value, the CIP conditions arebreached and a CIP cycle is not counted.
• Lower temp. threshold:
A CIP cycle is counted if the temperature
exceeds the lower temperature threshold anddrops below the threshold again after the set
minimum time at the very earliest.
Minimum time period in which the temperaturemust be between the lower and upper
temperature threshold for a CIP cycle to be
counted.

Calibration settings

Stability criteria
Define the permitted measured value fluctuation which must not be exceeded in a certain
timeframe during the calibration. If the permitted difference is exceeded, the calibration is
not permitted and is aborted automatically.
Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: pH or ORP or pH/ORP/Extended setup/Calib. settings/
Function

Options

Info

Delta mV

1 to 10 mV

Permitted measured value fluctuation duringcalibration

Factory setting
1 mV
Duration

10 to 60 s
Factory setting
20 sEndress+Hauser

Stability criteria

Timeframe within which the permitted
measured value fluctuation must not be
exceeded15

Inputs:pH/ORP

Memosens

Temperature compensation during calibration
Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: pH or pH/ORP/Extended setup/

Calib. settings

Function

Options

Info

Temp. compensation

Selection• Off• Automatic• ManualSpecify the compensation of the buffertemperature:• Automatically using the temperature sensor
of the sensor (ATC)• Manually by entering the medium
temperature• Not at all

Factory setting
Automatic
TemperatureTemp. compensation =Manual-50 to 250 °C (-58 to
482 °F)

Specify the buffer temperature.

Factory setting
25 °C (77 °F)

setting only refers to compensation during calibration, not in measuring mode. Perform Thiscompensation in the measuring mode further up in the menu.

Buffer recognition
Automatic buffer recognition
To ensure a buffer is detected correctly, the measuring signal may deviate by a maximumof 30 mV from the value stored in the buffer table. This is approx. 0.5 pH at a temperatureof 25°C.
If both buffers ‐ 9.00 and 9.20 ‐ were used, this would cause the signal intervals to overlap
and buffer recognition would not work. For this reason, the device would recognize abuffer with a pH of 9.00 as a pH of 9.20.
→ Do not use the buffer with pH 9.00 for automatic buffer recognition.

16

Endress+Hauser

Memosens

Inputs:pH/ORP

Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: pH or ORP or pH/ORP or (ISE/Electrode slot)/Extended setup/settings

Calib.

Function

Options

Info

Buffer recognition

Selection• Fixed• Automatic 1)• Manual

Fixed
Select values from a list. The list depends on thesetting in Buffer manufacturer.

Factory setting
Fixed

Automatic
The device recognizes the buffer automatically.
The recognition depends on the setting in Buffer
manufacturer.
their zero point is offset, CPS341D
 As
enamel pH sensors and CPS4xxD-ISFET
sensors cannot be calibrated and adjustedwith automatic buffer recognition.
ManualEnter any two buffer values. These must differ interms of their pH value.

Buffer manufacturer

Selection• Endress+Hauser• Ingold/Mettler• DIN 19266• DIN 19267• Merck/Riedel• Hamilton• Special buffer
Factory setting
Endress+Hauser

Temperature tables are stored internally in theunit for the following pH values:• Endress+Hauser
2.00 / 4.00 / 7.00 / (9.00) / 9.22 / 10.00 /12.00• Ingold/Mettler
2.00 / 4.01 / 7.00 / 9.21
• DIN 19266
1.68 / 4.01 / 6.86 / 9.18
• DIN 19267
1.09 / 4.65 / 6.79 / 9.23 / 12.75• Merck/Riedel
2.00 / 4.01 / 6.98 / 8.95 / 12.00• Hamilton
1.09 / 1.68 / 2.00 / 3.06 / 4.01 / 5.00 / 6.00
7.00 / 8.00 / 9.21 / 10.01 / 11.00 / 12.00

With the Special buffer option, it is possible to define two buffers of your own. For this purpose, two tablesare displayed in which pH value/temperature value pairs can be saved.
Calibration buffer 1 ... 2

The options and factory setting depend on the Buffer manufacturer

Buffer recognition = Fixed or
Manual1 point adjustment

Selection• Transmitter• Sensor

Function not in the ISE menu
Select whether the offset should be saved in thetransmitter or in the sensor.

Factory setting
Transmitter
1)

Only pH or pH/ORP combined sensor

Calibration monitoring
The calibration interval for the sensor can be specified here. Once the configured time
elapses, the diagnostic message Calibration validity is shown on the display.
The timer is reset automatically if the sensor is recalibrated.

Endress+Hauser

17Inputs:pH/ORP

Memosens

Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: <Sensor type>/Extended setup/

Calib. settings

Function

Options

Info

Calib. expiration time

Selection• Off• During operation• When connectingThis function checks the time elapsed since thelast sensor calibration. This may occur
continuously during operation or just once while
the calibration data are being read (sensor
connection, device start, calibration kit
replacement).

Factory settingOff

1.

During operation
During continuous operation, thisfunction informs the user of the time
elapsed since the last calibration.

2.

When connecting
During a batch process, this function
ensures that only recently calibrated
sensors are used. No error message is
generated during the batch process.

Calibration validity
Warning limit

Factory setting
800 h

Diagnostic message: 105 Calibration validity

Alarm limit

Factory setting
1000 hDiagnostic message: 104 Calibration validity

Warning and alarm limits mutually influence each other's possible range of adjustment.
Range of adjustment which must include both limits:
1 to 20000 h
Generally, the following applies: alarm limit > warning limit

5.2.9

Diagnostics settings

In this menu branch, warning limits are specified or the use of diagnostics tools is defined.
The associated diagnostics code is displayed for every setting.
Impedance monitoring, Sensor Check System (only pH glass and pH/ORP combined
sensor)The Sensor Check System (SCS) monitors the high impedance of the pH glass. An alarm isissued if a minimum impedance value is undershot or a maximum impedance is exceeded.
• Reasons for decreasing impedance values:• High temperatures• Glass breakage• Reasons for increasing impedance values:• Dry sensor (sensor is in air)
• Worn pH glass membrane or coating on the pH glass membrane• Low temperatures

18

Endress+Hauser

Memosens

Inputs:pH/ORP

Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: pH or pH/ORP/Extended setup/Diagnostics settings/(SCS)

Glass impedance

Function

Options

Info

Upper limit

Selection
• Off
• On

On
SCS operates with the following settings for theupper warning and alarm limits.

Factory setting
On

Off
Monitoring of the upper warning and alarm
limits is switched off.

0 to 10000 MΩ

Diagnostics code and associated message text:
124 Sensor glass

Upper alarm limit

Factory setting
3000 MΩ
Upper warning limit

0 to 10000 MΩ
Factory setting
2500 MΩ

Lower limit

Lower warning limit

Selection
• Off
• On

On
SCS operates with the following settings for the
lower warning and alarm limits.

Factory setting
On

Off
Monitoring of the lower warning and alarm
limits is switched off.

0 to 10000 MΩ

Diagnostics code and associated message text:
123 Sensor glass

Factory setting
0.1 MΩ
Lower alarm limit

Diagnostics code and associated message text:
125 Sensor glass

0 to 10000 MΩ
Factory setting
0 MΩ

Diagnostics code and associated message text:
122 Sensor glass

For the SCS, upper and lower limit values can be enabled or disabled independently of
one another.
Slope (only pH)
The slope characterizes the sensor condition. The bigger the deviation from the ideal value(59 mV/pH) the poorer the condition of the sensor.
Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: pH or pH/ORP/Extended setup/Diagnostics settings/

Slope

Function

Options

Info

Warning limit

25.00 to 65.00 mV/pH

Specify limit values for slope monitoring.
Associated diagnostics code and message text:
509 Sensor calibration

Factory setting
35.16 mV/pH

Zero point (pH Glass) and Operating point (pH ISFET)
pH glass sensors
The zero point characterizes the condition of the sensor reference. The bigger thedeviation from the ideal value (pH 7.00) the poorer the condition.
This can be caused by KCl dissolving away or reference contamination, for example.

Endress+Hauser

19Inputs:pH/ORP

Memosens

Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: pH or pH/ORP/Extended setup/Diagnostics settings/
Operating point

Zero point orFunction

Options

Info

Upper warning limit

Lower warning limit ...
pH 12.00 1)
Lower warning limit ...
950 mV 2)

Associated diagnostics code and message text:
505 Sensor calibration 1)
515 Sensor calibration 2)

Factory setting
pH 8.00 / 300 mV
Lower warning limit

pH 2.00 to Upper warning Associated diagnostics code and message text:
limit 1)507 Sensor calibration 1)-950 mV to Upper
517 Sensor calibration 2)
2)
warning limit
Factory setting
pH 6.00 / ‐300 mV

1)
2)

pH Glass
pH ISFET

Sensor Condition Check (only pH Glass)Sensor condition check (SCC) monitors the electrode status and the degree ofelectrode aging. The condition of the electrode is updated after every calibration.
The main reasons for a deteriorating electrode status are:
• Glass membrane blocked or dry• Diaphragm (reference) blocked
Remedial action
1.

Clean or regenerate sensor.

2.

If this does not have the desired effect:
Replace sensor.

Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: pH or pH/ORP/Extended setup/Diagnostics settings/
check

Sensor condition

Function

Options

Info

Function

Selection
• Off
• On

The function can only be switched on or off. It
uses internal limit values

Factory setting
Off

Diagnostics code and associated message text:
127 SCC sufficient
126 SCC bad

ORP meas. value (only ORP)
Specify the limit values to monitor the process. A diagnostics message is displayed if thelimits are exceeded or undershot.
Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: pH or pH/ORP/Extended setup/Diagnostics settings/

20

ORP meas. value

Function

Options

Info

Upper alarm limit

Factory setting
1000 mV

Diagnostics code and associated message text:
842 Process value

Upper warning limit

Factory setting
900 mV

Diagnostics code and associated message text:
942 Process value

Lower warning limit

Factory setting-900 mV

Diagnostics code and associated message text:
943 Process value

Lower alarm limit

Factory setting-1000 mV

Diagnostics code and associated message text:
843 Process value

Endress+Hauser

Memosens

Inputs:pH/ORP

Process Check System (PCS)The process check system (PCS) checks the measuring signal for stagnation. An alarm istriggered if the measuring signal does not change over a specific period (several measured
values).
y

y

yT

yT

tD

t

tA

t

A0027276

6yyT

Normal measuring signal, no alarm
Measuring signal
Set value for Tolerance width

A0028842

7
tD
tA

Stagnating signal, alarm is triggered
Set value for Duration
Time when the alarm is triggered

Main causes of stagnating measured values• Contaminated sensor, or sensor outside of medium• Sensor defective• Process error (e.g. through control system)
Remedial measures1.

Clean sensor.

2.

Check positioning of sensor in medium.

3.

Check electrode system.

4.

Switch controller off and then switch it back on.

Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: Sensor type/Extended setup/Diagnostics settings/

Process check system

Function

Options

Info

Function

Selection
• Off
• On

Switches the function on or off

Factory setting
Off
Duration

1 to 240 min
Factory setting
60 minTolerance width
Not for pH/ORP sensors

The range depends on thesensor
Factory setting
Depends on the sensor

Enter the time after which the timer should timeout. After this time, the diagnostic message
Process check alarm is displayed with the code
904.
Interval around the measuring signal (raw value)for detecting stagnation.
Measured values within the set interval are
regarded as stagnating.

Operating hours limit values
The total operating time of the sensor and its use under extreme conditions is monitored.
If the operating time exceeds the defined threshold values, the device issues acorresponding diagnostics message.
Each sensor has a limited life expectancy which heavily depends on the operating
conditions. If warning limits for operating times under extreme conditions are
specified and maintenance tasks are performed in time, the operation of themeasuring point without any downtime can be guaranteed.
Endress+Hauser

21Inputs:pH/ORP

Memosens

Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: pH or pH/ORP/Extended setup/Diagnostics settings/
hours
Function

Options

Limits operating

Info The range of adjustment for the operating hours alarm and warning limits is generally 1 to 50000 h.
Function

Selection
• Off
• On
Factory settingOn

On
The operation of the sensor under extreme
conditions is monitored, recorded in the sensor
and diagnostics messages are displayed on thecontroller.
Off
No diagnostics messages. However, the time thesensor operates under extreme conditions isrecorded in the sensor and can be read in thesensor information in the diagnostics menu.

Operating time
Warning limit

Total operating time of the sensor
Factory setting
10000 hDiagnostics code and associated message text:
199 Operating time

Factory setting
10000 hDiagnostics code and associated message text:
193 Operating time

Factory setting
10000 hDiagnostics code and associated message text:
194 Operating time

Operation > 80 °C
Warning limit
Operation > 100 °C
Warning limit
Operation < -300 mV
Warning limit

Only pH sensor or pH/ORP combined sensor
Factory setting
10000 hOperation > 300 mV
Warning limit

Diagnostics code and associated message text:
180 Operating time
Only pH sensor or pH/ORP combined sensor

Factory setting
10000 hDiagnostics code and associated message text:
179 Operating time

Delta slope (only pH and pH/ORP combined sensor)
The device determines the difference in slope between the last calibration and thepenultimate calibration, and issues a warning or an alarm depending on the setting
configured. The difference is an indicator for the condition of the sensor. The greater thechange, the greater the wear experienced by the pH-sensitive glass membrane as a resultof chemical corrosion or abrasion.
Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: pH or pH/ORP/Extended setup/Diagnostics settings/

Delta slope

Function

Options

Info

Function

Selection
• Off
• On

Switches the function on or off

Factory setting
Off
Warning limit

0.10 to 10.00 mV/pH
Factory setting
5.00 mV/pH

Specify the limit values for monitoring the slope
differential.
Associated diagnostics code and message text:
518 Sensor calibration

Delta zero point (pH glass) or Delta operating point (ISFET)
The device determines the difference between the last calibration and the penultimate
calibration, and issues a warning or an alarm depending on the setting configured. The
difference is an indicator for the condition of the sensor.
22

Endress+Hauser

Memosens

Inputs:pH/ORP

The following applies to pH glass electrodes:
The greater the change, the greater the wear experienced by the reference as a result ofcontaminating ions or KCl dissolving away.
Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: pH or pH/ORP/Extended setup/Diagnostics settings/
Delta operating point

Delta zero point orFunction

Options

Info

Function

Selection
• Off
• On

Switches the function on or off

Factory setting
Off
Warning limit

pH 0.00 to 2.00 (pH glass)0 to 950 mV (ISFET)

Specify the limit values for monitoring the slope
differential.

Factory setting
pH 0.50 / 25 mV

Associated diagnostics code and message text:• 520 Sensor calibration (pH glass)• 522 Sensor calibration (ISFET)

Sterilizations
The system counts the number of operating hours during which the sensor is exposed to atemperature that is typical for a sterilization. This temperature depends on the sensor.
Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: <Sensor type>/Extended setup/Diagnostics settings/

Sterilizations

Function

Options

Info

Function

Selection
• Off
• On

Switches the function on or off

Factory setting
Off
Warning limit

0 to 1000
Factory setting
Depends on sensor 1)

1)

Endress+Hauser

Specify the limit value for the number of sensor
sterilizations.
Diagnostics code and associated message text:
108 SIP, CIP, autoclaving

Every sensor type has its own factory setting. Can be viewed at: DIAG/Sensor information/Channel<Sensor type>/Recommended diag. limit values

23Inputs:pH/ORP

Memosens

Diagnostic behavior
The list of diagnostic messages displayed depends on the path selected. There are devicespecific messages, and messages that depend on what sensor is connected.
Menu/Setup/(General settings or Inputs<Sensor channel>)/Extended setup/Diagnostics settings/Diag.
behavior
Function

OptionsInfo‣ Select the message to be changed. Only then

List of diagnostic messages

is it possible to make the settings for thismessage.

Diag. code

Read only

Diagnostic message

Selection
• On
• Off
Factory setting
Depends on the message

Failure current

Deactivate the diagnostic message or activate itagain.
Deactivating means:• No error message in the measuring mode
• No failure current at the current output

Selection
• On
• Off

‣ Decide whether a failure current should be

Factory setting
Depends on the message

the event of general device errors, the Infailure
current is output at all the current

output at the current output if the diagnostic
message display is activated.

outputs. In the event of channel-specificerrors, the failure current is only output at
the assigned current output.
Status signal

Selection• Maintenance (M)• Out of specification (S)• Function check (C)• Failure (F)The messages are divided into different error
categories in accordance with NAMUR NE 107.

‣ Decide whether a status signal assignment
should be changed for the application.

Factory setting
Depends on the message
Diag. output

Selection• None• Alarm relay• Binary output• Relay 1 to n (depends onthe device version)
Factory setting
None

Select an output to which the diagnostic message
should be assigned.
A relay output must first be configured for
Diagnostics before it is possible to assign themessage to an output.
(Menu/Setup/Outputs: Assign the Diagnostics
function and set Operating mode to as
assigned.)

 Alarm relays are available, depending on the device version.
Cleaning program(for sensors)

Selection• None• Cleaning 1• Cleaning 2• Cleaning 3• Cleaning 4‣ Decide whether the diagnostic message
should trigger a cleaning program.

The cleaning programs can be defined under:
Menu/Setup/Additional functions/Cleaning.

Factory setting
None
Detail information

24

Read only

Additional information on the diagnostic
message and instructions on how to resolve theproblem.

Endress+Hauser

Memosens

Inputs:pH/ORP

5.3

Tag control

This function is used to specify which sensors are accepted at the device.
Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: Sensor type/Extended setup/

Tag control

Function

Options

Info

Operating mode

Selection
• Off
• Tag
• Group

Off
No tag control, all sensors are accepted.

Factory setting
Off

Tag

User-defined text
Factory setting• EH_CM44_• EH_CM44R_

Group

Tag
Only sensors with the same tag name are
accepted.
Group
Only sensors in the same tag group are accepted.
Enter the tag name.
The controller checks every sensor to beconnected as to whether this sensor belongs to
the measuring point, and only accepts thesensors that have the same name.

Numerical
Factory setting
0

5.4

Sensor change

Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: Sensor type/Extended setup/Sensor change• On
When the sensor is replaced, the last measured value is retained via the "hold" function.
A diagnostics message is not triggered.
• Off
When the sensor is replaced, the last measured value is not retained and triggers adiagnostics message.

5.5

Data processing factory setting

Possibility to restore the factory settings for the sensor input.
Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: Sensor type/Extended setup
1.
2.

Endress+Hauser

Factory default measurement processing
Answer the question: OK (press the navigator button).
 Only the factory settings for this particular input are restored. All other settings
remain unchanged.

25Inputs: Conductivity

Memosens

6

Inputs: Conductivity

6.1

Basic settings

6.1.1

Sensor identification

Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: sensor type
Function

Options

Info

ChannelSelection
• Off
• On

On
The channel display is switched on in themeasuring mode

Factory settingOn

OffThe channel is not displayed in the measuringmode, regardless of whether a sensor isconnected or not.

Read only(Only available if a sensor
is connected)

Connected sensor type

Sensor type
Order code

6.1.2

Order code of the connected sensor

Damping

The damping causes a floating average curve of the measured values over the time
specified.
Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: Sensor type
Function

Options

Info

Depends on the sensor 1)

0 to 600 s

Damping temp.

Factory setting
0s

The damping of the main value and of theintegrated temperature sensor can be specified.

1)

Damping pH or Damping ORP or Damping Cond or Damping DO or Damping DI or Damping nitrate or
Damping SAC or Damping turbidity or Damping PAHphe

6.1.3

Manual holdMenu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: Sensor type26

Function

Options

Info

Manual holdSelection
• Off
• On

On
You can use this function to set the channel
manually to "Hold".

Factory setting
Off

Off
No channel-specific holdEndress+Hauser

Memosens

Inputs: Conductivity

6.1.4

Operating mode and cell constantMenu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: Conductivity
Function

Options

Info

Operating mode

Selection• Conductivity• Resistance 1)• Concentration 2)• TDS

Instead of measuring conductivity, a contacting
conductivity sensor can also be used to measure
the resistivity and the Total Dissolved Solids(TDS) parameter.
An inductive conductivity sensor or aconductive four-pin sensor, on the other hand,
can be used to measure the concentration of themedium and the TDS parameter, as analternative to measuring conductivity.

Factory setting
Conductivity

TDS
TDS stands for all the inorganic and organic
substances in the water in ionic, molecular or
microgranular (<2 µm) form. The conductivity ismultiplied by a fixed factor of 0.5 for calculation
purposes.
Cell constant

1)
2)

Read only(Only available if a sensor
is connected)

The cell constant of the connected sensor isdisplayed (→ sensor certificate)

Only conductive sensor
Only inductive conductivity sensor and four-pin sensor (e.g. CLS82E)

6.1.5

Installation factor (only inductive conductivity sensors andfour-pin sensors)

In confined installation conditions, the conductivity measurement is affected by the pipe
walls.
The installation factor compensates for this effect. The transmitter corrects the cell
constant by multiplying by the installation factor.
The value of the installation factor depends on the diameter and the conductivity of thepipe nozzle as well as the sensor's distance to the wall.
If there is a sufficient distance between the wall and the sensor, the installation factor fdoes not have to be taken into consideration (f = 1.00). If the distance to the wall issmaller, the installation factor increases for electrically insulating pipes (f > 1) anddecreases for electrically conductive pipes (f < 1).
The installation factor can be determined using calibration solutions. Approximate values
for the sensor-specific installation factor are provided in the Operating Instructions of thesensor.
Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: Conductivity

Endress+Hauser

Function

Options

InfoInst. factor

Read only(Only available if a sensor
is connected)

Displays the current value. Only changes with acalibration.

27

Inputs: Conductivity

Memosens

6.1.6

Concentration table (only inductive conductivity sensors andfour-pin sensors)

Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: Conductivity
Function

Options

InfoConc. table

Selection• NaOH 0..15%• NaOH 25..50%• HCl 0..20%• HNO3 0..24%• HNO3 24..30%• H2SO4 0.5..27%• H2SO4 40..80%• H2SO4 93..99%• H3PO4 0..40%• NaCl 0..26%• User table 1 ... 4

Concentration tables saved at the factory:• NaOH: 0 to 15 %, 0 to 100 °C (32 to 212 °F)• NaOH: 25 to 50 %, 2 to 80 °C (36 to 176 °F)• HCl: 0 to 20 %, 0 to 65 °C (32 to 149 °F)• HNO3: 0 to 24 %, 2 to 80 °C (36 to 176 °F)• HNO3: 24 to 30 %, 2 to 80 °C (36 to 176 °F)• H2SO4: 0.5 to 27 %, 4 to 98 °C (39 to 208 °F)• H2SO4: 40 to 80 %, 4 to 98 °C (39 to 208 °F)• H2SO4: 93 to 99 %, 10 to 115 °C (50 to 239 °F)• H3PO4: 0 to 40 %, 2 to 80 °C (36 to 176 °F)• NaCl: 0 to 26 %, 2 to 80 °C (36 to 176 °F)

Operating mode =Concentration

Factory setting
NaOH 0..15%
Temp. comp. mode

Selection
Conc. table = User table 1 ... 4 • with temp. comp• without temp. comp

Only select without temp. comp in very narrowtemperature ranges.
Select with temp. comp in all other cases.

Factory settingwith temp. comp
Table name

Customized text, 16
Conc. table = User table 1 ... 4 characters
Edit table

3‐column table

Conc. table = User table 1 ... 4

Assign a meaningful name to the selected table.

Assign conductivity and concentration value
pairs for a specific temperature.

Data records for entering a concentration table
Given a defined medium composition, you can take data records for concentration tablesfrom tables. Alternatively you can determine the data records experimentally.
To this end:
1.

Create samples of the medium in the concentrations that occur in the process. Two
samples of different concentrations are required at the very minimum.

2.

Measure the uncompensated conductivity of these samples at a constanttemperature.
 If the variable process temperature is to be taken into consideration, determine
data records for at least two different temperatures (minimum 0.5 °C apart). The
transmitter requires at least 4 support points. Ideally, measure the conductivity of
two different concentrations at the minimum and maximum processtemperature.

You should receive measured data which, from a qualitative perspective, are presented as
illustrated in the following charts.

28

Endress+Hauser

Memosens

Inputs: Conductivity

2

κ

κ

T3

2

1

T3

1

T2
T2
T1

Cmax

Cmin

T1

C

Cmax

Cmin

C
A0036618

8

Example of measured data for variable temperatures

κConductivity

1

Measuring pointc

Concentration

2

Measuring range

T

Temperature

κ

κ

1

Cmin

1

T

Cmax

C

T

Cmin

Cmax

C
A0036619

9

Example of measured data for constant temperatures

κConductivity

TConstant temperaturecConcentration

1

Measuring range

The characteristic curves received from themeasuring points must increase or decrease
very monotonically in the range of theprocess conditions, this means that neither
maximum points, nor minimum points, norranges with a constant behavior can occur.
The curve profiles opposite are therefore
not permitted.

k

k

c

c
A0036620 10κcImpermissible curve profiles

Conductivity
Concentration

Example of a concentration table:

Endress+Hauser

Conductivity (uncompensated)[mS/cm]Concentration[mg/l]

Temperature[°C (°F)]

1.000

0.000

0.00 (32.00)

2.000

0.000

100.00 (212.00)

100.0

3.000

0.00 (32.00)

300.0

3.000

100.00 (212.00)

29

Inputs: Conductivity

Memosens

6.1.7

Unit and format

Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: Conductivity
Function

Options

Info

Main value format

Selection• Auto• #• #.#• #.##• #.###

Specify the number of decimal places.
Only four-pin sensors
The #.### format is not available for Operating
mode = Conductivity.

Factory setting
AutoCond. unit

Selection• Auto• µS/cm• mS/cm• S/cm• µS/m• mS/m• S/mOperating mode = Conductivity
All conductivity sensors

Factory setting
Auto
Unit

Selection• Auto• MΩm• MΩcm• kΩcm
• kΩm
• Ωm
• Ωcm

Operating mode = ResistanceContacting conductivity sensors

Factory setting
AutoConc. unit

Selection• %• mg/l 1)

Operating mode = Concentration
Inductive conductivity sensors and four-pin
sensors

Factory setting%
Unit

Selection• ppm• mg/lOperating mode = TDS
All conductivity sensors

Factory settingppm
1)

Only with user table

6.1.8

Temperature compensation

Temperature coefficient α = change in the conductivity per degree of temperature change:
κ(T) = κ(T0)(1 + α(T - T0))
κ(T) ... conductivity at process temperature T
κ(T0) ... conductivity at reference temperature T030

Endress+Hauser

Memosens

Inputs: Conductivity

The temperature coefficient depends both on the chemical composition of the solution andthe temperature itself.
Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: Conductivity
Function

Options

Info

Temp. source

Selection• Sensor• Manual• Measured value

Decide how you want to compensate the medium
temperature:• Automatically using the temperature sensor
of your sensor• Manually by entering the medium
temperature• Using an external temperature sensor

Factory setting
SensorMedium temperatureTemp. source = Manual-50.0 to 250.0 °C(-58.0 to 482.0 °F)

Enter the temperature of your medium.

Factory setting
25.0 °C (77 °F)
Measured value
Temp. source = Measured
value

Compensation
Operating mode =Conductivity

Selection• Sensor input• Fieldbus input withsubsequent selection of
the input signal

External temperature signals only in °C
Select an input to which a temperature sensor isconnected.
Alternatively you can use a temperature signal
via the fieldbus. In this case, you must select thefieldbus input afterwards.

Selection• None• Linear• NaCl (IEC 746-3)• Water ISO7888 (25°C)• UPW HCl
• UPW NaCl
• User table 1 ... 4

Various methods are available to compensate forthe temperature dependency. Depending on yourprocess, decide which type of compensation you
want to use.
Alternatively, you can also select None and thenmeasure the uncompensated conductivity.

Factory setting
LinearLinear temperature compensation
The change between two temperature points is taken to be constant, i.e. α = const.
Reference temperature and alpha coefficient (only for linear temperaturecompensation)
The alpha coefficients and alpha reference temperatures of your process medium must be
known. Typical alpha coefficients at a reference temperature of 25 °C are:
• Salts (e.g. NaCl): approx. 2.1 %/K• Bases (e.g. NaOH): approx. 1.7 %/K• Acids (e.g. HNO3): approx. 1.3 %/K
Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: Conductivity
Function

Options

Info

Ref. temp.

-5.0 to 100.0 °C(23.0 to 212.0 °F)

Reference temperature for calculating thetemperature-compensated conductivity

Factory setting
25.0 °C (77.0 °F)
Factor alpha0.000 to 20.000 %/K
Factory setting
2.100 %/K

Endress+HauserEnter the alpha coefficient of your process
medium31

Inputs: Conductivity

Memosens

a [%/K]

NaCl compensation
In the case of NaCl compensation (as per IEC 60746), a fixed non-linear curve specifying
the relationship between the temperature coefficient and temperature is saved in thedevice. This curve applies to low concentrations of up to approx. 5 % NaCl.
2.7

2.5

2.3

2.1
0

48

96

144
T [°C]
A0028902

Compensation for natural water
A non-linear function in accordance with ISO 7888 is saved in the device for temperaturecompensation in natural water.
Ultrapure water compensation (for conductive sensors)
Algorithms for pure and ultrapure water are stored in the device. These algorithms takethe dissociation of the water and its temperature dependency into account. They are used
for conductivity levels of up to approx. 10 µS/cm.
• UPW HCl
Optimized for measuring the acid conductivity downstream of a cation exchanger. Also
suitable for ammonia (NH3) and caustic soda (NaOH).
• UPW NaCl
Optimized for pH‐neutral contamination.
User-defined tables
You can save a function that takes the properties of your specific process into account. To
do so, determine the value pairs made up of the temperature T and conductivity κ with:• κ(T0) for the reference temperature T0• κ(T) for the temperatures that occur in the process• Use the following formula to calculate the α values for the temperatures that are
relevant in your process:α=

100% . κ(T) - κ(T0)
T - T0κ(T0); T ≠ T0

Values must be constantly increasing or decreasing.

32

Endress+Hauser

Memosens

Inputs: Conductivity

Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: Conductivity
Function

Options

Info

Temp. comp. mode

Selection• Conductivity• Coeff. Alpha

Conductivity
You specify the temperature, conductivity anduncompensated conductivity. Recommended forlarge measuring ranges and small measured
values.

Factory setting
Conductivity

Coeff. AlphaAs the value pairs, you specify an alpha value
and the related temperature.
Table name

Customized text, 16
Conc. table = User table 1 ... 4 characters

Assign a meaningful name to the selected table.

Edit table

Maximum number of rows: 25
The type of table depends on the option selectedunder Temp. comp. mode.

• Temperature
Conc. table = User table 1 ... 4 • Conductivity• Temperature comp.
cond.
• Temperature• Coefficient alpha

6.2

Extended setup

6.2.1

Temperature format

Menu/Setup/InputsChannel: Conductivity/

Extended setup

Function

Options

Info

Temperature format

Selection• #.#• #.##

Specify the number of decimal places.

Factory setting
#.#

6.2.2

Customer ID (only for E-sensors)

You can enter an individual identifier for the sensor. This can then be found in the menu
DIAG/Sensor information/Channel No. <Sensor type>/General information.

Endress+Hauser

33

Inputs: Conductivity

Memosens

6.2.3

Cleaning holdMenu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: <Sensor type>/

Extended setup

Function

Options

Info

Cleaning holdSelection• None• Cleaning 1 ... 4‣ For selecting one or more cleaning programs(multiple selection).
 For the programs defined, the channel
switches to "Hold" while cleaning is inprogress.

Factory setting
None

Cleaning programs are executed:• At a specified interval
For this, the cleaning program must be
started.
• If a diagnostics message is pending on thechannel and a cleaning has been specified forthis message (→ Inputs/Channel: Sensor
type/Diagnostics settings/Diag. behavior/
Diagnostic number/Cleaning program).

The cleaning programs are defined in the menu: Setup/Additional functions/Cleaning.

6.2.4

External holdA hold can be triggered for all the devices of a measuring point via a digital signal, e.g. afieldbus signal. Make sure that the hold signal is not used elsewhere. An external hold canbe assigned individually to every sensor input.
The function only appears in the Inputs menu if the signals for the external hold wereconfigured beforehand in the general hold settings:
Menu/Setup/General settings/Hold settings/External hold.
Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: <Sensor type>/Extended setup/
Function

Options

Info

SourceSelection• Binary inputs• Fieldbus signals

1.

For selecting the signal source of theexternal hold.
 Multiple selection is possible.

Factory setting
None

2.

OK: Confirm your selection.

6.2.5

Sterilization settings (only hygienic sensors)

Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: <Sensor type>/Extended setup/

Sterilization settings

Function

Options

Info

Temperature threshold

120 to 150 °C

This temperature must be exceeded for thesterilization counter to start and a sterilization
cycle to be counted.

Factory setting
121 °C
Duration

1 to 250 min
Factory setting
20 min34

External hold

The set temperature must be reached during thistime for a sterilization cycle to be counted.

Endress+Hauser

Memosens

Inputs: Conductivity

6.2.6

CIP settings (only hygienic sensors)

Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: <Sensor type>/Extended setup/

CIP settings

Function

Options

Info

Mode

Selection
• On
• Off

Switch the counter for the CIP cycles on or off

Factory setting
Off
Signal type

Selection• Acidic• Alkaline‣ Specify whether an acidic or alkaline CIP
should be recognized.

Factory setting
AcidicpH threshold

pH 2.0 to 11.0
Factory setting
pH 11.0

Upper temp. threshold

Factory setting
85 °C

Lower temp. threshold

Factory setting
75 °C

Duration

1 to 250 min
Factory setting
20 min

6.2.7

A CIP cycle is counted if the temperaturethreshold is exceeded and, simultaneously, thepH threshold is exceeded or undershot,
depending on the selected type.
• Signal type = Acidic→ The device counts when the pH threshold isundershot• Signal type = Alkaline→ The device counts when the pH threshold isexceeded
A CIP cycle is taken into consideration within thetemperature thresholds.
• Upper temp. threshold:If the temperature measured value exceeds
this limit value, the CIP conditions arebreached and a CIP cycle is not counted.
• Lower temp. threshold:
A CIP cycle is counted if the temperature
exceeds the lower temperature threshold anddrops below the threshold again after the set
minimum time at the very earliest.
Minimum time period in which the temperaturemust be between the lower and upper
temperature threshold for a CIP cycle to be
counted.

Diagnostics settings

In this menu branch, warning limits are specified or the use of diagnostics tools is defined.
The associated diagnostics code is displayed for every setting.

Endress+Hauser

35Inputs: Conductivity

Memosens

Sterilizations
The system counts the number of operating hours during which the sensor is exposed to atemperature that is typical for a sterilization. This temperature depends on the sensor.
Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: <Sensor type>/Extended setup/Diagnostics settings/

Sterilizations

Function

Options

Info

Function

Selection
• Off
• On

Switches the function on or off

Factory setting
Off
Warning limit

0 to 1000

Specify the limit value for the number of sensor
sterilizations.
Diagnostics code and associated message text:
108 SIP, CIP, autoclaving

Factory setting
Depends on sensor 1)
1)

Every sensor type has its own factory setting. Can be viewed at: DIAG/Sensor information/Channel<Sensor type>/Recommended diag. limit values

CIP cycles (only four-pin sensors)
The system counts the number of operating hours during which the sensor is exposed to atemperature that is typical for a cleaning. This temperature depends on the sensor.
Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: Conductivity/Extended setup/Diagnostics settings/

CIP-cycles

Function

Options

Info

Function

Selection
• Off
• On

Switches the function on or off

Factory setting
Off
Warning limit‣ Specify the limit value for the number of CIP

0 to 3000

cycles of your sensor.

Factory setting
1000

Diagnostics code and associated message text:
108 SIP, CIP, autoclaving

Process Check System (PCS)The process check system (PCS) checks the measuring signal for stagnation. An alarm istriggered if the measuring signal does not change over a specific period (several measured
values).
y

y

yT

yT

tD

t

tA

A0027276

 11
y
yT

36

Normal measuring signal, no alarm

Measuring signal
Set value for Tolerance widtht

A0028842

 12
tD
tA

Stagnating signal, alarm is triggered

Set value for Duration
Time when the alarm is triggered

Endress+Hauser

Memosens

Inputs: Conductivity

Main causes of stagnating measured values• Contaminated sensor, or sensor outside of medium• Sensor defective• Process error (e.g. through control system)
Remedial measures1.

Clean sensor.

2.

Check positioning of sensor in medium.

3.

Check electrode system.

4.

Switch controller off and then switch it back on.

Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: Sensor type/Extended setup/Diagnostics settings/

Process check system

Function

Options

Info

Function

Selection
• Off
• On

Switches the function on or off

Factory setting
Off
Duration

1 to 240 min
Factory setting
60 minTolerance width
Not for pH/ORP sensors

The range depends on thesensor
Factory setting
Depends on the sensor

Enter the time after which the timer should timeout. After this time, the diagnostic message
Process check alarm is displayed with the code
904.
Interval around the measuring signal (raw value)for detecting stagnation.
Measured values within the set interval are
regarded as stagnating.

Operating hours limit values
The total operating time of the sensor and its use under extreme conditions is monitored.
If the operating time exceeds the defined threshold values, the device issues acorresponding diagnostics message.
Each sensor has a limited life expectancy which heavily depends on the operating
conditions. If warning limits for operating times under extreme conditions are
specified and maintenance tasks are performed in time, the operation of themeasuring point without any downtime can be guaranteed.
Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: Conductivity/Extended setup/Diagnostics settings/
hours
Function

Options

Limits operating

Info The range of adjustment for the operating hours alarm and warning limits is generally 1 to 50000 h.
Function

Selection
• Off
• On
Factory settingOn

On
The operation of the sensor under extreme
conditions is monitored, recorded in the sensor
and diagnostics messages are displayed on thecontroller.
Off
No diagnostics messages. However, the time thesensor operates under extreme conditions isrecorded in the sensor and can be read in thesensor information in the Diagnostics menu.

Operating time
Warning limit

Endress+Hauser

Total operating time of the sensor
Factory setting
10000 hDiagnostics code and associated message text:
199 Operating time37

Inputs: Conductivity

Memosens

Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: Conductivity/Extended setup/Diagnostics settings/
hours
Function

Limits operating

Options

Info

Factory setting
10000 hDiagnostics code and associated message text:
193 Operating time

Factory setting
10000 hDiagnostics code and associated message text:
194 Operating time

Operation > 80 °C
Warning limit
Operation > 100 °C
Warning limit
Operation > 120 °C
Warning limit

Only conductive sensors
Factory setting
10000 hOperation > 125 °C
Warning limit

Only inductive sensors
Factory setting
10000 hOperation > 140 °C
Warning limit

Factory setting
10000 hFactory setting
10000 hDiagnostics code and associated message text:
198 Operating time
Only conductive sensors

Factory setting
10000 hOperation < 5 °C
Warning limit

Diagnostics code and associated message text:
197 Operating time
Only inductive conductivity sensors and fourpin sensors

Operation > 80°C <100nS/cm
Warning limit

Diagnostics code and associated message text:
196 Operating time
Only conductive sensors

Operation > 150 °C
Warning limit

Diagnostics code and associated message text:
195 Operating time

Diagnostics code and associated message text:
187 Operating time
Only inductive sensors

Factory setting
10000 hDiagnostics code and associated message text:
188 Operating time

Polarization compensation (only conductive two-pin sensors)
As a result of flow through the electrolyte/electrode interface, reactions take place here
which result in additional voltage. These polarization effects limit the measuring range ofconductive sensors. Sensor-specific compensation increases the level of accuracy at themeasuring range limits.
The controller recognizes the Memosens sensor and automatically applies a suitablecompensation. You can view the measuring range limits of the sensor underDiagnostics/Sensor information/Sensor specifications.
Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: Conductivity/Extended setup/Diagnostics settings/
compensation

Polarization

Function

Options

Info

Function

Selection
• Off
• On

Diagnostics code and associated message text:
168 Polarization

Factory setting
Off

Pharmaceutical water
Here you can make settings for monitoring pharmaceutical water in accordance with theUnited States Pharmacopoeia (USP) or European Pharmacopoeia (EP).

38

Endress+Hauser

Memosens

Inputs: Conductivity

The uncompensated conductivity value and the temperature are measured for the limit
functions. The measured values are compared against the tables defined in the standards.
An alarm is triggered if the limit value is exceeded. Furthermore, you can also set a
preliminary alarm (warning limit) which signals undesired operating states before theyoccur.
Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: Conductivity/Extended setup/Diagnostics settings/

Pharmacy-water

Function

Options

Info

Function

Selection
• Off
• EP
• USP

The alarm values are stored in the device inaccordance with USP <645> or EP <169>specifications.
Diagnostic message 914 USP/ EP alarm isdisplayed if the USP or EP alarm values
programmed into the software are exceeded.

Factory setting
Off
Warning limit

10.0 to 99.9 %Factory setting
80.0 %You define the warning limit as a % of the alarm
value.
Diagnostics code and associated message text:
915 USP / EP warning

Diagnostic behavior
The list of diagnostic messages displayed depends on the path selected. There are devicespecific messages, and messages that depend on what sensor is connected.
Menu/Setup/(General settings or Inputs<Sensor channel>)/Extended setup/Diagnostics settings/Diag.
behavior
Function

OptionsInfo‣ Select the message to be changed. Only then

List of diagnostic messages

is it possible to make the settings for thismessage.

Diag. code

Read only

Diagnostic message

Selection
• On
• Off
Factory setting
Depends on the message

Failure current

Deactivate the diagnostic message or activate itagain.
Deactivating means:• No error message in the measuring mode
• No failure current at the current output

Selection
• On
• Off

‣ Decide whether a failure current should be

Factory setting
Depends on the message

the event of general device errors, the Infailure
current is output at all the current

output at the current output if the diagnostic
message display is activated.

outputs. In the event of channel-specificerrors, the failure current is only output at
the assigned current output.
Status signal

Selection• Maintenance (M)• Out of specification (S)• Function check (C)• Failure (F)The messages are divided into different error
categories in accordance with NAMUR NE 107.

‣ Decide whether a status signal assignment
should be changed for the application.

Factory setting
Depends on the message

Endress+Hauser

39Inputs: Conductivity

Memosens

Menu/Setup/(General settings or Inputs<Sensor channel>)/Extended setup/Diagnostics settings/Diag.
behavior
Function
Diag. output

Options

Info

Selection• None• Alarm relay• Binary output• Relay 1 to n (depends onthe device version)

Select an output to which the diagnostic message
should be assigned.

Factory settingNone

A relay output must first be configured for
Diagnostics before it is possible to assign themessage to an output.
(Menu/Setup/Outputs: Assign the Diagnostics
function and set Operating mode to as
assigned.)

 Alarm relays are available, depending on the device version.
Cleaning program(for sensors)

Selection• None• Cleaning 1• Cleaning 2• Cleaning 3• Cleaning 4‣ Decide whether the diagnostic message
should trigger a cleaning program.

The cleaning programs can be defined under:
Menu/Setup/Additional functions/Cleaning.

Factory setting
None
Detail information

6.2.8

Read only

Additional information on the diagnostic
message and instructions on how to resolve theproblem.

Tag control

This function is used to specify which sensors are accepted at the device.
Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: Sensor type/Extended setup/

Tag control

Function

Options

Info

Operating mode

Selection
• Off
• Tag
• Group

Off
No tag control, all sensors are accepted.

Factory setting
Off

Tag

User-defined text
Factory setting• EH_CM44_• EH_CM44R_

Group

Tag
Only sensors with the same tag name are
accepted.
Group
Only sensors in the same tag group are accepted.
Enter the tag name.
The controller checks every sensor to beconnected as to whether this sensor belongs to
the measuring point, and only accepts thesensors that have the same name.

Numerical
Factory setting
0

6.2.9

Sensor change

Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: Sensor type/Extended setup/Sensor change• On
When the sensor is replaced, the last measured value is retained via the "hold" function.
A diagnostics message is not triggered.
• Off
When the sensor is replaced, the last measured value is not retained and triggers adiagnostics message.

40

Endress+Hauser

Memosens

Inputs: Conductivity

6.2.10Sensor factory settings (only inductive conductivity sensors)

Here you can restore the sensor factory settings.
Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: Sensor type/Extended setup
1.
2.

Factory default sensor
Respond to prompt: OKwhen the prompt for the device software appears.
 Only the factory settings for the sensor are restored. The settings for the input
remain unchanged.

6.2.11

Calibration monitoring

Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: Conductivity/Extended setup
Function

Options

Info

Calib. expiration time

Selection• Off• During operation• When connectingThis function checks the time elapsed since thelast sensor calibration. This may occur
continuously during operation or just once while
the calibration data are being read (sensor
connection, device start).

Factory setting
Off

Calibration validity• During operation
The function constantly provides information
about the time that has elapsed since the lastcalibration.
• When connecting
The time elapsed since the last calibration is
only reported when a sensor is connected or a
device is restarted. No error message is
generated during operation.
The function checks how long ago the sensor
was last calibrated. A diagnostics message isdisplayed if the time since the last calibration islonger than specified by the predefined warningand alarm limit.

Warning limit

Factory setting
800 h

Diagnostic message: 105 Calibration validity

Alarm limit

Factory setting
1000 hDiagnostic message: 104 Calibration validity

Warning and alarm limits mutually influence each other's possible range of adjustment.
Range of adjustment which must include both limits:
1 to 20000 h
Generally, the following applies: alarm limit > warning limit

6.2.12

Data processing factory setting

Possibility to restore the factory settings for the sensor input.
Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: Sensor type/Extended setup
1.
2.

Factory default measurement processing
Answer the question: OK (press the navigator button).
 Only the factory settings for this particular input are restored. All other settings
remain unchanged.

6.2.13

Recommended values (only for E-sensors)

The recommended values apply for the limit values in the diagnostic settings (Setup/
Inputs/Channel No: <Sensor type>/Extended setup/Diagnostics settings) and are loaded
implicitly the first time an E-sensor is connected. You can view the values here:
Endress+Hauser

41

Inputs: Conductivity

Memosens

DIAG/Sensor information/Channel No.: <Sensor type>/Recommended diag. limit
values1.
2.

42

Load recommended values
OK The recommended sensor values for calibration and diagnostic settings are
accepted and the current settings are overwritten.

Endress+Hauser

Memosens

Inputs: Oxygen

7

Inputs: Oxygen

7.1

Basic settings

7.1.1

Sensor identification

Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: sensor type
Function

Options

Info

ChannelSelection
• Off
• On

On
The channel display is switched on in themeasuring mode

Factory settingOn

OffThe channel is not displayed in the measuringmode, regardless of whether a sensor isconnected or not.

Read only(Only available if a sensor
is connected)

Connected sensor type

Sensor type
Order code

7.1.2

Order code of the connected sensor

Main value

Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: DO
Function

Options

Info

Main value

Selection• Concentration liquid• Concentration gaseous• Saturation• Partial pressure• Raw value nA 1)• Raw value μs 2)

Decide how you want to display the main value.
Other functions, such as the setting for the unit,
depend on this setting.

Factory setting
Concentration liquid
1)2)Amperometric sensor
Optical sensor

7.1.3

Damping

The damping causes a floating average curve of the measured values over the time
specified.
Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: Sensor type
Function

Options

Info

Depends on the sensor 1)

0 to 600 s

Damping temp.

Factory setting
0s

The damping of the main value and of theintegrated temperature sensor can be specified.

1)

Endress+Hauser

Damping pH or Damping ORP or Damping Cond or Damping DO or Damping DI or Damping nitrate or
Damping SAC or Damping turbidity or Damping PAHphe

43

Inputs: Oxygen

Memosens

7.1.4

Unit

Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: DO
Function

Options

Info

Unit

Selection• mg/l 1)• µg/l 1)• ppm 1)
• ppb 1)
• %Vol 2)• ppmVol 2)

The unit can only be selected for the main
measured values:• Concentration liquid• Concentration gaseous

Factory setting
mg/l 1)%Vol 2)
1)
2)Main value = Concentration liquid
Main value = Concentration gaseous

7.1.5

Manual holdMenu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: Sensor type
Function

Options

Info

Manual holdSelection
• Off
• On

On
You can use this function to set the channel
manually to "Hold".

Factory setting
Off

Off
No channel-specific hold

7.2

Extended setup

7.2.1

Temperature compensation (only amperometric sensors and
COS81E)

Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: DO/Extended setup
Function

Options

Info

Temp. compensation

Selection• Automatic• Manual

Decide how you want to compensate the medium
temperature:• Automatically using the temperature sensor
of your sensor
This means that the temperature is always
compensated based on the current
temperature value.
• Manually by entering the medium
temperatureThis means that the measured value is always
compensated against the value entered, e.g.
for inlet and outlet monitoring in a coolingfacility.

Factory setting
Automatic

44

Temperature

0 to 80 °C (32 to 176 °F)

Temp. compensation =ManualFactory setting
20 °C (68 °F)

Enter the temperature of your medium, or
another temperature which you want to use as areference temperature.

Endress+Hauser

Memosens

Inputs: Oxygen

7.2.2

Measured value formats

Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: DO/

Extended setup

Function

Options

Info

Main value format

Selection• #.#• #.##• #.###• #Specify the number of decimal places.

Factory setting#.##
Temperature format

Selection• #.#• #.##
Factory setting
#.#

7.2.3

Medium compensation (in the process)Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: DO/

Extended setup

Function

Options

Info

Medium pressure

Selection• Process pressure• Air pressure• Altitude• Measured value

Press Measured value you can connect apressure measured value via a fieldbus input or acurrent input. This measured value is then used
for medium pressure compensation.

Factory setting
Air pressure

For the other types of compensation, specify acompensation value for the measurement ineach case.
1.

2.
Input pressure
Medium pressure =Measured value

Specify either the altitude (-300 to
4000 m), the process pressure (500 to
9999 hPa) or the air pressure (500 to
1200 hPa) of the measuring point.
 The pressure used during thecalibration is also displayed for
information purposes. You canchange this pressure in: Calib.
settings/Medium pressure.
Confirm.

Selection• Current inputs• Fieldbus signals• NoneOnly available if a fieldbus is activated or acurrent input is available. Configure a current
input before using its measured value forpressure compensation of the oxygen sensor.

Factory setting
None

Instructions of the transmitter/ Operating
analyzer/sampler, →  6
Configure the input variable of the current input
with Parameter with the hPa unit in order toensure correct scaling. Adjust the measuring
range limits accordingly.
Example: The measuring range of the connectedpressure sensor is from 0 to 10 bar.

Endress+Hauser

1.

Parameter: Configure current input.

2.

Define hPa as the unit.

3.

Enter 0 for Lower range value and10,000 for Upper range value (1 bar ≈1000 hPa).

45

Inputs: Oxygen

Memosens

Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: DO/

Extended setup

Function

Options

Salinity

Selection• Fixed value• Measured value

Info

Factory setting
Fixed value
Fixed value

0 to 40 g/kg

Salinity = Fixed value

Factory setting
0 g/kgSensorselection

Selection• None• Conductivity sensor

Salinity = Measured value

Factory setting
None

7.2.4

The influence of salt content on oxygen
measurement is compensated with this function.
Example: sea water measurement as per
Copenhagen Standard (30 g/kg).
As an alternative to specifying a fixed value that
corresponds to your application, you can use themeasured value of a connected conductivity
sensor. A CLS50D or a CLS54D is recommended
to this end. Salinity compensation via ameasured value works optimally in thetemperature range 2 ‐ 35 °C at a conductivity
level up to a maximum of 42 S/m.

LED settings (only COS81E) and measurement filter

Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: DO/

Extended setup

Function

OptionsInfo

LED temp. mode

Selection
• Off
• On

Switches off the LED when the set temperaturethreshold is exceeded.
This prevents the premature aging of the sensor
cap, e.g. during a CIP or SIP cycle.

Factory settingOn
LED temp. threshold

30 to 130 °C (86 to 266 °F)

LED temp. mode = On

Factory setting
80 °C (176 °F)

LED measuring interval

Selection• 1 second• 3 seconds• 10 seconds• 30 seconds
Factory setting
1 second

Measurement filter

Selection• Normal• Life science - standard• Life science - strong• (Off)• (Low)• (High)• (Very high)

The LED measuring interval influences the
response time on the one hand and theoperating life of the sensor cap on the other.
Shorter intervals improve the response time but
reduce the operating life of the sensor cap.
Make your setting depending on therequirements of your process.
Smoothing filter for the measured value
Filters indicated in brackets are only intended forvery special applications (e.g. research work).
Appears if a sensor is Unknown:
configured with a filter that the current
firmware version does not recognize. In
this case, you must update the firmware or
select a valid measurement filter.

Factory setting
Normal

7.2.5

Customer ID (only for E-sensors)

You can enter an individual identifier for the sensor. This can then be found in the menu
DIAG/Sensor information/Channel No. <Sensor type>/General information.

46

Endress+Hauser

Memosens

Inputs: Oxygen

7.2.6

Cleaning holdMenu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: <Sensor type>/

Extended setup

Function

Options

Info

Cleaning holdSelection• None• Cleaning 1 ... 4‣ For selecting one or more cleaning programs(multiple selection).
 For the programs defined, the channel
switches to "Hold" while cleaning is inprogress.

Factory setting
None

Cleaning programs are executed:• At a specified interval
For this, the cleaning program must be
started.
• If a diagnostics message is pending on thechannel and a cleaning has been specified forthis message (→ Inputs/Channel: Sensor
type/Diagnostics settings/Diag. behavior/
Diagnostic number/Cleaning program).

The cleaning programs are defined in the menu: Setup/Additional functions/Cleaning.

7.2.7

External holdA hold can be triggered for all the devices of a measuring point via a digital signal, e.g. afieldbus signal. Make sure that the hold signal is not used elsewhere. An external hold canbe assigned individually to every sensor input.
The function only appears in the Inputs menu if the signals for the external hold wereconfigured beforehand in the general hold settings:
Menu/Setup/General settings/Hold settings/External hold.
Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: <Sensor type>/Extended setup/
Function

Options

Info

SourceSelection• Binary inputs• Fieldbus signals

1.

For selecting the signal source of theexternal hold.
 Multiple selection is possible.

Factory setting
None

2.

OK: Confirm your selection.

7.2.8

Sterilization settings (only hygienic sensors)

Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: <Sensor type>/Extended setup/

Sterilization settings

Function

Options

Info

Temperature threshold

120 to 150 °C

This temperature must be exceeded for thesterilization counter to start and a sterilization
cycle to be counted.

Factory setting
121 °C
Duration

1 to 250 min
Factory setting
20 minEndress+Hauser

External hold

The set temperature must be reached during thistime for a sterilization cycle to be counted.

47

Inputs: Oxygen

Memosens

7.2.9

CIP settings (only hygienic sensors)

Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: <Sensor type>/Extended setup/

CIP settings

Function

Options

Info

Mode

Selection
• On
• Off

Switch the counter for the CIP cycles on or off

Factory setting
Off
Signal type

Selection• Acidic• Alkaline‣ Specify whether an acidic or alkaline CIP
should be recognized.

Factory setting
AcidicpH threshold

pH 2.0 to 11.0
Factory setting
pH 11.0

Upper temp. threshold

Factory setting
85 °C

Lower temp. threshold

Factory setting
75 °C

Duration

1 to 250 min
Factory setting
20 min48

A CIP cycle is counted if the temperaturethreshold is exceeded and, simultaneously, thepH threshold is exceeded or undershot,
depending on the selected type.
• Signal type = Acidic→ The device counts when the pH threshold isundershot• Signal type = Alkaline→ The device counts when the pH threshold isexceeded
A CIP cycle is taken into consideration within thetemperature thresholds.
• Upper temp. threshold:If the temperature measured value exceeds
this limit value, the CIP conditions arebreached and a CIP cycle is not counted.
• Lower temp. threshold:
A CIP cycle is counted if the temperature
exceeds the lower temperature threshold anddrops below the threshold again after the set
minimum time at the very earliest.
Minimum time period in which the temperaturemust be between the lower and upper
temperature threshold for a CIP cycle to be
counted.

Endress+Hauser

Memosens

Inputs: Oxygen

7.2.10Calibration settings

Stability criteria
You define the permitted measured value fluctuation which must not be exceeded in acertain timeframe during the calibration. If the permitted difference is exceeded, thecalibration is not permitted and is aborted automatically.
Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: DO/

Extended setup/Calib. settings/

Stability criteria

Function

Options

Info

Delta signal

0.1 to 2.0 %Permitted measured value fluctuation duringcalibration.
Referenced to the raw value in nA in the case ofamperometric sensors, and referenced to the raw
value in µS in the case of optical sensors.

Factory setting
0.2 %Delta temperature

0.10 to 2.00 K

Permitted temperature fluctuation duringcalibration

Factory setting
0.50 K
Duration

5 to 60 s

Timeframe within which the permitted
measured value fluctuation must not be
exceeded

Factory setting
10 sMedium compensation (during calibration)
Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: DO/Extended setup/

Calib. settings

Function

Options

Info

Medium pressure

Selection• Process pressure• Air pressure• Altitude• As in measurement

Specify the pressure at which calibration takes
place

Factory setting
Air pressure

Process pressure

500 to 9999 hPa

Medium pressure = Processpressure

Factory setting
1013 hPa

Air pressure

500 to 1200 hPa

Medium pressure = Airpressure

Factory setting
1013 hPa

Altitude-300 to 4000 m

Medium pressure = Altitude

Factory setting
0m

Rel. hum. (air variable)

0 to 100 %• Process pressure
The pressure during calibration differs fromthe normal process pressure (calibration in
the process)• Air pressure
Air pressure at which the calibration takes
place (calibration in air)
• Altitude
Altitude at which the calibration takes place(calibration in air)
• As in measurement
Process conditions set in the Sensor menu
correspond to the calibration conditions(calibration in the process)Factory setting
100 %Endress+Hauser

49Inputs: Oxygen

Memosens

Calibration monitoring
The calibration interval for the sensor can be specified here. Once the configured time
elapses, the diagnostic message Calibration validity is shown on the display.
The timer is reset automatically if the sensor is recalibrated.
Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: <Sensor type>/Extended setup/

Calib. settings

Function

Options

Info

Calib. expiration time

Selection• Off• During operation• When connectingThis function checks the time elapsed since thelast sensor calibration. This may occur
continuously during operation or just once while
the calibration data are being read (sensor
connection, device start, calibration kit
replacement).

Factory settingOff

1.

During operation
During continuous operation, thisfunction informs the user of the time
elapsed since the last calibration.

2.

When connecting
During a batch process, this function
ensures that only recently calibrated
sensors are used. No error message is
generated during the batch process.

Calibration validity
Warning limit

Factory setting
800 h

Diagnostic message: 105 Calibration validity

Alarm limit

Factory setting
1000 hDiagnostic message: 104 Calibration validity

Warning and alarm limits mutually influence each other's possible range of adjustment.
Range of adjustment which must include both limits:
1 to 20000 h
Generally, the following applies: alarm limit > warning limit

7.2.11

Diagnostics settings

In this menu branch, warning limits are specified or the use of diagnostics tools is defined.
The associated diagnostics code is displayed for every setting.
Slope (only amperometric sensors and COS61D)The (relative) slope characterizes the sensor condition. Decreasing values indicate
electrolyte exhaustion. You can control when the electrolyte should be replaced by
specifying limit values and the diagnostics messages these limit values trigger.

‣ Specify the limit values for slope monitoring in your sensor.

50

Endress+Hauser

Memosens

Inputs: Oxygen

Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: DO/Extended setup/Diagnostics settings/
Function
Upper warning limit

Options

Slope

Info
1)

0.0 to 200.0 %80.1 to 200.0 % 2)

Associated diagnostics code and message text:
511 Sensor calibration

Factory setting
140.0 % 1)
110.0 % 2)
Lower warning limit

0.0 to 200.0 % 1)
0.0 to 109.9 % 2)

Associated diagnostics code and message text:
509 Sensor calibration

Factory setting
60.0 % 1)
80.0 % 2)1)2)

Amperometric sensors
COS61D

Delta slope (only amperometric sensors)
The device determines the difference in slope between the last calibration and thepenultimate calibration, and issues a warning or an alarm depending on the setting
configured. The difference is an indicator for the condition of the sensor.
An increasing change indicates the formation of buildup on the sensor membrane orelectrolyte contamination. Replace the diaphragm and electrolyte as specified in the
instructions in the sensor operating manual.
Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: DO/Extended setup/Diagnostics settings/

Delta slope

Function

Options

Info

Function

Selection
• Off
• On

Switches the function on or off

Factory setting
Off
Warning limit

0.0 to 50.0 %Factory setting
15.0 %

Specify your limit values for monitoring the slope
differential.
Associated diagnostics code and message text:
518 Sensor calibration

Zero point (only amperometric sensors)
The zero point corresponds to the sensor signal that is measured in a medium in theabsence of oxygen. You can calibrate the zero point in water that is free from oxygen or inhigh-purity nitrogen. This improves accuracy in the trace range.

‣ Specify limit values for zero point monitoring of the sensor.
General range of adjustment: -10 to 10 nA.
The set values influence the available range of adjustment of the other limit.
Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: DO/Extended setup/Diagnostics settings/

Endress+Hauser

Zero point

Function

Options

Info

Upper warning limit

Factory setting
1.0 nA

Associated diagnostics code and message text:
505 Zero warning

Lower warning limit

Factory setting-1.0 nA

Associated diagnostics code and message text:
507 Zero warning

51

Inputs: Oxygen

Memosens

Delta zero point (only amperometric sensors)
The device determines the difference between the last calibration and the penultimate
calibration, and issues a warning or an alarm depending on the setting configured. The
difference is an indicator for the condition of the sensor. Increasing differences indicate
the formation of buildup on the cathode. Clean or replace the cathode as specified in the
instructions in the sensor operating manual.
Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: DO/Extended setup/Diagnostics settings/

Delta zero point

Function

Options

Info

Function

Selection
• Off
• On

Switches the function on or off

Factory setting
Off
Warning limit

0.0 to 10 nA
Factory setting
0.5 nA‣ Specify the limit values for monitoring theslope differential.

Associated diagnostics code and message text:
520 Sensor calibration

Calibration quality index (only COS81E)
The current calibration is compared against the first calibration of the mounted sensor cap
and the condition of the cap is displayed as a percentage.
Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: DO/Extended setup/Diagnostics settings/

Calibration quality index

Function

Options

Info

Warning limit

0 to 100 %Associated diagnostics code and message text:
734 Calibration quality

Factory setting
80 %Cap calibrations (all sensors except COS61D)The calibration counters in the sensor make a distinction between sensor calibrations andcalibrations with the membrane cap currently used. If this cap is replaced, only the (cap)counter is reset.
Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: DO/Extended setup/Diagnostics settings/

Number of calibrations cap

Function

Options

Info

Function

Selection
• Off
• On

Switch the function on/off

Factory setting
Off
Warning limit

1 to 1000
Factory setting
500 1)
20 2)‣ Specify how many calibrations may be

performed with a sensor cap before the cap
has to be replaced. The number depends
heavily on the process and must be
determined individually.

Associated diagnostics code and message text:
535 Sensor check
1)
2)

52

Amperometric sensors
COS81E

Endress+Hauser

Memosens

Inputs: Oxygen

Sterilizations (only sterilizable E-sensors)
The system counts the number of operating hours during which the sensor is exposed to atemperature that is typical for a sterilization. This temperature depends on the sensor.
Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: <Sensor type>/Extended setup/Diagnostics settings/

Sterilizations

Function

Options

Info

Function

Selection
• Off
• On

Switches the function on or off

Factory setting
Off
Warning limit

0 to 1000
Factory setting
Depends on sensor 1)

1)

Specify the limit value for the number of sensor
sterilizations.
Diagnostics code and associated message text:
108 SIP, CIP, autoclaving

Every sensor type has its own factory setting. Can be viewed at: DIAG/Sensor information/Channel<Sensor type>/Recommended diag. limit values

Cap sterilizations (only sterilizable E-sensors)
The sterilization counters in the sensor make a distinction between the sensor and themembrane/fluorescence cap currently used. If this cap is replaced, only the (cap) counter isreset.
Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: DO/Extended setup/Diagnostics settings/

Number of cap sterilizations

Function

Options

Info

Function

Selection
• Off
• On

‣ Specify how many sterilizations may be

Factory setting
Off
Warning limit

0 to 200
Factory setting• 25 1)• 200 2)

1)
2)

performed with a sensor cap before the cap
has to be replaced. The number depends
heavily on the process and must be
determined individually.

Associated diagnostics code and message text:
109 SIP, CIP, autoclav cap

Amperometric sensors
COS81ECIP cycles (only sterilizable E-sensors)
The system counts the number of operating hours during which the sensor is exposed to atemperature that is typical for a cleaning. This temperature depends on the sensor.
Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: DO/Extended setup/Diagnostics settings/

CIP-cycles

Function

Options

Info

Function

Selection
• Off
• On

Switches the function on or off

Factory setting
Off
Warning limit

1 to 1000
Factory setting
1000

Endress+Hauser‣ Specify the limit value for the number of CIP
cycles of your sensor.

Diagnostics code and associated message text:
108 SIP, CIP, autoclaving

53

Inputs: Oxygen

Memosens

CIP cycles cap (only sterilizable E-sensors)
The sterilization counters in the sensor make a distinction between the sensor and themembrane or fluorescence cap currently used. If this cap is replaced, only the cap counteris reset.
Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: DO/Extended setup/Diagnostics settings/

CIP-cycles cap

Function

Options

Info

Function

Selection
• Off
• On

Switches the function on or off

Factory setting
Off
Warning limit‣ Specify the limit value for the number of CIP

1 to 300

cycles of the sensor cap.

Factory setting
200

Diagnostics code and associated message text:
109 SIP, CIP, autoclav cap

Process Check System (PCS)The process check system (PCS) checks the measuring signal for stagnation. An alarm istriggered if the measuring signal does not change over a specific period (several measured
values).
y

y

yT

yT

tD

t

tA

A0027276

 13
y
yT

Normal measuring signal, no alarm

Measuring signal
Set value for Tolerance widtht

A0028842

 14
tD
tA

Stagnating signal, alarm is triggered

Set value for Duration
Time when the alarm is triggered

Main causes of stagnating measured values• Contaminated sensor, or sensor outside of medium• Sensor defective• Process error (e.g. through control system)
Remedial measures54

1.

Clean sensor.

2.

Check positioning of sensor in medium.

3.

Check electrode system.

4.

Switch controller off and then switch it back on.

Endress+Hauser

Memosens

Inputs: Oxygen

Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: Sensor type/Extended setup/Diagnostics settings/

Process check system

Function

Options

Info

Function

Selection
• Off
• On

Switches the function on or off

Factory setting
Off
Duration

1 to 240 min
Factory setting
60 minTolerance width
Not for pH/ORP sensors

The range depends on thesensor
Factory setting
Depends on the sensor

Enter the time after which the timer should timeout. After this time, the diagnostic message
Process check alarm is displayed with the code
904.
Interval around the measuring signal (raw value)for detecting stagnation.
Measured values within the set interval are
regarded as stagnating.

Operating hours limit values
The total operating time of the sensor and its use under extreme conditions is monitored.
If the operating time exceeds the defined threshold values, the device issues acorresponding diagnostics message.
Each sensor has a limited life expectancy which heavily depends on the operating
conditions. If warning limits for operating times under extreme conditions are
specified and maintenance tasks are performed in time, the operation of themeasuring point without any downtime can be guaranteed.
Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: DO/Extended setup/Diagnostics settings/
Function

Options

Limits operating hours

Info The range of adjustment for the operating hours alarm and warning limits is generally 1 to 50000 h.
Function

Selection
• Off
• On
Factory settingOn

On
The operation of the sensor under extreme
conditions is monitored, recorded in the sensor
and diagnostics messages are displayed on thecontroller.
Off
No diagnostics messages. However, the time thesensor operates under extreme conditions isrecorded in the sensor and can be read in thesensor information in the diagnostics menu.

Operating time
Warning limit

Total operating time of the sensor
Factory setting
10000 hOperation < 5 °C
Warning limit

Only optical sensors
Factory setting
10000 hOperation > 5 °C
Warning limit

Factory setting
10000 hEndress+Hauser

Diagnostics code and associated message text:
189 Operating time
Only COS61D

Factory setting
10000 hOperation > 30 °C
Warning limit

Diagnostics code and associated message text:
188 Operating time
Only COS51D

Operation > 25 °C
Warning limit

Diagnostics code and associated message text:
199 Operating time

Diagnostics code and associated message text:
190 Operating time
Only COS51D

Factory setting
10000 hDiagnostics code and associated message text:
191 Operating time55

Inputs: Oxygen

Memosens

Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: DO/Extended setup/Diagnostics settings/
Function

Options

Operation > 40 °C
Warning limit

Factory setting
10000 hFactory setting
10000 hFactory setting
10000 hFactory setting
10000 hFactory setting
10000 hFactory setting
10000 hFactory setting
10000 hDiagnostics code and associated message text:
186 Operating time
Only COS61D

Factory setting
10000 hOperation > 40 µs
Warning limit

Diagnostics code and associated message text:
185 Operating time
Only COS51D

Operation < 25 µs
Warning limit

Diagnostics code and associated message text:
184 Operating time
Only COS22D

Operation > 160 nA
Warning limit

Diagnostics code and associated message text:
183 Operating time
Only COS51D

Operation > 50 nA
Warning limit

Diagnostics code and associated message text:
195 Operating time
Only COS22D

Operation > 30 nA
Warning limit

Diagnostics code and associated message text:
193 Operating time
Only COS81D

Operation > 15 nA
Warning limit

Diagnostics code and associated message text:
192 Operating time
Only COS22D and COS81D

Operation > 120 °C
Warning limit

Info
Only COS22D, COS61D and COS81D

Operation > 80 °C
Warning limit

Limits operating hours

Diagnostics code and associated message text:
181 Operating time
Only COS61D

Factory setting
10000 hDiagnostics code and associated message text:
182 Operating time

Cap operating hours limit values (only COS81E and COS22E)
Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: DO/Extended setup/Diagnostics settings/
Function

Options

Limits operating hours cap

Info The range of adjustment for the operating hours alarm and warning limits is generally 1 to 50000 h.
Function

Selection
• Off
• On
Factory settingOn

On
The operation of the sensor under extreme
conditions is monitored, recorded in the sensor
and diagnostics messages are displayed on thecontroller.
Off
No diagnostics messages. However, the time thesensor operates under extreme conditions isrecorded in the sensor and can be read in thesensor information in the diagnostics menu.

Operating time
Warning limit

Total operating time of the sensor cap
Factory setting
10000 hDiagnostics code and associated message text:
199 Operating time

Factory setting
10000 hDiagnostics code and associated message text:
192 Operating time

Operation > 40 °C
Warning limit

56

Endress+Hauser

Memosens

Inputs: Oxygen

Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: DO/Extended setup/Diagnostics settings/
Function

Limits operating hours cap

Options

Info

Factory setting
10000 hDiagnostics code and associated message text:
193 Operating time

Factory setting
10000 hDiagnostics code and associated message text:
195 Operating time

Factory setting
10000 hDiagnostics code and associated message text:
188 Operating time

Operation > 80 °C
Warning limit
Operation > 120 °C
Warning limit
Operation < 5 °C
Warning limit

Electrolyte counter (only amperometric sensors)
Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: DO/Extended setup/Diagnostics settings/

Electrolyte counter

Function

Options

Info

Function

Selection
• Off
• On

Electrolyte depletion is calculated based on thequantity of analyte transformed.

Factory settingOff‣ After replacing electrolyte:
Reset counter (CAL/Oxygen (amp.)/
Change electrolyte).

Electrolyte capacity

Display only

Displays the remaining capacity

Warning limit

100 000 to
20 000 000 µAs

Associated diagnostics code and message text:
534 Electrolyte warning

Factory setting
2896000 µAs

Diagnostic behavior
The list of diagnostic messages displayed depends on the path selected. There are devicespecific messages, and messages that depend on what sensor is connected.
Menu/Setup/(General settings or Inputs<Sensor channel>)/Extended setup/Diagnostics settings/Diag.
behavior
Function

OptionsInfo‣ Select the message to be changed. Only then

List of diagnostic messages

is it possible to make the settings for thismessage.

Diag. code

Read only

Diagnostic message

Selection
• On
• Off
Factory setting
Depends on the message

Failure current

Deactivate the diagnostic message or activate itagain.
Deactivating means:• No error message in the measuring mode
• No failure current at the current output

Selection
• On
• Off

‣ Decide whether a failure current should be

Factory setting
Depends on the message

the event of general device errors, the Infailure
current is output at all the current

output at the current output if the diagnostic
message display is activated.

outputs. In the event of channel-specificerrors, the failure current is only output at
the assigned current output.

Endress+Hauser

57Inputs: Oxygen

Memosens

Menu/Setup/(General settings or Inputs<Sensor channel>)/Extended setup/Diagnostics settings/Diag.
behavior
Function
Status signal

Options

Info

Selection• Maintenance (M)• Out of specification (S)• Function check (C)• Failure (F)The messages are divided into different error
categories in accordance with NAMUR NE 107.

‣ Decide whether a status signal assignment
should be changed for the application.

Factory setting
Depends on the message
Diag. output

Selection• None• Alarm relay• Binary output• Relay 1 to n (depends onthe device version)
Factory setting
None

Select an output to which the diagnostic message
should be assigned.
A relay output must first be configured for
Diagnostics before it is possible to assign themessage to an output.
(Menu/Setup/Outputs: Assign the Diagnostics
function and set Operating mode to as
assigned.)

 Alarm relays are available, depending on the device version.
Cleaning program(for sensors)

Selection• None• Cleaning 1• Cleaning 2• Cleaning 3• Cleaning 4‣ Decide whether the diagnostic message
should trigger a cleaning program.

The cleaning programs can be defined under:
Menu/Setup/Additional functions/Cleaning.

Factory setting
None
Detail information

7.2.12

Read only

Additional information on the diagnostic
message and instructions on how to resolve theproblem.

Tag control

This function is used to specify which sensors are accepted at the device.
Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: Sensor type/Extended setup/

Tag control

Function

Options

Info

Operating mode

Selection
• Off
• Tag
• Group

Off
No tag control, all sensors are accepted.

Factory setting
Off

Tag

User-defined text
Factory setting• EH_CM44_• EH_CM44R_

Group

Tag
Only sensors with the same tag name are
accepted.
Group
Only sensors in the same tag group are accepted.
Enter the tag name.
The controller checks every sensor to beconnected as to whether this sensor belongs to
the measuring point, and only accepts thesensors that have the same name.

Numerical
Factory setting
0

58

Endress+Hauser

Memosens

Inputs: Oxygen

7.2.13

Sensor change

Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: Sensor type/Extended setup/Sensor change• On
When the sensor is replaced, the last measured value is retained via the "hold" function.
A diagnostics message is not triggered.
• Off
When the sensor is replaced, the last measured value is not retained and triggers adiagnostics message.

7.2.14

Data processing factory setting

Possibility to restore the factory settings for the sensor input.
Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: Sensor type/Extended setup
1.
2.

Factory default measurement processing
Answer the question: OK (press the navigator button).
 Only the factory settings for this particular input are restored. All other settings
remain unchanged.

7.2.15

Sensor factory settings (only COS61D)

Here you can restore the sensor factory settings.
Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: Sensor type/Extended setup
1.
2.

Endress+Hauser

Factory default sensor
Respond to prompt: OKwhen the prompt for the device software appears.
 Only the factory settings for the sensor are restored. The settings for the input
remain unchanged.

59Inputs: disinfection

Memosens

8

Inputs: disinfection

8.1

Basic settings

8.1.1

Sensor identification

Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: <Sensor DI 1)>
Function

Options

Info

ChannelSelection
• Off
• On

On
The channel display is switched on in themeasuring mode

Factory settingOn

OffThe channel is not displayed in the measuringmode, regardless of whether a sensor isconnected or not.

Read only(Only available if a sensor
is connected)

Disinfection

Sensor type
Sensor element
Order code1)

• Free chlorine• Chlorine dioxide
Order code of the connected sensor

Total chlorine or Chlorine dioxide or Free chlorine or Free bromine or Ozone

8.1.2

Main value

Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: <Sensor DI 1)>
Function

Options

Info

Main value

Selection• Concentration• Sensor current

Decide how you want to display the main value.

Factory setting
Concentration1)

Total chlorine or Chlorine dioxide or Free chlorine or Free bromine or Ozone

8.1.3

Damping

The damping causes a floating average curve of the measured values over the time
specified.
Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: Sensor type
Function

Options

Info

Depends on the sensor 1)

0 to 600 s

Damping temp.

Factory setting
0s

The damping of the main value and of theintegrated temperature sensor can be specified.

1)

60

Damping pH or Damping ORP or Damping Cond or Damping DO or Damping DI or Damping nitrate or
Damping SAC or Damping turbidity or Damping PAHphe

Endress+Hauser

Memosens

Inputs: disinfection

8.1.4

Manual holdMenu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: Sensor type
Function

Options

Info

Manual holdSelection
• Off
• On

On
You can use this function to set the channel
manually to "Hold".

Factory setting
Off

Off
No channel-specific hold

8.1.5

Unit

Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: <Sensor DI 1)>
Function

Options

Info

Unit

Selection• mg/l• µg/l• ppm• ppb

The measured parameter is displayed inabbreviated format after the unit.
Example: If chlorine is being measured in mg/l,
the unit is displayed as mg/l Cl2, and chlorine
dioxide is displayed as mg/l ClO2.

Main value = Concentration

Factory setting
mg/l
1)

Total chlorine or Chlorine dioxide or Free chlorine or Free bromine or Ozone

8.2

Extended setup

8.2.1

Measured value formats

Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: <Sensor DI 1)>/

Extended setup

Function

Options

Info

Temperature format

Selection• #.#• #.##

Specify the number of decimal places.

Factory setting#.#
Main value format

Selection• #.#• #.##• #.###• #Factory setting
#.##

1)

Endress+Hauser

Total chlorine or Chlorine dioxide or Free chlorine or Free bromine or Ozone

61

Inputs: disinfection

Memosens

8.2.2

Medium and temperature compensation

Medium compensation (only sensors for free chlorine or bromine)
Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: <Sensor DI 1)>/

Extended setup

Function

Options

Info

Medium comp. (pH)

Selection
• Off
• On

Off
The measured value corresponds to the share of
hypochlorous acid (HOCl) in free chlorine or
hypobromous acid (HOBr) in free bromine.

Factory settingOn

Mode
Medium comp. (pH) = On

Selection• Fixed value• Measured value
Factory setting
Fixed valueOn
On the basis of the pH value, the corresponding
share of the hypochlorite anion OCl- (or OBr-) isadded to the measured value of the
hypochlorous acid (HOCl or HOBr) and specified
as the total value of the free chlorine or freebromine.
• Fixed value
A fixed pH value is used to calculate the total
free chlorine or bromine.
• Measured value
The measured value of a pH sensor connected
to another input is used to calculate the total
free chlorine or bromine.

Fixed value pH

pH 4.00 to 9.00

Useful for media with a constant pH value

Mode = Fixed value

Factory setting
pH 7.20

1.

Determine the pH value of the medium
with a reference measurement.

2.

Enter the pH value from the reference
measurement here.

Associated pH-sensor

Select the pH sensor

Mode = Measured value

Factory setting
None

Preferred method for media with varying pH
values‣ Select the sensor input with the connected

pH sensor.
 Its measured value is permanently used
to calculate the total free chlorine or
bromine.

1)

Free chlorine or Free bromine

Temperature source
Use this menu if you want to use an external measured value as the temperaturesource. Use the Temp. compensation (→  63) function for compensation via theinternal temperature sensor or by entering a medium temperature.

62

Endress+Hauser

Memosens

Inputs: disinfection

Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: <Sensor DI 1)>/

Extended setup

Function

Options

Info

Temp. source

Selection• Manual• Internal sensor• External meas. value• Internal sensor
Automatic compensation using the internal
temperature sensor• ManualCompensation by manually entering the
medium temperature• External meas. valueCompensation with the measured value of an
external temperature sensor

Factory setting
Internal sensor

Medium temperatureTemp. source = Manual‣ Enter the temperature of the medium.

0 to 55 °C(32 to 130 °F)
Factory setting
20.0 °C (68 °F)

Input
Temp. source = Externalmeas. value

1)

Selection• Sensor input• Fieldbus input withsubsequent selection of
the input signal

External temperature signals only in °C
1.

Select the input to which a temperature
sensor is connected

2.

Alternatively
Use the temperature signal over thefieldbus. Select the fieldbus input for thispurpose.

Total chlorine or Chlorine dioxide or Free chlorine or Free bromine or Ozone

Temperature compensation
Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: <Sensor DI 1)>/

Extended setup

Function

Options

Info

Temp. compensation

Selection• Automatic• Manual• Automatic
Automatic compensation using the internal
temperature sensor• ManualCompensation by manually entering the
medium temperature

Factory setting
Automatic
TemperatureTemp. compensation =Manual1)

Endress+Hauser-5.0 to 50.0 °C(23.0 to 122.0 °F)‣ Enter the temperature of the medium.

Factory setting
20.0 °C (68 °F)

Total chlorine or Chlorine dioxide or Free chlorine or Free bromine or Ozone

63

Inputs: disinfection

Memosens

8.2.3

Cleaning holdMenu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: <Sensor type>/

Extended setup

Function

Options

Info

Cleaning holdSelection• None• Cleaning 1 ... 4‣ For selecting one or more cleaning programs(multiple selection).
 For the programs defined, the channel
switches to "Hold" while cleaning is inprogress.

Factory setting
None

Cleaning programs are executed:• At a specified interval
For this, the cleaning program must be
started.
• If a diagnostics message is pending on thechannel and a cleaning has been specified forthis message (→ Inputs/Channel: Sensor
type/Diagnostics settings/Diag. behavior/
Diagnostic number/Cleaning program).

The cleaning programs are defined in the menu: Setup/Additional functions/Cleaning.

8.2.4

External holdA hold can be triggered for all the devices of a measuring point via a digital signal, e.g. afieldbus signal. Make sure that the hold signal is not used elsewhere. An external hold canbe assigned individually to every sensor input.
The function only appears in the Inputs menu if the signals for the external hold wereconfigured beforehand in the general hold settings:
Menu/Setup/General settings/Hold settings/External hold.
Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: <Sensor type>/Extended setup/

External hold

Function

Options

Info

SourceSelection• Binary inputs• Fieldbus signals

1.

For selecting the signal source of theexternal hold.
 Multiple selection is possible.

Factory setting
None

2.

OK: Confirm your selection.

8.2.5

Calibration settings

Calibration monitoring
The calibration interval for the sensor can be specified here. Once the configured time
elapses, the diagnostic message Calibration validity is shown on the display.
The timer is reset automatically if the sensor is recalibrated.

64

Endress+Hauser

Memosens

Inputs: disinfection

Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: <Sensor type>/Extended setup/

Calib. settings

Function

Options

Info

Calib. expiration time

Selection• Off• During operation• When connectingThis function checks the time elapsed since thelast sensor calibration. This may occur
continuously during operation or just once while
the calibration data are being read (sensor
connection, device start, calibration kit
replacement).

Factory settingOff

1.

During operation
During continuous operation, thisfunction informs the user of the time
elapsed since the last calibration.

2.

When connecting
During a batch process, this function
ensures that only recently calibrated
sensors are used. No error message is
generated during the batch process.

Calibration validity
Warning limit

Factory setting
800 h

Diagnostic message: 105 Calibration validity

Alarm limit

Factory setting
1000 hDiagnostic message: 104 Calibration validity

Warning and alarm limits mutually influence each other's possible range of adjustment.
Range of adjustment which must include both limits:
1 to 20000 h
Generally, the following applies: alarm limit > warning limit

Stability criteria
You define the permitted measured value fluctuation which must not be exceeded in acertain timeframe during the calibration. If the permitted difference is exceeded, thecalibration is not permitted and is aborted automatically.
Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: <Sensor DI 1)>/Extended setup/Calib. settings/

Stability criteria

Function

Options

Info

Delta slope

0.1 to 5.0 %Permitted measured value fluctuation duringslope calibration (with reference to the raw value
in nA).

Factory setting
Depends on the sensor
Delta zero point

0.1 to 12.0 nA
Factory setting
Depends on the sensor

Delta temperature

0.10 to 2.00 K
Factory setting
Depends on the sensor

Duration signal

1 to 60 s
Factory setting
Depends on the sensor

1)

Permitted measured value fluctuation during
zero point calibration.

Permitted temperature fluctuation duringcalibration

Timeframe within which the permitted
measured value fluctuation must not be
exceeded

Total chlorine or Chlorine dioxide or Free chlorine or Free bromine or Ozone

8.2.6

Diagnostics settings

In this menu branch, warning limits are specified or the use of diagnostics tools is defined.
The associated diagnostics code is displayed for every setting.

Endress+Hauser

65Inputs: disinfection

Memosens

Slope
The (relative) slope characterizes the sensor condition. Decreasing values can indicate thatmaintenance is needed. By specifying limit values and the diagnostics messages these limit
values trigger, you can control when the system should alert you that maintenance isneeded.
Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: <Sensor DI 1)>/Extended setup/Diagnostics settings/

Slope

Function

Options

Info

Upper warning limit

3.0 to 500.0 %Associated diagnostics code and message text:
511 Sensor calibration

Factory setting
200.0 %
Lower warning limit

3.0 to 500.0 %Factory setting
25.0 %

1)

Associated diagnostics code and message text:
509 Sensor calibration

Total chlorine or Chlorine dioxide or Free chlorine or Free bromine or Ozone

Delta slope
The device determines the difference in slope between the last calibration and thepenultimate calibration, and issues a warning or an alarm depending on the setting
configured. The difference is an indicator for the condition of the sensor.
An increasing change indicates the formation of dirt on the sensor membrane orelectrolyte consumption. Replace the diaphragm and electrolyte as specified in the
instructions in the sensor operating manual.
Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: <Sensor DI 1)>/Extended setup/Diagnostics settings/

Delta slope

Function

Options

Info

Function

Selection
• Off
• On

Switches the function on or off

Factory setting
Off
Warning limit

0 to 50.0 %Factory setting
15.0 %

Associated diagnostics code and message text:
518 Sensor calibration‣ Specify the limit values for monitoring theslope differential.

1)

Total chlorine or Chlorine dioxide or Free chlorine or Free bromine or Ozone

Zero point
The zero point corresponds to the sensor signal that is measured in a medium in theabsence of the disinfectant. You can determine the zero point using the zero-point gel
COY8. This improves accuracy in the trace range.
Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: <Sensor DI 1)>/Extended setup/Diagnostics settings/

Zero point

Function

Options

Info

Warning limit

0.0 to 10.0 nA

Associated diagnostics code and message text:
513 Zero warning

Factory setting
1.0 nA‣ Specify limit values for zero point
monitoring of your sensor.

1)

66

Total chlorine or Chlorine dioxide or Free chlorine or Free bromine or Ozone

Endress+Hauser

Memosens

Inputs: disinfection

Delta zero point
The device determines the difference between the last calibration and the penultimate
calibration, and issues a warning or an alarm depending on the setting configured. The
difference is an indicator for the condition of the sensor.
Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: <Sensor DI 1)>/Extended setup/Diagnostics settings/

Delta zero point

Function

Options

Info

Function

Selection
• Off
• On

Switches the function on or off

Factory setting
Off
Warning limit

0.0 to 10.0 nA
Factory setting
5.0 nA

Associated diagnostics code and message text:
520 Sensor calibration‣ Specify the limit values for monitoring theslope differential.

1)

Total chlorine or Chlorine dioxide or Free chlorine or Free bromine or Ozone

Number of cap calibrations
The calibration counters in the sensor make a distinction between sensor calibrations andcalibrations with the membrane cap currently used. If this cap is replaced, only the (cap)counter is reset.
Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: <Sensor DI 1)>/Extended setup/Diagnostics settings/
calibrations cap

Number of

Function

Options

Info

Function

Selection
• Off
• On

Specify how many calibrations may be
performed with a membrane cap before the cap
has to be replaced. The number depends heavily
on the process and must be determined
individually.

Factory setting
Off
Warning limit

1 to 75
Factory setting
8

1)

Associated diagnostics code and message text:
535 Sensor check

Total chlorine or Chlorine dioxide or Free chlorine or Free bromine or Ozone

Cap change monitoring
Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: <Sensor DI 1)>/Extended setup/Diagnostics settings/
monitoring

Cap change

Function

Options

Info

Function

Selection
• Off
• On

Associated diagnostics code and message text:
987 Calibration required

Factory setting
Off
1)

Endress+Hauser

Total chlorine or Chlorine dioxide or Free chlorine or Free bromine or Ozone

67

Inputs: disinfection

Memosens

Process Check System (PCS)The process check system (PCS) checks the measuring signal for stagnation. An alarm istriggered if the measuring signal does not change over a specific period (several measured
values).
y

y

yT

yT

tD

t

tA

t

A0027276

 15
y
yT

Normal measuring signal, no alarm

Measuring signal
Set value for Tolerance width

A0028842

 16
tD
tA

Stagnating signal, alarm is triggered

Set value for Duration
Time when the alarm is triggered

Main causes of stagnating measured values• Contaminated sensor, or sensor outside of medium• Sensor defective• Process error (e.g. through control system)
Remedial measures1.

Clean sensor.

2.

Check positioning of sensor in medium.

3.

Check electrode system.

4.

Switch controller off and then switch it back on.

Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: Sensor type/Extended setup/Diagnostics settings/

Process check system

Function

Options

Info

Function

Selection
• Off
• On

Switches the function on or off

Factory setting
Off
Duration

1 to 240 min
Factory setting
60 minTolerance width
Not for pH/ORP sensors

The range depends on thesensor
Factory setting
Depends on the sensor

Enter the time after which the timer should timeout. After this time, the diagnostic message
Process check alarm is displayed with the code
904.
Interval around the measuring signal (raw value)for detecting stagnation.
Measured values within the set interval are
regarded as stagnating.

Operating hours limit values
The total operating time of the sensor and its use under extreme conditions is monitored.
If the operating time exceeds the defined threshold values, the device issues acorresponding diagnostics message.
Each sensor has a limited life expectancy which heavily depends on the operating
conditions. If warning limits for operating times under extreme conditions are
specified and maintenance tasks are performed in time, the operation of themeasuring point without any downtime can be guaranteed.
68

Endress+Hauser

Memosens

Inputs: disinfection

Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: Disinfection/Extended setup/Diagnostics settings/
hours
Function

Options

Limits operating

Info The range of adjustment for the operating hours alarm and warning limits is generally 1 to 50000 h.
Function

Options• Off• On
Factory settingOn

On
The operation of the sensor under extreme
conditions is monitored, recorded in the sensor
and diagnostics messages are displayed on thecontroller.
Off
No diagnostics messages. However, the time thesensor operates under extreme conditions isrecorded in the sensor and can be read in thesensor information in the diagnostics menu.

Operating time
Warning limit

Total operating time of the sensor
Factory setting
10000 hDiagnostics code and associated message text:
199 Operating time

Factory setting
10000 hDiagnostics code and associated message text:
178 Operating time

Factory setting
10000 hDiagnostics code and associated message text:
191 Operating time

Factory setting
10000 hDiagnostics code and associated message text:
177 Operating time

Factory setting
10000 hDiagnostics code and associated message text:
176 Operating time

Operation > 15 °C
Warning limit
Operation > 30 °C
Warning limit
Operation > 20 nA
Warning limit
Operation > 100 nA
Warning limit

Limits operating hours cap
Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: <Sensor DI 1)>/Extended setup/Diagnostics settings/
hours cap
Function

Options

Limits operating

Info The range of adjustment for the operating hours alarm and warning limits is generally 1 to 50000 h.
Function

Selection
• Off
• On
Factory settingOn

On
The operation of the sensor cap under extreme
conditions is monitored, recorded in the sensor
and diagnostics messages are displayed on thecontroller.
Off
No diagnostics messages. However, the time thesensor operates under extreme conditions isrecorded in the sensor and can be read in thesensor information in the Diagnostics menu.

Operating time
Warning limit

Total operating time of the sensor cap
Factory setting
10000 hDiagnostics code and associated message text:
199 Operating time

Factory setting
10000 hDiagnostics code and associated message text:
178 Operating time

Operation > 15 °C
Warning limit

Endress+Hauser

69Inputs: disinfection

Memosens

Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: <Sensor DI 1)>/Extended setup/Diagnostics settings/
hours cap
Function

Limits operating

Options

Info

Factory setting
10000 hDiagnostics code and associated message text:
191 Operating time

Operation > 30 °C
Warning limit
Operation > %0V nA

Warning limit%0V is a variable. Depending on the sensor, anumerical value is displayed instead of thisvariable.
Factory setting
2200 hOperation > %0V nA

Warning limit

1)Diagnostics code and associated message text:
111 Operating time cap%0V is a variable. Depending on the sensor, anumerical value is displayed instead of thisvariable.

Factory setting
2200 hDiagnostics code and associated message text:
111 Operating time cap

Total chlorine or Chlorine dioxide or Free chlorine or Free bromine or Ozone

Electrolyte counter
The electrolyte consumption is calculated in the sensor as the total sensor current overtime. The transmitter reads this value out of the sensor as the amount of charge anddisplays it in ampere-seconds. The amount of charge counts up from zero while the sensor
is in operation. Each sensor has an individual electrolyte capacity (As), which corresponds
to the maximum amount of charge to be reached. A diagnostic message is displayed if thewarning limit for electrolyte consumption is reached (usually at 80% electrolyte capacity).
Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: <Sensor DI 1)>/Extended setup/Diagnostics settings/

Electrolyte counter

Function

Options

Info

Function

Selection
• Off
• On

Switches the function on or off

Factory setting
OffElectrolyte capacity

Read only

Warning limit

Range of adjustment andfactory setting
Depends on the sensor

1)70

Associated diagnostics code and message text:
534 Electrolyte warning

Total chlorine or Chlorine dioxide or Free chlorine or Free bromine or Ozone

Endress+Hauser

Memosens

Inputs: disinfection

pH limit value monitoring (only sensors for free chlorine or bromine)
Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: <Sensor DI 1)>/Extended setup/Diagnostics settings/

pH limit monitoring

Function

Options

Info

Function

Selection
• Off
• On

Switches the function on or off
Upper and lower alarm limits mutually influenceeach other's possible range of adjustment.
Range of adjustment which must include both
limits: pH 1.0 to 14.0
Generally, the following applies: Upper warning
limit > Lower warning limit

Factory setting
Off

Upper warning limit

Factory setting
pH 9.00 2)
pH 10.00 3)

Associated diagnostics code and message text:
945 pH value highLower warning limit

Factory setting
pH 4.00 2)
pH 5.0 3)

Associated diagnostics code and message text:
946 pH value low

1)
2)
3)

Free chlorine or Free bromine
Sensor for free chlorine
Sensor for free bromine

Diagnostic behavior
The list of diagnostic messages displayed depends on the path selected. There are devicespecific messages, and messages that depend on what sensor is connected.
Menu/Setup/(General settings or Inputs<Sensor channel>)/Extended setup/Diagnostics settings/Diag.
behavior
Function

OptionsInfo‣ Select the message to be changed. Only then

List of diagnostic messages

is it possible to make the settings for thismessage.

Diag. code

Read only

Diagnostic message

Selection
• On
• Off
Factory setting
Depends on the message

Failure current

Deactivate the diagnostic message or activate itagain.
Deactivating means:• No error message in the measuring mode
• No failure current at the current output

Selection
• On
• Off

‣ Decide whether a failure current should be

Factory setting
Depends on the message

the event of general device errors, the Infailure
current is output at all the current

output at the current output if the diagnostic
message display is activated.

outputs. In the event of channel-specificerrors, the failure current is only output at
the assigned current output.
Status signal

Selection• Maintenance (M)• Out of specification (S)• Function check (C)• Failure (F)The messages are divided into different error
categories in accordance with NAMUR NE 107.

‣ Decide whether a status signal assignment
should be changed for the application.

Factory setting
Depends on the message

Endress+Hauser

71Inputs: disinfection

Memosens

Menu/Setup/(General settings or Inputs<Sensor channel>)/Extended setup/Diagnostics settings/Diag.
behavior
Function
Diag. output

Options

Info

Selection• None• Alarm relay• Binary output• Relay 1 to n (depends onthe device version)

Select an output to which the diagnostic message
should be assigned.

Factory settingNone

A relay output must first be configured for
Diagnostics before it is possible to assign themessage to an output.
(Menu/Setup/Outputs: Assign the Diagnostics
function and set Operating mode to as
assigned.)

 Alarm relays are available, depending on the device version.
Cleaning program(for sensors)

Selection• None• Cleaning 1• Cleaning 2• Cleaning 3• Cleaning 4‣ Decide whether the diagnostic message
should trigger a cleaning program.

The cleaning programs can be defined under:
Menu/Setup/Additional functions/Cleaning.

Factory setting
None
Detail information

8.2.7

Read only

Additional information on the diagnostic
message and instructions on how to resolve theproblem.

Tag control

This function is used to specify which sensors are accepted at the device.
Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: Sensor type/Extended setup/

Tag control

Function

Options

Info

Operating mode

Selection
• Off
• Tag
• Group

Off
No tag control, all sensors are accepted.

Factory setting
Off

Tag

User-defined text
Factory setting• EH_CM44_• EH_CM44R_

Group

Tag
Only sensors with the same tag name are
accepted.
Group
Only sensors in the same tag group are accepted.
Enter the tag name.
The controller checks every sensor to beconnected as to whether this sensor belongs to
the measuring point, and only accepts thesensors that have the same name.

Numerical
Factory setting
0

8.2.8

Sensor change

Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: Sensor type/Extended setup/Sensor change• On
When the sensor is replaced, the last measured value is retained via the "hold" function.
A diagnostics message is not triggered.
• Off
When the sensor is replaced, the last measured value is not retained and triggers adiagnostics message.

72

Endress+Hauser

Memosens

Inputs: disinfection

8.2.9

Data processing factory setting

Possibility to restore the factory settings for the sensor input.
Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: Sensor type/Extended setup
1.
2.

Endress+Hauser

Factory default measurement processing
Answer the question: OK (press the navigator button).
 Only the factory settings for this particular input are restored. All other settings
remain unchanged.

73Inputs: Drinking water turbidity

Memosens

9

Inputs: Drinking water turbidity

9.1

Basic settings

9.1.1

Sensor identification

Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: sensor type
Function

Options

Info

ChannelSelection
• Off
• On

On
The channel display is switched on in themeasuring mode

Factory settingOn

OffThe channel is not displayed in the measuringmode, regardless of whether a sensor isconnected or not.

Read only(Only available if a sensor
is connected)

Connected sensor type

Sensor type
Order code

9.1.2

Order code of the connected sensor

Application

The sensor is precalibrated on leaving the factory. As such, it can be used in a wide range
of applications (e.g. clear water measurement) without the need for additional calibration.
The factory calibrations for the Formazine, Kaolin, PSL and Diatomite applications are
based on 20 calibration points in each case. In addition to the factory calibration data,
which cannot be modified, the sensor has five other data records to be used for storingprocess calibrations.
Calibration data records are saved under an individual name. You can add your own
data records during each calibration. These are then available for selection under
Application .
Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: Turbidity
Function

Options

Info

Application type

Selection
Clear water

Preselection for saved calibration data records

Factory setting
Clear water
Application

Selection• Formazine• Kaolin• PSL• Diatomite

Select a saved calibration data record

Factory setting
Clear water

74

Endress+Hauser

Memosens

Inputs: Drinking water turbidity

9.1.3

Damping

The damping causes a floating average curve of the measured values over the time
specified.
Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: Sensor type
Function
Depends on the sensor
Damping temp.

1)

1)

OptionsInfo

0 to 600 s

The damping of the main value and of theintegrated temperature sensor can be specified.

Factory setting
0s

Damping pH or Damping ORP or Damping Cond or Damping DO or Damping DI or Damping nitrate or
Damping SAC or Damping turbidity or Damping PAHphe

9.1.4

Manual holdMenu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: Sensor type
Function

Options

Info

Manual holdSelection
• Off
• On

On
You can use this function to set the channel
manually to "Hold".

Factory setting
Off

Off
No channel-specific hold

9.2

Extended setup

9.2.1

Measured value formats

Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: Turbidity/

Extended setup

Function

Options

Info

Temperature format

Selection• #.#• #.##

Specify the number of decimal places.

Factory setting#.#
Main value format

Selection• #.#• #.##• #.###• #Factory setting#.#

Endress+Hauser

75Inputs: Drinking water turbidity

Memosens

9.2.2

Unit

Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: Turbidity/

Extended setup

Function

Options

Info

Unit

Selection
• FNU
• NTU
• FTU
• TE/F• EBC• ASBC

Select the unit for the main measured value.

Application = Formazine

FNU
Formazine Nephelometric Unit, 90° scattered
light measurement as per ISO 7027
NTU
Nephelometric Turbidity Unit, 90° scattered lightmeasurement as per US standards, identical to
FTU

Factory setting
FNU
Unit
Application = Kaolin or
Diatomite

Selection• auto (g/l; mg/l)• ppm• mg/l• g/lFactory setting
mg/l

Unit
Application = PSL

TE/FTurbidity unit/formazine, German unit in water
treatment
EBC
Turbidity unit, European/international unit inbreweries

Selection
度

ASBC
American Society of Brewing Chemists

Factory setting
度

9.2.3

FTU
Formazine Turbidity Unit, used in water
treatment

auto (g/l; mg/l)
Automatic changeover between mg/l or g/lfnu

Cleaning holdMenu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: <Sensor type>/

Extended setup

Function

Options

Info

Cleaning holdSelection• None• Cleaning 1 ... 4‣ For selecting one or more cleaning programs

Factory settingNone(multiple selection).
 For the programs defined, the channel
switches to "Hold" while cleaning is inprogress.

Cleaning programs are executed:• At a specified interval
For this, the cleaning program must be
started.
• If a diagnostics message is pending on thechannel and a cleaning has been specified forthis message (→ Inputs/Channel: Sensor
type/Diagnostics settings/Diag. behavior/
Diagnostic number/Cleaning program).

The cleaning programs are defined in the menu: Setup/Additional functions/Cleaning.

9.2.4

External holdA hold can be triggered for all the devices of a measuring point via a digital signal, e.g. afieldbus signal. Make sure that the hold signal is not used elsewhere. An external hold canbe assigned individually to every sensor input.
The function only appears in the Inputs menu if the signals for the external hold wereconfigured beforehand in the general hold settings:
Menu/Setup/General settings/Hold settings/External hold.

76

Endress+Hauser

Memosens

Inputs: Drinking water turbidity

Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: <Sensor type>/Extended setup/

External hold

Function

Options

Info

SourceSelection• Binary inputs• Fieldbus signals

1.

For selecting the signal source of theexternal hold.
 Multiple selection is possible.

Factory setting
None

2.

OK: Confirm your selection.

9.2.5

Calibration settings

Calibration timer and calibration expiration date
You can specify the calibration interval for the sensor here. Once the time configured
elapses, the Calibration timer.
The timer is reset automatically if you recalibrate the sensor.
Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: Sensor type/Extended setup/

Calib. settings

Function

Options

Info

Calibration timer

Selection
• Off
• On

Switches the function on or off

Factory setting
Off
Calibration timer value

1 to 10 000 h
Factory setting
1000 hCalib. expiration time

Selection
• Off
• On
Factory setting
Off

Enter the time after which the timer should timeout. When this time expires, diagnostic message
Calibration timer is displayed with code 102.
The function checks whether the calibration of asensor is still valid.
Example: you install a pre-calibrated sensor.
The function checks how long ago the sensor
was last calibrated. A diagnostics message isdisplayed if the time since the last calibration islonger than specified by the predefined warningand alarm limit.

Calib. expiration time
Warning limit

Factory setting
48 weeks

Diagnostic message: 105 Calibration validity

Alarm limit

Factory setting
52 weeks

Diagnostic message: 104 Calibration validity

Warning and alarm limits mutually influence each other's possible adjustment range.
Range of adjustment which must include both limits:
1 to 104 weeks
Generally, the following applies: alarm limit > warning limit

Endress+Hauser

77Inputs: Drinking water turbidity

Memosens

Stability criteria
You define the permitted measured value fluctuation which must not be exceeded in acertain timeframe during calibration. If the permitted difference is exceeded, calibration is
not permitted and is aborted automatically.
Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: Turbidity/

Extended setup/Calib. settings/

Stability criteria

Function

Options

Info

Delta signal

0.1 to 5.0 %Permitted measured value fluctuation duringcalibration.

Factory setting
2.0 %Delta temperature

0.10 to 2.00 K

Permitted temperature fluctuation duringcalibration

Factory setting
0.50 K
Duration

5 to 100 s

Timeframe within which the permitted range formeasured value fluctuation should not be
exceeded

Factory setting
20 s

9.2.6

Diagnostics settings

In this menu branch, warning limits are specified or the use of diagnostics tools is defined.
The associated diagnostics code is displayed for every setting.
Process Check System (PCS)The process check system (PCS) checks the measuring signal for stagnation. An alarm istriggered if the measuring signal does not change over a specific period (several measured
values).
y

y

yT

yT

tD

t

tA

A0027276

 17
y
yT

Normal measuring signal, no alarm

Measuring signal
Set value for Tolerance widtht

A0028842

 18
tD
tA

Stagnating signal, alarm is triggered

Set value for Duration
Time when the alarm is triggered

Main causes of stagnating measured values• Contaminated sensor, or sensor outside of medium• Sensor defective• Process error (e.g. through control system)
Remedial measures78

1.

Clean sensor.

2.

Check positioning of sensor in medium.

3.

Check electrode system.

4.

Switch controller off and then switch it back on.

Endress+Hauser

Memosens

Inputs: Drinking water turbidity

Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: Sensor type/Extended setup/Diagnostics settings/

Process check system

Function

Options

Info

Function

Selection
• Off
• On

Switches the function on or off

Factory setting
Off
Duration

1 to 240 min
Factory setting
60 minTolerance width
Not for pH/ORP sensors

The range depends on thesensor
Factory setting
Depends on the sensor

Enter the time after which the timer should timeout. After this time, the diagnostic message
Process check alarm is displayed with the code
904.
Interval around the measuring signal (raw value)for detecting stagnation.
Measured values within the set interval are
regarded as stagnating.

Operating hours limit values
The total operating time of the sensor and its use under extreme conditions is monitored.
If the operating time exceeds the defined threshold values, the device issues acorresponding diagnostics message.
Each sensor has a limited life expectancy which heavily depends on the operating
conditions. If warning limits for operating times under extreme conditions are
specified and maintenance tasks are performed in time, the operation of themeasuring point without any downtime can be guaranteed.
Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: Turbidity/Extended setup/Diagnostics settings/
Function

Options

Limits operating hours

Info The range of adjustment for the operating hours alarm and warning limits is generally 1 to 50000 h.
Function

Selection
• Off
• On
Factory settingOn

On
The operation of the sensor under extreme
conditions is monitored, recorded in the sensor
and diagnostics messages are displayed on thecontroller.
Off
No diagnostics messages. However, the time thesensor operates under extreme conditions isrecorded in the sensor and can be read in thesensor information in the diagnostics menu.

Operating time
Warning limit

Total operating time of the sensor
Factory setting
10000 hDiagnostics code and associated message text:
199 Operating time

The names of the following menu functions depend on the sensor specification. For this reason, they
 cannotbe specified here.
Below specified temperature
Warning limit

Factory setting
10000 hDiagnostics code and associated message text:
935 Process temp. low

Factory setting
10000 hDiagnostics code and associated message text:
934 Process temp. highFactory setting
10000 hDiagnostics code and associated message text:
943 Process value

Above specified temperature
Warning limit
Below specified limit value
Warning limit

Endress+Hauser

79Inputs: Drinking water turbidity

Memosens

Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: Turbidity/Extended setup/Diagnostics settings/
Function

Limits operating hours

Options

Info

Factory setting
10000 hDiagnostics code and associated message text:
942 Process value

Above specified limit value
Warning limit

Diagnostic behavior
The list of diagnostic messages displayed depends on the path selected. There are devicespecific messages, and messages that depend on what sensor is connected.
Menu/Setup/(General settings or Inputs<Sensor channel>)/Extended setup/Diagnostics settings/Diag.
behavior
Function

OptionsInfo‣ Select the message to be changed. Only then

List of diagnostic messages

is it possible to make the settings for thismessage.

Diag. code

Read only

Diagnostic message

Selection
• On
• Off
Factory setting
Depends on the message

Failure current

Deactivate the diagnostic message or activate itagain.
Deactivating means:• No error message in the measuring mode
• No failure current at the current output

Selection
• On
• Off

‣ Decide whether a failure current should be

Factory setting
Depends on the message

the event of general device errors, the Infailure
current is output at all the current

output at the current output if the diagnostic
message display is activated.

outputs. In the event of channel-specificerrors, the failure current is only output at
the assigned current output.
Status signal

Selection• Maintenance (M)• Out of specification (S)• Function check (C)• Failure (F)The messages are divided into different error
categories in accordance with NAMUR NE 107.

‣ Decide whether a status signal assignment
should be changed for the application.

Factory setting
Depends on the message
Diag. output

Selection• None• Alarm relay• Binary output• Relay 1 to n (depends onthe device version)
Factory setting
None

Select an output to which the diagnostic message
should be assigned.
A relay output must first be configured for
Diagnostics before it is possible to assign themessage to an output.
(Menu/Setup/Outputs: Assign the Diagnostics
function and set Operating mode to as
assigned.)

 Alarm relays are available, depending on the device version.
Cleaning program(for sensors)

Selection• None• Cleaning 1• Cleaning 2• Cleaning 3• Cleaning 4‣ Decide whether the diagnostic message
should trigger a cleaning program.

The cleaning programs can be defined under:
Menu/Setup/Additional functions/Cleaning.

Factory setting
None
Detail information

80

Read only

Additional information on the diagnostic
message and instructions on how to resolve theproblem.

Endress+Hauser

Memosens

Inputs: Drinking water turbidity

9.2.7

Signal processing

Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: Turbidity/

Extended setup/Signal processing/

Measurement filter

Function

Options

Info

Configuration method

Selection• Standard• Specialist

Standard
Choice of 3 predefined configurations

Factory settingSpecialist
Filter level
Configuration method =Standard

Selection• Low• Medium• HighFactory setting
Medium

Display parameter

Specialist
You specify in detail how the measured value
filter should react.
Select a filter method. The following parameters
are preset at the factory and are displayed as
non-editable parameters.
With Configuration method = Specialist you
can configure the parameters.

Read only

Configuration method =Standard

Endress+Hauser

Relative limit

0.000000 to 1.000000

Configuration method =Specialist

Factory setting
0.000020

Dwell time before jump

0 to 1000 s

Configuration method =Specialist

Factory setting
10 s

Integ. time before jump

0 to 1000 s

Configuration method =Specialist

Factory setting
4s

Dynamic

1 to 3

Configuration method =Specialist

Factory setting
3

Smoothing

0.00000 to 10.00000

Configuration method =Specialist

Factory setting
0.00800

Specify the filter strength
0.000000 ... constant measured value
0.000020 ... standard
0.010000 ... low
1.000000 ... off
Specify the time after which the measured value
must change at the very latest.

Specify the number of measured values (timespan) which should be used for the next change
value.
How dynamically should the filter respond: slow
(1) to fast (3).

Value smoothing
The smoothing value should always be attuned
with the filter strength (Relative limit).
The higher the relative limit the smaller thesmoothing and vice versa. You should set thesmoothing value to 0 as of a relative limit of
0.01.

81

Inputs: Drinking water turbidity

Memosens

9.2.8

Tag control

This function is used to specify which sensors are accepted at the device.
Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: Sensor type/Extended setup/

Tag control

Function

Options

Info

Operating mode

Selection
• Off
• Tag
• Group

Off
No tag control, all sensors are accepted.

Factory setting
Off

Tag

User-defined text
Factory setting• EH_CM44_• EH_CM44R_

Group

Tag
Only sensors with the same tag name are
accepted.
Group
Only sensors in the same tag group are accepted.
Enter the tag name.
The controller checks every sensor to beconnected as to whether this sensor belongs to
the measuring point, and only accepts thesensors that have the same name.

Numerical
Factory setting
0

9.2.9

Sensor change

Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: Sensor type/Extended setup/Sensor change• On
When the sensor is replaced, the last measured value is retained via the "hold" function.
A diagnostics message is not triggered.
• Off
When the sensor is replaced, the last measured value is not retained and triggers adiagnostics message.

9.2.10

Data processing factory setting

Possibility to restore the factory settings for the sensor input.
Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: Sensor type/Extended setup
1.
2.

Factory default measurement processing
Answer the question: OK (press the navigator button).
 Only the factory settings for this particular input are restored. All other settings
remain unchanged.

9.2.11

Sensor factory setting

Here you can restore the sensor factory settings.
Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: Sensor type/Extended setup
1.
2.

82

Factory default sensor
Respond to prompt: OKwhen the prompt for the device software appears.
 Only the factory settings for the sensor are restored. The settings for the input
remain unchanged.

Endress+Hauser

Memosens

Inputs: Turbidity and solids

10

Inputs: Turbidity and solids

10.1

Basic settings

10.1.1

Sensor identification

Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: sensor type
Function

Options

Info

ChannelSelection
• Off
• On

On
The channel display is switched on in themeasuring mode

Factory settingOn

OffThe channel is not displayed in the measuringmode, regardless of whether a sensor isconnected or not.

Read only(Only available if a sensor
is connected)

Connected sensor type

Sensor type
Order code

10.1.2

Order code of the connected sensor

Application

The sensor is precalibrated on leaving the factory. As such, it can be used in a wide range
of applications (e.g. clear water measurement) without the need for additional calibration.
The factory calibrations are each based on a "three-point calibration". The Kaolin andFormazine applications are already fully calibrated and can be used without any further
calibration. All other applications are precalibrated with reference samples and requirecalibration to the corresponding application. In addition to the factory calibration data,
which cannot be modified, the sensor has five other data records to be used for storingprocess calibrations.
Calibration data records are saved under an individual name. You can add your own
data records during each calibration. These are then available for selection under
Application .
Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: Turbidity
Function

Options

Info

Application type

Selection• Clear water• Solid

Preselection for saved calibration data records

Factory setting
Clear water
Application

Depends on the sensor

Select a saved calibration data record
information on selecting the Detailed
relevant data record is provided in the
Operating Instructions for the sensor.
Operating Instructions Turbimax CUS51D,
BA00461C

Endress+Hauser

83Inputs: Turbidity and solids

Memosens

10.1.3Damping

The damping causes a floating average curve of the measured values over the time
specified.
Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: Sensor type
Function
Depends on the sensor
Damping temp.

1)

1)

OptionsInfo

0 to 600 s

The damping of the main value and of theintegrated temperature sensor can be specified.

Factory setting
0s

Damping pH or Damping ORP or Damping Cond or Damping DO or Damping DI or Damping nitrate or
Damping SAC or Damping turbidity or Damping PAHphe

10.1.4Manual holdMenu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: Sensor type
Function

Options

Info

Manual holdSelection
• Off
• On

On
You can use this function to set the channel
manually to "Hold".

Factory setting
Off

Off
No channel-specific hold

10.2

Extended setup

10.2.1

Measured value formats

Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: Turbidity/

Extended setup

Function

Options

Info

Temperature format

Selection• #.#• #.##

Specify the number of decimal places.

Factory setting#.#
Main value format

Selection• #.#• #.##• #.###• #Factory setting#.#

84

Endress+Hauser

Memosens

Inputs: Turbidity and solids

10.2.2

Unit

Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: Turbidity/

Extended setup

Function

Options

Info

Unit

Selection
• FNU
• NTU

Select the unit for the main measured value.

Application type = Clear
water

FNU
Formazine Nephelometric Unit, 90° scattered
light measurement as per ISO 7027

Factory setting
FNU
Unit
Application type = Solid

Selection• auto (g/l; mg/l)
• ppm
• %TS
• mg/l• g/lFactory setting
auto (g/l; mg/l)

10.2.3

NTU
Nephelometric Turbidity Unit, 90° scattered lightmeasurement as per US standards, identical to
FTU%TS% total solids
auto (g/l; mg/l)
Automatic changeover between mg/l or g/lfnu

Cleaning holdMenu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: <Sensor type>/

Extended setup

Function

Options

Info

Cleaning holdSelection• None• Cleaning 1 ... 4‣ For selecting one or more cleaning programs(multiple selection).
 For the programs defined, the channel
switches to "Hold" while cleaning is inprogress.

Factory setting
None

Cleaning programs are executed:• At a specified interval
For this, the cleaning program must be
started.
• If a diagnostics message is pending on thechannel and a cleaning has been specified forthis message (→ Inputs/Channel: Sensor
type/Diagnostics settings/Diag. behavior/
Diagnostic number/Cleaning program).

The cleaning programs are defined in the menu: Setup/Additional functions/Cleaning.

10.2.4External holdA hold can be triggered for all the devices of a measuring point via a digital signal, e.g. afieldbus signal. Make sure that the hold signal is not used elsewhere. An external hold canbe assigned individually to every sensor input.
The function only appears in the Inputs menu if the signals for the external hold wereconfigured beforehand in the general hold settings:
Menu/Setup/General settings/Hold settings/External hold.
Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: <Sensor type>/Extended setup/

Endress+Hauser

External hold

Function

Options

Info

SourceSelection• Binary inputs• Fieldbus signals

1.

For selecting the signal source of theexternal hold.
 Multiple selection is possible.

Factory setting
None

2.

OK: Confirm your selection.

85

Inputs: Turbidity and solids

Memosens

10.2.5

Calibration settings

Calibration timer and calibration expiration date
You can specify the calibration interval for the sensor here. Once the time configured
elapses, the Calibration timer.
The timer is reset automatically if you recalibrate the sensor.
Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: Sensor type/Extended setup/

Calib. settings

Function

Options

Info

Calibration timer

Selection
• Off
• On

Switches the function on or off

Factory setting
Off
Calibration timer value

1 to 10 000 h
Factory setting
1000 hCalib. expiration time

Selection
• Off
• On
Factory setting
Off

Enter the time after which the timer should timeout. When this time expires, diagnostic message
Calibration timer is displayed with code 102.
The function checks whether the calibration of asensor is still valid.
Example: you install a pre-calibrated sensor.
The function checks how long ago the sensor
was last calibrated. A diagnostics message isdisplayed if the time since the last calibration islonger than specified by the predefined warningand alarm limit.

Calib. expiration time
Warning limit

Factory setting
48 weeks

Diagnostic message: 105 Calibration validity

Alarm limit

Factory setting
52 weeks

Diagnostic message: 104 Calibration validity

Warning and alarm limits mutually influence each other's possible adjustment range.
Range of adjustment which must include both limits:
1 to 104 weeks
Generally, the following applies: alarm limit > warning limit

Stability criteria
You define the permitted measured value fluctuation which must not be exceeded in acertain timeframe during calibration. If the permitted difference is exceeded, calibration is
not permitted and is aborted automatically.
Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: Turbidity/

Extended setup/Calib. settings/

Function

Options

Info

Delta signal

0.1 to 5.0 %Permitted measured value fluctuation duringcalibration.

Factory setting
2.0 %Delta temperature

0.10 to 2.00 K
Factory setting
0.50 K

Duration

5 to 100 s
Factory setting
20 s

86

Stability criteria

Permitted temperature fluctuation duringcalibration

Timeframe within which the permitted range formeasured value fluctuation should not be
exceededEndress+Hauser

Memosens

Inputs: Turbidity and solids

10.2.6

Diagnostics settings

In this menu branch, warning limits are specified or the use of diagnostics tools is defined.
The associated diagnostics code is displayed for every setting.
Process Check System (PCS)The process check system (PCS) checks the measuring signal for stagnation. An alarm istriggered if the measuring signal does not change over a specific period (several measured
values).
y

y

yT

yT

tD

t

tA

A0027276

 19
y
yT

Normal measuring signal, no alarm

Measuring signal
Set value for Tolerance widtht

A0028842

 20
tD
tA

Stagnating signal, alarm is triggered

Set value for Duration
Time when the alarm is triggered

Main causes of stagnating measured values• Contaminated sensor, or sensor outside of medium• Sensor defective• Process error (e.g. through control system)
Remedial measures1.

Clean sensor.

2.

Check positioning of sensor in medium.

3.

Check electrode system.

4.

Switch controller off and then switch it back on.

Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: Sensor type/Extended setup/Diagnostics settings/

Process check system

Function

Options

Info

Function

Selection
• Off
• On

Switches the function on or off

Factory setting
Off
Duration

1 to 240 min
Factory setting
60 minTolerance width
Not for pH/ORP sensors

The range depends on thesensor
Factory setting
Depends on the sensor

Endress+HauserEnter the time after which the timer should timeout. After this time, the diagnostic message
Process check alarm is displayed with the code
904.
Interval around the measuring signal (raw value)for detecting stagnation.
Measured values within the set interval are
regarded as stagnating.

87Inputs: Turbidity and solids

Memosens

Operating hours limit values
The total operating time of the sensor and its use under extreme conditions is monitored.
If the operating time exceeds the defined threshold values, the device issues acorresponding diagnostics message.
Each sensor has a limited life expectancy which heavily depends on the operating
conditions. If warning limits for operating times under extreme conditions are
specified and maintenance tasks are performed in time, the operation of themeasuring point without any downtime can be guaranteed.
Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: Turbidity/Extended setup/Diagnostics settings/
Function

Options

Limits operating hours

Info The range of adjustment for the operating hours alarm and warning limits is generally 1 to 50000 h.
Function

Selection
• Off
• On
Factory settingOn

On
The operation of the sensor under extreme
conditions is monitored, recorded in the sensor
and diagnostics messages are displayed on thecontroller.
Off
No diagnostics messages. However, the time thesensor operates under extreme conditions isrecorded in the sensor and can be read in thesensor information in the diagnostics menu.

Operating time
Warning limit

Total operating time of the sensor
Factory setting
10000 hDiagnostics code and associated message text:
199 Operating time

The names of the following menu functions depend on the sensor specification. For this reason, they
 cannotbe specified here.
Below specified temperature
Warning limit

Factory setting
10000 hDiagnostics code and associated message text:
935 Process temp. low

Factory setting
10000 hDiagnostics code and associated message text:
934 Process temp. highFactory setting
10000 hDiagnostics code and associated message text:
943 Process value

Factory setting
10000 hDiagnostics code and associated message text:
942 Process value

Above specified temperature
Warning limit
Below specified limit value
Warning limit
Above specified limit value
Warning limit

88

Endress+Hauser

Memosens

Inputs: Turbidity and solids

Diagnostic behavior
The list of diagnostic messages displayed depends on the path selected. There are devicespecific messages, and messages that depend on what sensor is connected.
Menu/Setup/(General settings or Inputs<Sensor channel>)/Extended setup/Diagnostics settings/Diag.
behavior
Function

OptionsInfo‣ Select the message to be changed. Only then

List of diagnostic messages

is it possible to make the settings for thismessage.

Diag. code

Read only

Diagnostic message

Selection
• On
• Off
Factory setting
Depends on the message

Failure current

Deactivate the diagnostic message or activate itagain.
Deactivating means:• No error message in the measuring mode
• No failure current at the current output

Selection
• On
• Off

‣ Decide whether a failure current should be

Factory setting
Depends on the message

the event of general device errors, the Infailure
current is output at all the current

output at the current output if the diagnostic
message display is activated.

outputs. In the event of channel-specificerrors, the failure current is only output at
the assigned current output.
Status signal

Selection• Maintenance (M)• Out of specification (S)• Function check (C)• Failure (F)The messages are divided into different error
categories in accordance with NAMUR NE 107.

‣ Decide whether a status signal assignment
should be changed for the application.

Factory setting
Depends on the message
Diag. output

Selection• None• Alarm relay• Binary output• Relay 1 to n (depends onthe device version)
Factory setting
None

Select an output to which the diagnostic message
should be assigned.
A relay output must first be configured for
Diagnostics before it is possible to assign themessage to an output.
(Menu/Setup/Outputs: Assign the Diagnostics
function and set Operating mode to as
assigned.)

 Alarm relays are available, depending on the device version.
Cleaning program(for sensors)

Selection• None• Cleaning 1• Cleaning 2• Cleaning 3• Cleaning 4‣ Decide whether the diagnostic message
should trigger a cleaning program.

The cleaning programs can be defined under:
Menu/Setup/Additional functions/Cleaning.

Factory setting
None
Detail information

Endress+Hauser

Read only

Additional information on the diagnostic
message and instructions on how to resolve theproblem.

89Inputs: Turbidity and solids

Memosens

10.2.7

Tag control

This function is used to specify which sensors are accepted at the device.
Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: Sensor type/Extended setup/

Tag control

Function

Options

Info

Operating mode

Selection
• Off
• Tag
• Group

Off
No tag control, all sensors are accepted.

Factory setting
Off

Tag

User-defined text
Factory setting• EH_CM44_• EH_CM44R_

Group

Tag
Only sensors with the same tag name are
accepted.
Group
Only sensors in the same tag group are accepted.
Enter the tag name.
The controller checks every sensor to beconnected as to whether this sensor belongs to
the measuring point, and only accepts thesensors that have the same name.

Numerical
Factory setting
0

10.2.8Sensor change

Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: Sensor type/Extended setup/Sensor change• On
When the sensor is replaced, the last measured value is retained via the "hold" function.
A diagnostics message is not triggered.
• Off
When the sensor is replaced, the last measured value is not retained and triggers adiagnostics message.

10.2.9

Data processing factory setting

Possibility to restore the factory settings for the sensor input.
Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: Sensor type/Extended setup
1.
2.

Factory default measurement processing
Answer the question: OK (press the navigator button).
 Only the factory settings for this particular input are restored. All other settings
remain unchanged.

10.2.10 Sensor factory setting
Here you can restore the sensor factory settings.
Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: Sensor type/Extended setup
1.
2.

90

Factory default sensor
Respond to prompt: OKwhen the prompt for the device software appears.
 Only the factory settings for the sensor are restored. The settings for the input
remain unchanged.

Endress+Hauser

Memosens

Inputs: SAC

11

Inputs: SAC

11.1

Basic settings

11.1.1

Sensor identification

Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: sensor type
Function

Options

Info

ChannelSelection
• Off
• On

On
The channel display is switched on in themeasuring mode

Factory settingOn

OffThe channel is not displayed in the measuringmode, regardless of whether a sensor isconnected or not.

Read only(Only available if a sensor
is connected)

Connected sensor type

Sensor type
Order code

11.1.2

Order code of the connected sensor

Basic application

Calibration data records are saved under an individual name in the sensor. A new
sensor is calibrated in the factory and therefore already contains relevant data
records. You can add your own data records with every calibration. You can then selectthem under Application.
Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: SAC
Function

Options

Info

Basic application

Selection• SAC• Transm.
• Tr. 10mm
• Absorption
• COD
• TOC
• DOC
• BOD

Preselection for saved calibration data records
Tr. 10mm
The measured transmission is converted to an
optical path length of 10 mm.

Factory setting
SAC
Application

Selection• Factory calib.
• Dataset 1 ... 6

Select a saved calibration data record

Factory setting
Factory calib.

Endress+Hauser

91Inputs: SAC

Memosens

11.1.3Damping

The damping causes a floating average curve of the measured values over the time
specified.
Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: Sensor type
Function
Depends on the sensor
Damping temp.

1)

1)

OptionsInfo

0 to 600 s

The damping of the main value and of theintegrated temperature sensor can be specified.

Factory setting
0s

Damping pH or Damping ORP or Damping Cond or Damping DO or Damping DI or Damping nitrate or
Damping SAC or Damping turbidity or Damping PAHphe

11.1.4Manual holdMenu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: Sensor type
Function

Options

Info

Manual holdSelection
• Off
• On

On
You can use this function to set the channel
manually to "Hold".

Factory setting
Off

Off
No channel-specific hold

11.2

Extended setup

11.2.1

Measured value formats, unit and flash rate

Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: SAC/

Extended setup

Function

Options

Info

Temperature format

Selection• #.#• #.##

Specify the number of decimal places.

Factory setting#.#
Main value format

Selection• #.#• #.##• #.###• #Factory setting
#.#

Unit

Selection• None• %• mg/l• ppm• 1/m

The unit of the main value depends on the basic
application selected. Depending on the Basicapplication you can only choose from certain
units. The factory setting is also dependent on
the basic application.

Flash rate

0.1 to 2.0 Hz

The flash rate influences the response time ofthe sensor on the one hand, and the sensor
operating life on the other. The lower the rate,
the slower the measured value change and thelonger the operating life of the sensor. The fasterthe process needs to react to changes dependingon the measured value, the higher the flash ratesetting should be. However, this negatively
impacts the sensor operating life.

Factory setting
2.0 Hz92

Endress+Hauser

Memosens

Inputs: SAC

11.2.2

Cleaning holdMenu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: <Sensor type>/

Extended setup

Function

Options

Info

Cleaning holdSelection• None• Cleaning 1 ... 4‣ For selecting one or more cleaning programs(multiple selection).
 For the programs defined, the channel
switches to "Hold" while cleaning is inprogress.

Factory setting
None

Cleaning programs are executed:• At a specified interval
For this, the cleaning program must be
started.
• If a diagnostics message is pending on thechannel and a cleaning has been specified forthis message (→ Inputs/Channel: Sensor
type/Diagnostics settings/Diag. behavior/
Diagnostic number/Cleaning program).

The cleaning programs are defined in the menu: Setup/Additional functions/Cleaning.

11.2.3External holdA hold can be triggered for all the devices of a measuring point via a digital signal, e.g. afieldbus signal. Make sure that the hold signal is not used elsewhere. An external hold canbe assigned individually to every sensor input.
The function only appears in the Inputs menu if the signals for the external hold wereconfigured beforehand in the general hold settings:
Menu/Setup/General settings/Hold settings/External hold.
Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: <Sensor type>/Extended setup/

External hold

Function

Options

Info

SourceSelection• Binary inputs• Fieldbus signals

1.

For selecting the signal source of theexternal hold.
 Multiple selection is possible.

Factory setting
None

2.

OK: Confirm your selection.

11.2.4

Calibration settings

Calibration timer and calibration expiration date
You can specify the calibration interval for the sensor here. Once the time configured
elapses, the Calibration timer.
The timer is reset automatically if you recalibrate the sensor.

Endress+Hauser

93Inputs: SAC

Memosens

Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: Sensor type/Extended setup/

Calib. settings

Function

Options

Info

Calibration timer

Selection
• Off
• On

Switches the function on or off

Factory setting
Off
Calibration timer value

1 to 10 000 h
Factory setting
1000 hCalib. expiration time

Selection
• Off
• On
Factory setting
Off

Enter the time after which the timer should timeout. When this time expires, diagnostic message
Calibration timer is displayed with code 102.
The function checks whether the calibration of asensor is still valid.
Example: you install a pre-calibrated sensor.
The function checks how long ago the sensor
was last calibrated. A diagnostics message isdisplayed if the time since the last calibration islonger than specified by the predefined warningand alarm limit.

Calib. expiration time
Warning limit

Factory setting
48 weeks

Diagnostic message: 105 Calibration validity

Alarm limit

Factory setting
52 weeks

Diagnostic message: 104 Calibration validity

Warning and alarm limits mutually influence each other's possible adjustment range.
Range of adjustment which must include both limits:
1 to 104 weeks
Generally, the following applies: alarm limit > warning limit

Stability criteria
You define the permitted measured value fluctuation which must not be exceeded in acertain timeframe during calibration. If the permitted difference is exceeded, calibration is
not permitted and is aborted automatically.
Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: SAC/

Extended setup/Calib. settings/

Stability criteria

Function

Options

Info

Delta SAC

0.1 to 5.0 %Permitted measured value fluctuation duringcalibration.

Factory setting
2.0 %Delta temperature

0.10 to 2.00 K
Factory setting
0.50 K

Duration

5 to 100 s
Factory setting
10 s

11.2.5Permitted temperature fluctuation duringcalibration

Timeframe within which the permitted range formeasured value fluctuation should not be
exceeded

Diagnostics settings

In this menu branch, warning limits are specified or the use of diagnostics tools is defined.
The associated diagnostics code is displayed for every setting.

94

Endress+Hauser

Memosens

Inputs: SAC

Process Check System (PCS)The process check system (PCS) checks the measuring signal for stagnation. An alarm istriggered if the measuring signal does not change over a specific period (several measured
values).
y

y

yT

yT

tD

t

tA

t

A0027276

 21
y
yT

Normal measuring signal, no alarm

Measuring signal
Set value for Tolerance width

A0028842

 22
tD
tA

Stagnating signal, alarm is triggered

Set value for Duration
Time when the alarm is triggered

Main causes of stagnating measured values• Contaminated sensor, or sensor outside of medium• Sensor defective• Process error (e.g. through control system)
Remedial measures1.

Clean sensor.

2.

Check positioning of sensor in medium.

3.

Check electrode system.

4.

Switch controller off and then switch it back on.

Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: Sensor type/Extended setup/Diagnostics settings/

Process check system

Function

Options

Info

Function

Selection
• Off
• On

Switches the function on or off

Factory setting
Off
Duration

1 to 240 min
Factory setting
60 minTolerance width
Not for pH/ORP sensors

The range depends on thesensor
Factory setting
Depends on the sensor

Enter the time after which the timer should timeout. After this time, the diagnostic message
Process check alarm is displayed with the code
904.
Interval around the measuring signal (raw value)for detecting stagnation.
Measured values within the set interval are
regarded as stagnating.

Operating hours limit values
The total operating time of the sensor and its use under extreme conditions is monitored.
If the operating time exceeds the defined threshold values, the device issues acorresponding diagnostics message.
Each sensor has a limited life expectancy which heavily depends on the operating
conditions. If warning limits for operating times under extreme conditions are
specified and maintenance tasks are performed in time, the operation of themeasuring point without any downtime can be guaranteed.
Endress+Hauser

95Inputs: SAC

Memosens

Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: SAC/Extended setup/Diagnostics settings/
Function

Options

Limits operating hours

Info The range of adjustment for the operating hours alarm and warning limits is generally 1 to 50000 h.
Function

Selection
• Off
• On
Factory settingOn

On
The operation of the sensor under extreme
conditions is monitored, recorded in the sensor
and diagnostics messages are displayed on thecontroller.
Off
No diagnostics messages. However, the time thesensor operates under extreme conditions isrecorded in the sensor and can be read in thesensor information in the diagnostics menu.

Operating time
Warning limit

Total operating time of the sensor
Factory setting
10000 hDiagnostics code and associated message text:
199 Operating time

The names of the following menu functions depend on the sensor specification. For this reason, they
 cannotbe specified here.
Below specified temperature
Warning limit

Factory setting
10000 hDiagnostics code and associated message text:
935 Process temp. low

Factory setting
10000 hDiagnostics code and associated message text:
934 Process temp. highFactory setting
10000 hDiagnostics code and associated message text:
170 Process value

Factory setting
10000 hDiagnostics code and associated message text:
169 Process value

Warning limit

Factory setting
10000 hDiagnostics code and associated message text:
157 Filter change

Alarm limit

Factory setting
15000 hDiagnostics code and associated message text:
161 Filter change

Warning limit

Factory setting
126000000

Diagnostics code and associated message text:
171 Filter change

Alarm limit

Factory setting
131400000

Diagnostics code and associated message text:
771 Filter change

Above specified temperature
Warning limit
Below specified limit value
Warning limit
Above specified limit value
Warning limit
Filter changeFlash counter, lamp

96

Endress+Hauser

Memosens

Inputs: SAC

Diagnostic behavior
The list of diagnostic messages displayed depends on the path selected. There are devicespecific messages, and messages that depend on what sensor is connected.
Menu/Setup/(General settings or Inputs<Sensor channel>)/Extended setup/Diagnostics settings/Diag.
behavior
Function

OptionsInfo‣ Select the message to be changed. Only then

List of diagnostic messages

is it possible to make the settings for thismessage.

Diag. code

Read only

Diagnostic message

Selection
• On
• Off
Factory setting
Depends on the message

Failure current

Deactivate the diagnostic message or activate itagain.
Deactivating means:• No error message in the measuring mode
• No failure current at the current output

Selection
• On
• Off

‣ Decide whether a failure current should be

Factory setting
Depends on the message

the event of general device errors, the Infailure
current is output at all the current

output at the current output if the diagnostic
message display is activated.

outputs. In the event of channel-specificerrors, the failure current is only output at
the assigned current output.
Status signal

Selection• Maintenance (M)• Out of specification (S)• Function check (C)• Failure (F)The messages are divided into different error
categories in accordance with NAMUR NE 107.

‣ Decide whether a status signal assignment
should be changed for the application.

Factory setting
Depends on the message
Diag. output

Selection• None• Alarm relay• Binary output• Relay 1 to n (depends onthe device version)
Factory setting
None

Select an output to which the diagnostic message
should be assigned.
A relay output must first be configured for
Diagnostics before it is possible to assign themessage to an output.
(Menu/Setup/Outputs: Assign the Diagnostics
function and set Operating mode to as
assigned.)

 Alarm relays are available, depending on the device version.
Cleaning program(for sensors)

Selection• None• Cleaning 1• Cleaning 2• Cleaning 3• Cleaning 4‣ Decide whether the diagnostic message
should trigger a cleaning program.

The cleaning programs can be defined under:
Menu/Setup/Additional functions/Cleaning.

Factory setting
None
Detail information

Endress+Hauser

Read only

Additional information on the diagnostic
message and instructions on how to resolve theproblem.

97Inputs: SAC

Memosens

11.2.6

Tag control

This function is used to specify which sensors are accepted at the device.
Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: Sensor type/Extended setup/

Tag control

Function

Options

Info

Operating mode

Selection
• Off
• Tag
• Group

Off
No tag control, all sensors are accepted.

Factory setting
Off

Tag

User-defined text
Factory setting• EH_CM44_• EH_CM44R_

Group

Tag
Only sensors with the same tag name are
accepted.
Group
Only sensors in the same tag group are accepted.
Enter the tag name.
The controller checks every sensor to beconnected as to whether this sensor belongs to
the measuring point, and only accepts thesensors that have the same name.

Numerical
Factory setting
0

11.2.7

Sensor change

Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: Sensor type/Extended setup/Sensor change• On
When the sensor is replaced, the last measured value is retained via the "hold" function.
A diagnostics message is not triggered.
• Off
When the sensor is replaced, the last measured value is not retained and triggers adiagnostics message.

11.2.8

Data processing factory setting

Possibility to restore the factory settings for the sensor input.
Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: Sensor type/Extended setup
1.
2.

Factory default measurement processing
Answer the question: OK (press the navigator button).
 Only the factory settings for this particular input are restored. All other settings
remain unchanged.

11.2.9Sensor factory setting

Here you can restore the sensor factory settings.
Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: Sensor type/Extended setup
1.
2.

98

Factory default sensor
Respond to prompt: OKwhen the prompt for the device software appears.
 Only the factory settings for the sensor are restored. The settings for the input
remain unchanged.

Endress+Hauser

Memosens

Inputs: Nitrate

12

Inputs: Nitrate

12.1

Basic settings

12.1.1

Sensor identification

Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: sensor type
Function

Options

Info

ChannelSelection
• Off
• On

On
The channel display is switched on in themeasuring mode

Factory settingOn

OffThe channel is not displayed in the measuringmode, regardless of whether a sensor isconnected or not.

Read only(Only available if a sensor
is connected)

Connected sensor type

Sensor type
Order code

12.1.2

Order code of the connected sensor

Application

Calibration data records are saved under an individual name in the nitrate sensor. A new
sensor is calibrated at the factory and always has a corresponding data record. You can add
additional data records during each calibration. These are then available for selection
under Application .
Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: Nitrate
Function

Options

Info

Application

Depends on the sensor

Select a saved calibration data record

12.1.3Damping

The damping causes a floating average curve of the measured values over the time
specified.
Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: Sensor type
Function
Depends on the sensor
Damping temp.

1)

1)

OptionsInfo

0 to 600 s

The damping of the main value and of theintegrated temperature sensor can be specified.

Factory setting
0s

Damping pH or Damping ORP or Damping Cond or Damping DO or Damping DI or Damping nitrate or
Damping SAC or Damping turbidity or Damping PAHphe

12.1.4Manual holdMenu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: Sensor type

Endress+Hauser

Function

Options

Info

Manual holdSelection
• Off
• On

On
You can use this function to set the channel
manually to "Hold".

Factory setting
Off

Off
No channel-specific hold99

Inputs: Nitrate

Memosens

12.2

Extended setup

12.2.1

Measured value formats, unit and flash rate

Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel:Nitrate /Extended setup

Function

Options

Info

Temperature format

Selection• #.#• #.##

Specify the number of decimal places.

Factory setting#.#
Main value format

Selection• #.#• #.##• #.###• #Factory setting
#.#

Unit

Selection• mg/l NO3-N• mg/l NO3• ppm NO3-N• ppm NO3

Select the unit for the main measured value.

Factory setting
mg/l NO3-N
Flash rate

0.1 to 2.0 Hz

The flash rate influences the response time ofthe sensor on the one hand, and the sensor
operating life on the other. The lower the rate,
the slower the measured value change and thelonger the operating life of the sensor. The fasterthe process needs to react to changes dependingon the measured value, the higher the flash ratesetting should be. However, this negatively
impacts the sensor operating life.

Factory setting
2.0 Hz12.2.2

Cleaning holdMenu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: <Sensor type>/

Extended setup

Function

Options

Info

Cleaning holdSelection• None• Cleaning 1 ... 4‣ For selecting one or more cleaning programs

Factory settingNone(multiple selection).
 For the programs defined, the channel
switches to "Hold" while cleaning is inprogress.

Cleaning programs are executed:• At a specified interval
For this, the cleaning program must be
started.
• If a diagnostics message is pending on thechannel and a cleaning has been specified forthis message (→ Inputs/Channel: Sensor
type/Diagnostics settings/Diag. behavior/
Diagnostic number/Cleaning program).

The cleaning programs are defined in the menu: Setup/Additional functions/Cleaning.

100

Endress+Hauser

Memosens

Inputs: Nitrate

12.2.3External holdA hold can be triggered for all the devices of a measuring point via a digital signal, e.g. afieldbus signal. Make sure that the hold signal is not used elsewhere. An external hold canbe assigned individually to every sensor input.
The function only appears in the Inputs menu if the signals for the external hold wereconfigured beforehand in the general hold settings:
Menu/Setup/General settings/Hold settings/External hold.
Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: <Sensor type>/Extended setup/

External hold

Function

Options

Info

SourceSelection• Binary inputs• Fieldbus signals

1.

For selecting the signal source of theexternal hold.
 Multiple selection is possible.

Factory setting
None

2.

OK: Confirm your selection.

12.2.4

Calibration settings

Calibration timer and calibration expiration date
You can specify the calibration interval for the sensor here. Once the time configured
elapses, the Calibration timer.
The timer is reset automatically if you recalibrate the sensor.
Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: Sensor type/Extended setup/

Calib. settings

Function

Options

Info

Calibration timer

Selection
• Off
• On

Switches the function on or off

Factory setting
Off
Calibration timer value

1 to 10 000 h
Factory setting
1000 hCalib. expiration time

Selection
• Off
• On
Factory setting
Off

Enter the time after which the timer should timeout. When this time expires, diagnostic message
Calibration timer is displayed with code 102.
The function checks whether the calibration of asensor is still valid.
Example: you install a pre-calibrated sensor.
The function checks how long ago the sensor
was last calibrated. A diagnostics message isdisplayed if the time since the last calibration islonger than specified by the predefined warningand alarm limit.

Calib. expiration time
Warning limit

Factory setting
48 weeks

Diagnostic message: 105 Calibration validity

Alarm limit

Factory setting
52 weeks

Diagnostic message: 104 Calibration validity

Warning and alarm limits mutually influence each other's possible adjustment range.
Range of adjustment which must include both limits:
1 to 104 weeks
Generally, the following applies: alarm limit > warning limit

Endress+Hauser

101Inputs: Nitrate

Memosens

Stability criteria
You define the permitted measured value fluctuation which must not be exceeded in acertain timeframe during calibration. If the permitted difference is exceeded, calibration is
not permitted and is aborted automatically.
Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: Nitrate/

Extended setup/Calib. settings/

Stability criteria

Function

Options

Info

Delta nitrate

0.1 to 5.0 %Permitted measured value fluctuation duringcalibration.

Factory setting
2.0 %Delta temperature

0.10 to 2.00 K

Permitted temperature fluctuation duringcalibration

Factory setting
0.50 K
Duration

10 to 100 s

Timeframe within which the permitted range formeasured value fluctuation should not be
exceeded

Factory setting
10 s

12.2.5

Diagnostics settings

In this menu branch, warning limits are specified or the use of diagnostics tools is defined.
The associated diagnostics code is displayed for every setting.
Process Check System (PCS)The process check system (PCS) checks the measuring signal for stagnation. An alarm istriggered if the measuring signal does not change over a specific period (several measured
values).
y

y

yT

yT

tD

t

tA

A0027276

 23
y
yT

Normal measuring signal, no alarm

Measuring signal
Set value for Tolerance widtht

A0028842

 24
tD
tA

Stagnating signal, alarm is triggered

Set value for Duration
Time when the alarm is triggered

Main causes of stagnating measured values• Contaminated sensor, or sensor outside of medium• Sensor defective• Process error (e.g. through control system)
Remedial measures

102

1.

Clean sensor.

2.

Check positioning of sensor in medium.

3.

Check electrode system.

4.

Switch controller off and then switch it back on.

Endress+Hauser

Memosens

Inputs: Nitrate

Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: Sensor type/Extended setup/Diagnostics settings/

Process check system

Function

Options

Info

Function

Selection
• Off
• On

Switches the function on or off

Factory setting
Off
Duration

1 to 240 min
Factory setting
60 minTolerance width
Not for pH/ORP sensors

The range depends on thesensor
Factory setting
Depends on the sensor

Enter the time after which the timer should timeout. After this time, the diagnostic message
Process check alarm is displayed with the code
904.
Interval around the measuring signal (raw value)for detecting stagnation.
Measured values within the set interval are
regarded as stagnating.

Operating hours limit values
The total operating time of the sensor and its use under extreme conditions is monitored.
If the operating time exceeds the defined threshold values, the device issues acorresponding diagnostics message.
Each sensor has a limited life expectancy which heavily depends on the operating
conditions. If warning limits for operating times under extreme conditions are
specified and maintenance tasks are performed in time, the operation of themeasuring point without any downtime can be guaranteed.
Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: Nitrate/Extended setup/Diagnostics settings/
Function

Options

Limits operating hours

Info The range of adjustment for the operating hours alarm and warning limits is generally 1 to 50000 h.
Function

Selection
• Off
• On
Factory settingOn

On
The operation of the sensor under extreme
conditions is monitored, recorded in the sensor
and diagnostics messages are displayed on thecontroller.
Off
No diagnostics messages. However, the time thesensor operates under extreme conditions isrecorded in the sensor and can be read in thesensor information in the diagnostics menu.

Operating time
Warning limit

Total operating time of the sensor
Factory setting
10000 hDiagnostics code and associated message text:
199 Operating time

The names of the following menu functions depend on the sensor specification. For this reason, they
 cannotbe specified here.
Below specified temperature
Warning limit

Factory setting
10000 hDiagnostics code and associated message text:
935 Process temp. low

Factory setting
10000 hDiagnostics code and associated message text:
934 Process temp. highFactory setting
10000 hDiagnostics code and associated message text:
943 Process value

Above specified temperature
Warning limit
Below specified limit value
Warning limit

Endress+Hauser

103Inputs: Nitrate

Memosens

Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: Nitrate/Extended setup/Diagnostics settings/
Function

Limits operating hours

Options

Info

Factory setting
10000 hDiagnostics code and associated message text:
942 Process value

Warning limit

Factory setting
10000 hDiagnostics code and associated message text:
157 Filter change

Alarm limit

Factory setting
15000 hDiagnostics code and associated message text:
161 Filter change

Warning limit

Factory setting
126000000

Diagnostics code and associated message text:
171 Filter change

Alarm limit

Factory setting
131400000

Diagnostics code and associated message text:
771 Filter change

Above specified limit value
Warning limit
Filter changeFlash counter, lamp

Diagnostic behavior
The list of diagnostic messages displayed depends on the path selected. There are devicespecific messages, and messages that depend on what sensor is connected.
Menu/Setup/(General settings or Inputs<Sensor channel>)/Extended setup/Diagnostics settings/Diag.
behavior
Function

OptionsInfo‣ Select the message to be changed. Only then

List of diagnostic messages

is it possible to make the settings for thismessage.

Diag. code

Read only

Diagnostic message

Selection
• On
• Off
Factory setting
Depends on the message

Failure current

Deactivate the diagnostic message or activate itagain.
Deactivating means:• No error message in the measuring mode
• No failure current at the current output

Selection
• On
• Off

‣ Decide whether a failure current should be

Factory setting
Depends on the message

the event of general device errors, the Infailure
current is output at all the current

output at the current output if the diagnostic
message display is activated.

outputs. In the event of channel-specificerrors, the failure current is only output at
the assigned current output.
Status signal

Selection• Maintenance (M)• Out of specification (S)• Function check (C)• Failure (F)The messages are divided into different error
categories in accordance with NAMUR NE 107.

‣ Decide whether a status signal assignment
should be changed for the application.

Factory setting
Depends on the message

104

Endress+Hauser

Memosens

Inputs: Nitrate

Menu/Setup/(General settings or Inputs<Sensor channel>)/Extended setup/Diagnostics settings/Diag.
behavior
Function
Diag. output

Options

Info

Selection• None• Alarm relay• Binary output• Relay 1 to n (depends onthe device version)

Select an output to which the diagnostic message
should be assigned.

Factory settingNone

A relay output must first be configured for
Diagnostics before it is possible to assign themessage to an output.
(Menu/Setup/Outputs: Assign the Diagnostics
function and set Operating mode to as
assigned.)

 Alarm relays are available, depending on the device version.
Cleaning program(for sensors)

Selection• None• Cleaning 1• Cleaning 2• Cleaning 3• Cleaning 4‣ Decide whether the diagnostic message
should trigger a cleaning program.

The cleaning programs can be defined under:
Menu/Setup/Additional functions/Cleaning.

Factory setting
None
Detail information

12.2.6

Read only

Additional information on the diagnostic
message and instructions on how to resolve theproblem.

Tag control

This function is used to specify which sensors are accepted at the device.
Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: Sensor type/Extended setup/

Tag control

Function

Options

Info

Operating mode

Selection
• Off
• Tag
• Group

Off
No tag control, all sensors are accepted.

Factory setting
Off

Tag

User-defined text
Factory setting• EH_CM44_• EH_CM44R_

Group

Tag
Only sensors with the same tag name are
accepted.
Group
Only sensors in the same tag group are accepted.
Enter the tag name.
The controller checks every sensor to beconnected as to whether this sensor belongs to
the measuring point, and only accepts thesensors that have the same name.

Numerical
Factory setting
012.2.7

Sensor change

Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: Sensor type/Extended setup/Sensor change• On
When the sensor is replaced, the last measured value is retained via the "hold" function.
A diagnostics message is not triggered.
• Off
When the sensor is replaced, the last measured value is not retained and triggers adiagnostics message.

Endress+Hauser

105Inputs: Nitrate

Memosens

12.2.8

Data processing factory setting

Possibility to restore the factory settings for the sensor input.
Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: Sensor type/Extended setup
1.
2.

Factory default measurement processing
Answer the question: OK (press the navigator button).
 Only the factory settings for this particular input are restored. All other settings
remain unchanged.

12.2.9Sensor factory setting

Here you can restore the sensor factory settings.
Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: Sensor type/Extended setup
1.
2.

106

Factory default sensor
Respond to prompt: OKwhen the prompt for the device software appears.
 Only the factory settings for the sensor are restored. The settings for the input
remain unchanged.

Endress+Hauser

Memosens

Inputs: ISE

13

Inputs: ISE

13.1

Basic settings

13.1.1

Sensor identification

Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: sensor type
Function

Options

Info

ChannelSelection
• Off
• On

On
The channel display is switched on in themeasuring mode

Factory settingOn

OffThe channel is not displayed in the measuringmode, regardless of whether a sensor isconnected or not.

Read only(Only available if a sensor
is connected)

Connected sensor type

Sensor type
Order code

13.1.2

Order code of the connected sensor

Main value

Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: ISE
Function

Options

Info

Main value

Selection• Ammonium• Nitrate• Potassium• Chloride
• pH
• ORP

Decide which parameter you want to display as
the main value for the ISE channel.
Here, you can only choose from the electrodes
which you configured via the electrode slot
menus.
At the factory, this is equivalent to the types ofelectrode that are actually installed in the ISE
sensor.

Factory settingpH

13.1.3Damping of the temperature measured value

The damping causes a floating average curve of the measured values over the time
specified.
Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: ISE
Function

OptionsInfo

Damping temp.

0 to 600 s

Damping of the integrated temperature sensor

Factory setting
0s

13.1.4Manual holdMenu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: Sensor type

Endress+Hauser

Function

Options

Info

Manual holdSelection
• Off
• On

On
You can use this function to set the channel
manually to "Hold".

Factory setting
Off

Off
No channel-specific hold107

Inputs: ISE

Memosens

13.2

Extended setup

13.2.1

Temperature format

Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: ISE/

Extended setup

Function

Options

Info

Temperature format

Selection• #.#• #.##

Specify the number of decimal places.

Factory setting#.#

13.2.2

Cleaning holdMenu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: <Sensor type>/

Extended setup

Function

Options

Info

Cleaning holdSelection• None• Cleaning 1 ... 4‣ For selecting one or more cleaning programs(multiple selection).
 For the programs defined, the channel
switches to "Hold" while cleaning is inprogress.

Factory setting
None

Cleaning programs are executed:• At a specified interval
For this, the cleaning program must be
started.
• If a diagnostics message is pending on thechannel and a cleaning has been specified forthis message (→ Inputs/Channel: Sensor
type/Diagnostics settings/Diag. behavior/
Diagnostic number/Cleaning program).

The cleaning programs are defined in the menu: Setup/Additional functions/Cleaning.

13.2.3External holdA hold can be triggered for all the devices of a measuring point via a digital signal, e.g. afieldbus signal. Make sure that the hold signal is not used elsewhere. An external hold canbe assigned individually to every sensor input.
The function only appears in the Inputs menu if the signals for the external hold wereconfigured beforehand in the general hold settings:
Menu/Setup/General settings/Hold settings/External hold.
Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: <Sensor type>/Extended setup/

External hold

Function

Options

Info

SourceSelection• Binary inputs• Fieldbus signals

1.

For selecting the signal source of theexternal hold.
 Multiple selection is possible.

Factory setting
None

2.

OK: Confirm your selection.

13.2.4

Diagnostics settings

In this menu branch, warning limits are specified or the use of diagnostics tools is defined.

108

Endress+Hauser

Memosens

Inputs: ISE

The associated diagnostics code is displayed for every setting.
Operating hours limit values
The total operating time of the sensor and its use under extreme conditions is monitored.
If the operating time exceeds the defined threshold values, the device issues acorresponding diagnostics message.
Each sensor has a limited life expectancy which heavily depends on the operating
conditions. If warning limits for operating times under extreme conditions are
specified and maintenance tasks are performed in time, the operation of themeasuring point without any downtime can be guaranteed.
Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: ISE/Extended setup/Diagnostics settings/
Function

Options

Limits operating hours

Info The range of adjustment for the operating hours alarm and warning limits is generally 1 to 100000 h.
Function

Selection
• Off
• On
Factory settingOn

On
The operation of the sensor under extreme
conditions is monitored, recorded in the sensor
and diagnostics messages are displayed on thecontroller.
Off
No diagnostics messages. However, the time thesensor operates under extreme conditions isrecorded in the sensor and can be read in thesensor information in the Diagnostics menu.

Operating time
Warning limit

Total operating time of the sensor
Factory setting
6000 hDiagnostics code and associated message text:
199 Operating time

Factory setting
3000 hDiagnostics code and associated message text:
191 Operating time

Factory setting
1500 hDiagnostics code and associated message text:
192 Operating time

Operation > 30 °C
Warning limit
Operation > 40 °C
Warning limit

Endress+Hauser

109Inputs: ISE

Memosens

Diagnostic behavior
The list of diagnostic messages displayed depends on the path selected. There are devicespecific messages, and messages that depend on what sensor is connected.
Menu/Setup/(General settings or Inputs<Sensor channel>)/Extended setup/Diagnostics settings/Diag.
behavior
Function

OptionsInfo‣ Select the message to be changed. Only then

List of diagnostic messages

is it possible to make the settings for thismessage.

Diag. code

Read only

Diagnostic message

Selection
• On
• Off
Factory setting
Depends on the message

Failure current

Deactivate the diagnostic message or activate itagain.
Deactivating means:• No error message in the measuring mode
• No failure current at the current output

Selection
• On
• Off

‣ Decide whether a failure current should be

Factory setting
Depends on the message

the event of general device errors, the Infailure
current is output at all the current

output at the current output if the diagnostic
message display is activated.

outputs. In the event of channel-specificerrors, the failure current is only output at
the assigned current output.
Status signal

Selection• Maintenance (M)• Out of specification (S)• Function check (C)• Failure (F)The messages are divided into different error
categories in accordance with NAMUR NE 107.

‣ Decide whether a status signal assignment
should be changed for the application.

Factory setting
Depends on the message
Diag. output

Selection• None• Alarm relay• Binary output• Relay 1 to n (depends onthe device version)
Factory setting
None

Select an output to which the diagnostic message
should be assigned.
A relay output must first be configured for
Diagnostics before it is possible to assign themessage to an output.
(Menu/Setup/Outputs: Assign the Diagnostics
function and set Operating mode to as
assigned.)

 Alarm relays are available, depending on the device version.
Cleaning program(for sensors)

Selection• None• Cleaning 1• Cleaning 2• Cleaning 3• Cleaning 4‣ Decide whether the diagnostic message
should trigger a cleaning program.

The cleaning programs can be defined under:
Menu/Setup/Additional functions/Cleaning.

Factory setting
None
Detail information

110

Read only

Additional information on the diagnostic
message and instructions on how to resolve theproblem.

Endress+Hauser

Memosens

Inputs: ISE

13.2.5

Tag control

This function is used to specify which sensors are accepted at the device.
Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: Sensor type/Extended setup/

Tag control

Function

Options

Info

Operating mode

Selection
• Off
• Tag
• Group

Off
No tag control, all sensors are accepted.

Factory setting
Off

Tag

User-defined text
Factory setting• EH_CM44_• EH_CM44R_

Group

Tag
Only sensors with the same tag name are
accepted.
Group
Only sensors in the same tag group are accepted.
Enter the tag name.
The controller checks every sensor to beconnected as to whether this sensor belongs to
the measuring point, and only accepts thesensors that have the same name.

Numerical
Factory setting
0

13.2.6

Sensor change

Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: Sensor type/Extended setup/Sensor change• On
When the sensor is replaced, the last measured value is retained via the "hold" function.
A diagnostics message is not triggered.
• Off
When the sensor is replaced, the last measured value is not retained and triggers adiagnostics message.

13.2.7

Data processing factory setting

Possibility to restore the factory settings for the sensor input.
Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: Sensor type/Extended setup
Factory default measurement processing

1.
2.

Answer the question: OK (press the navigator button).
 Only the factory settings for this particular input are restored. All other settings
remain unchanged.

13.3

Electrode slot menus

13.3.1

Electrode slot and measured variable

A CAS40D sensor has 4 electrode slots in total. Consequently, each of these slots has its
own menu.
Making the settings

Endress+Hauser

1.

Define the parameters for the slot (slots 2‐4 only). The 1st slot is always designatedto the pH electrode. It is not possible to select another parameter for this slot.

2.

You can populate and assign the other three slots as you wish.

3.

Slots 2 to 4 only:
Specify the measured variable that should be output.
111

Inputs: ISE

Memosens

Selection Measured variable depending on the parameter
pH and ORP

Ammonium

NitratePotassium

Chloride

No options

NH4-N
NH4

NO3-N
NO3

K

Cl

You can also configure a user-defined measured variable (Measured variable = user
defined). The following values must then be specified for calculation purposes:• Electrode name
Customized text. Enter a name. This is displayed under Electrode slot afterwards.
• Measured variable
Customized text
• Valency
Specify the ion charge including the sign.
• Molar mass
Specify the molar mass of the measured variable.
Selecting the pH reference electrode4.

Reference electrode: Specify the pH electrode version, Standard or Salt ring.

The pH electrode version can be found only on its nameplate (CPS11-1AS*** = Salt ring,
CPS11-1AT*** = Standard).
NOTICE
Incorrect assignment between the electrode (hardware) and the software menu
Unreliable measured values and faults in the measuring point can occur!
‣ When assigning the slot in the software, make sure it matches the assignment in thesensor.
‣ Example: You have connected the ammonium electrode to cable no. 2 in the sensor.
Then configure the ammonium parameter in the software menu for slot 2.

13.3.2

Damping

The damping causes a floating average curve of the measured values over the time
specified.
Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: ISE/Electrode slot
Function

OptionsInfo

Damping

0 to 600 s

Specify the damping of the main value of theelectrode assigned to the slot.

Factory setting
0s

13.3.3Compensation (not available in an ORP sensor)

Depending on the selectivity of the ion-selective electrode vis-à-vis other ions(interference ions), and the concentration of these ions, such ions could also be interpreted
as part of the measuring signal and thus cause measuring errors.
When measuring in wastewater, the potassium ion which is chemically similar to theammonium ion can cause higher measured values.
The measured values for nitrate may be too high due to high concentrations of chloride. To
reduce measuring errors resulting from such cross-interference, the concentration of thepotassium or chloride interference ion can be measured and compensated for with asuitable additional electrode.
For the pH, chloride and the potassium electrode, you can only configure an offset.
The settings to compensate for the effect of interference ions are only available forammonium.
112

Endress+Hauser

Memosens

Inputs: ISE

Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: ISE/Electrode slot/

Compensation

Function

Options

Info

Offset-14.00 to 14.00 pH‐100 to 100 mg/l

The offset compensates for a difference betweena laboratory measurement and an online
measurement which is caused by interference
ions. Enter this value manually. If you are using
a compensation electrode, keep the offset atzero.

Factory setting
0.00 pH
0.00 mg/l
Compensation

Selection
• Off
• On
Factory setting
Off

Compensation type

Selection• Chloride• pH• Potassium• pH and potassium
Factory setting
Chloride
Potassium

Function only available for ammonium
If you want to use the compensation function,
you must have installed a compensationelectrode (potassium or chloride) in anotherelectrode slot and have configured it in thesoftware.
The options depend on the parameter to becompensated. You compensate for chloride whenusing a nitrate electrode, and you cancompensate for potassium and pH when using
the ammonium electrode. The factory setting
depends on the electrode used.

Comp. electrode

Choice of slot

If you have installed and configured several
compensation electrodes of the same type in the
CAS40D sensor, you must specify the electrodeto be used for compensation here. You generally
have a potassium or chloride electrode andLiquiline detects the correct slot.

Selectivity coefficient-10.00 to 10.00

The coefficients are empirical values.

Factory setting‐2.00 (chloride)-0.85 (potassium)
Mode

Selection• +• -The standard setting (-) corrects a measured
value that is too high due to the influence ofinterference ions.

Factory setting-

13.3.4

Extended setup

Format of main measured value and membrane timer
Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: ISE/Electrode slot/

Extended setup

Function

Options

Info

Main value format

Selection• #.#• #.##‣ Specify the number of decimal places.

Factory setting#.##
Membrane timer

Selection
• Off
• On
Factory setting
Off

Membrane timer value

0 to 80 weeks
Factory setting
26 weeks

Endress+Hauser

113Inputs: ISE

Memosens

Calibration settings
Stability criterion
Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: ISE/Electrode slot/Extended setup/

Calib. settings

Function

OptionsInfo

Stability criteria

Selection• Off• Weak• Medium• HardRecommendations• Normal situation
Weak• Standard addition
MediumFactory setting
Weak

Buffer recognition (only pH)
Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: ISE/Electrode slot/Extended setup/

Calib. settings

Function

Options

Info

Buffer recognition

Selection• Fixed• Manual

Fixed
Select values from a list. The list depends on thesetting in Buffer manufacturer.

Factory setting
Fixed

ManualEnter any two buffer values. These must differ interms of their pH value.

Selection• Endress+Hauser• Ingold/Mettler• DIN 19266• DIN 19267• Merck/Riedel• Hamilton• Special buffer

Temperature tables are stored internally in theunit for the following pH values:• Endress+Hauser
2.00 / 4.00 / 7.00 / (9.00) / 9.22 / 10.00 /12.00• Ingold/Mettler
2.00 / 4.01 / 7.00 / 9.21
• DIN 19266
1.68 / 4.01 / 6.86 / 9.18
• DIN 19267
1.09 / 4.65 / 6.79 / 9.23 / 12.75• Merck/Riedel
2.00 / 4.01 / 6.98 / 8.95 / 12.00• Hamilton
1.09 / 1.68 / 2.00 / 3.06 / 4.01 / 5.00 / 6.00
7.00 / 8.00 / 9.21 / 10.01 / 11.00 / 12.00

Buffer manufacturer

Factory setting
Endress+Hauser

the Special buffer option, it is possible to define two buffers of your own. For this purpose, two Withtables are displayed in which pH value/temperature value pairs can be saved.
Calibration buffer 1 ... 2

The options and factory setting depend on the Buffer manufacturer

Calibration timer
You can specify the calibration interval for the sensor here. Once the configured time
elapses, the diagnostic message Calibration timer is shown on the display.
The timer is reset automatically if you recalibrate the sensor.

114

Endress+Hauser

Memosens

Inputs: ISE

Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: ISE/Electrode slot/Extended setup/

Calib. settings

Function

Options

Info

Calibration timer

Selection
• Off
• On

Switches the function on or off

Factory setting
Off
Calibration timer value‣ Enter the time after which the timer should

1 to 10000 htime out.

Factory setting
2500 hAfter this time, the diagnostic message isdisplayed with the code 102 (Calibration
timer).

Standard addition (all except for pH)
Different types of calibration are available to calibrate an ion-selective electrode. Initial
settings only have to be made for the standard addition method.
Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: ISE/Electrode slot/

Standard addition

Function

Options

Info

Sampling volume0.00 to 5000.00 ml

Here, specify the sample volume which you use
during the calibration.

Factory setting
1000.00 ml
Standard volume0.00 to 100.00 ml

Volume of the added standard solution per
addition step

Factory setting
1.00 mlStandard concentration

0.00 to 10.00 mol/lConcentration of the standard solution

Factory setting
1.00 mol/l
No. of additions

1 to 4

Number of addition steps (=measuring points ofthe calibration function)

Factory setting
3

Diagnostic settings
Process check system
The process check system (PCS) checks the measuring signal for stagnation. An alarm istriggered if the measuring signal does not change over a specific period (several measured
values).
y

y

yT

yT

tD

t

tA

A0027276

 25
y
yT

Endress+Hauser

Normal measuring signal, no alarm

Measuring signal
Set value for Tolerance widtht

A0028842

 26
tD
tA

Stagnating signal, alarm is triggered

Set value for Duration
Time when the alarm is triggered115

Inputs: ISE

Memosens

Main causes of stagnating measured values• Contaminated sensor, or sensor outside of medium• Sensor defective• Process error (e.g. through control system)
Remedial measures1.

Clean sensor.

2.

Check positioning of sensor in medium.

3.

Check electrode system.

4.

Switch controller off and then switch it back on.

Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: Sensor type/Extended setup/Diagnostics settings/

Process check system

Function

Options

Info

Function

Selection
• Off
• On

Switches the function on or off

Factory setting
Off
Duration

1 to 240 min
Factory setting
60 minTolerance width
Not for pH/ORP sensors

The range depends on thesensor
Factory setting
Depends on the sensor

116Enter the time after which the timer should timeout. After this time, the diagnostic message
Process check alarm is displayed with the code
904.
Interval around the measuring signal (raw value)for detecting stagnation.
Measured values within the set interval are
regarded as stagnating.

Endress+Hauser

Memosens

Inputs: Interface

14

Inputs: Interface

14.1

Basic settings

14.1.1

Sensor identification

The CUS71D sensor is not recognized automatically. It must be selected manually (Current
sensor). When you commission for the first time, data are recorded for 3-5 minutes andcalculated before a measured value is displayed.
Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: Ultrasonic interface
Function

OptionsInfo

Sensor operation

Selection• Scan for memosens
sensor• Current sensor

Scan for memosens sensor
Searches for Memosens sensors
Current sensor
Connected sensor is used

Factory setting
Current sensor
Wiper function

Selection
• Off
• On

Only for sensor version with wiper function

Factory setting
On
Wiper timing

10 to 240 min

Only for sensor version with wiper function

Factory setting
240 min14.1.2

Manual holdMenu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: Sensor type
Function

Options

Info

Manual holdSelection
• Off
• On

On
You can use this function to set the channel
manually to "Hold".

Factory setting
Off

Off
No channel-specific hold14.2

Tank configuration

The mounting location is defined by the tank depth and the sensor zero point. The
accuracy of the measurement results depends on the accuracy of these settings.
Since the data in the sensor are overwritten with each change, data input might bedelayed.

Endress+Hauser

117Inputs: Interface

Memosens

Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: Ultrasonic interface/

Tank configuration

Function

Options

Info

Blanket definition

Selection• Interface level• Interface range

Type of measurement that should be displayedand calculatedInterface level
Distance from the tank floor to the interface,measuring direction from bottom to top

Factory setting
Interface level

Interface range
Distance from the water line to the interface,measuring direction from top to bottom
m/ft

A0029403

1

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

6

2
7
3

Reference point, e.g. water line
Clear waterTransmitted and reflected ultrasonic waves
Solids/clear water separation zone
Deposited sludge
Ultrasonic transmitter and receiverInterface range
Interface level

depth and Zero adjust have the Tanksame reference point.

45

8A0029402

Unit of measure

Selection
• m
• cm
• ft
• inchAny change to the unit is automatically acceptedin all the displays.

Factory settingmTank depth

Possible range ofadjustment:
0.0 to 10.0 m(0.0 to 32.8 ft)

Distance from the water level to the tank floor
Zero adjust: This setting sets a lower limit for
the range of adjustment.

Factory setting
8.0 m (26.2 ft)
Zero adjust

Possible range ofadjustment:
0.0 to 10.0 m(0.0 to 32.8 ft)

Distance from the water level to the sensor
membrane
Tank depth: This setting sets an upper limit for
the range of adjustment.

Factory setting
0.4 m(1.3 ft)

118

Endress+Hauser

Memosens

Inputs: Interface

Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: Ultrasonic interface/

Tank configuration

Function

Options

Info

Blanking zone

Selection
• Off
• On

Permanent echo signals above and below asearch window are masked out as interference
signals.

Factory setting
Off
Upper window limit
Blanking zone = On

0.0 m ... Lower window
limit(1.4 ft ...)

Distance to the water line below which thesystem should search for an interface.
Permanent echo signals above this value aremasked out as interference signals.

Factory setting
0.7 m (2.3 ft)
Lower window limit
Blanking zone = On

Upper window limit ...
11.0 m (... 33 ft)

Distance to the water line
Permanent echo signals below this value aremasked out as interference signals.

Factory setting
7.7 m (25 ft)

1

1
h1

h1

4
h2

h2

2
6

3

3

A0029404

1
2
3

5
6

5

2

 27

4

Detection limit on tank floor
Reference point, for example water line
Solids/clear water separation zone
Deposited sludge

A0029405

 28
4
5
6

Detection limit above tank floor
Upper window limit
Measuring range
Lower window limit

If the lower detection limit is above the tank floor, allsignals below this value are hidden and no separation
zone is displayed.

Endress+Hauser

119Inputs: Interface

Memosens

14.3

Sensor signal

Change the factory settings in this menu if you discover incorrect measurements.
Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: Ultrasonic interface/

Sensor signal

Function

Options

Info

Acoustic control

Selection• Manual• AutomaticControls the graphic display of the echo signal

Factory setting
Automatic

Current gain

0 to 100
Factory setting
30

Manual
You can enter a fixed gain value for diagnostics
or test purposes.
Automatic
The transmitter uses the gain value determinedin the self-test (initialization). In the measuringmode, this value is automatically adapted to thecurrent process conditions.
You can only configure the value with manual
acoustic control. The value is read-only for
automatic acoustic control.

gain values for applications involving relatively clear water and a "hard" interface are between 25
 Commonand 35. The values can be as high as 60 if the sludge/water transition is relatively "soft". If you requiresignificantly higher gain values, this is an indication of overranging. It is then difficult or impossible toreliably evaluate the echo signal.
Gain control set point

5 to 50

Acoustic control = Automatic

Factory setting
10

Refresh rate

Selection
• 2s
• 4s
• 6s
• 8s

Horizontal position of the intersection of theinterface line with the echo peak. The factory
setting "10" corresponds to 10 % of the maximum
display height.
Time frame for data refresh

Factory setting
6s
Damping

5 to 250
Factory setting
130

14.4

Extended setup

14.4.1

Sensor signal

Number of averaged values until data refresh
Select a low damping value if the height of theinterface can change very quickly. Higher
damping prevents the system from tracking echo
signals that occur briefly (e.g. caused by material
movement, a rake or a floor scraper).

You can adapt the sensor signal to the measuring point in this menu.
Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: Ultrasonic interface/Extended setup/Sensor signal

Function

Options

Info

Speed of sound

300 to 2000 m/s (985 to
6561 ft/s)

The sound speed depends on the medium
temperature and the medium density. Since thetemperature and density only fluctuate slightly
in most water and wastewater applications, thefactory setting of 1482 m/s has proven to be asuitable value.

Factory setting
1482 m/s (4862 ft/s)

Always consult with the manufacturer service department before you change the setting for the Speed of sound.

120

Endress+Hauser

Memosens

Inputs: Interface

Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: Ultrasonic interface/Extended setup/
Function

Sensor signal

OptionsInfo

5 to 30

Restricts the gain in automatic mode in order toprevent system overload.

Sedimentation area
Gain band

Factory setting
20
Gain increment

0.1 to 5.0
Factory setting
2.0

Defines how quickly the gain can adapt tochanging process conditions in the automatic
mode.

Bottom definition
Range above bottom

0.0 to 1.0 m(0.0 to 3.2 ft)
Factory setting
0.1 m(0.3 ft)

Bottom signal set point

0 to 100
Factory setting
60

14.4.2

Zone around the tank bottom in which
extraneous signals can occur.
Signals above your setting are masked out. Thisis needed for very low sludge levels or tanks freefrom sludge.
Restricts the gain in automatic mode in order toprevent system overload when the tank is empty
or does not have an interface.

Calculation

You can adapt the sensor signal to the measuring point in this menu.
Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: Ultrasonic interface/Extended setup/Calculation

Function

Options

Info

Interface

Selection• Top layer• Lower interface

Defines which signal the system should trackand display when several interfaces arecalculated.

Factory setting
Top layer

Top layer
Determine the interface of thin material in theupper section
Lower interface
Determine the interface of thicker material near
the floor

Interface window

Selection
• Off
• On
Factory setting
On

Above interface
Interface window = On

0.0 to 10.0 m(0.0 to 32.8 ft)

Below interface

Factory setting
0.6 m (2.0 ft)

You can open another window near theinterface. Specify a distance above and below theinterface. The system primarily focuses on thesignal within this window. Any signal outside
this window must meet the search criteria for aninterface for an extended period before thesystem recognizes it as an interface.
The search window is indicated by broken lines
in the graphic mode.
The search window is 1.2 m wide in the factory
setting for both parameters.

Interface window = On
Gate response rate

1 to 50
Factory setting
1

Threshold0 to 100
Factory setting0

Endress+Hauser

The response rate determines the speed at which
the system updates the measuring window. A
high value stands for a quick change.
Filter for examining signals
If a high value is selected, stronger signals aretaken into account more. If a low value isselected, weaker signals are taken into account
more.

121

Inputs: Interface

Memosens

14.4.3

Diagnostics settings

In this menu branch, warning limits are specified or the use of diagnostics tools is defined.
The associated diagnostics code is displayed for every setting.
Alarm delay echo loss
Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: Ultrasonic interface/Extended setup/ Diagnostics settings
Function

Options

Info

Alarm delay echo loss

0 to 255 min

Delay time for an error message if the echo is
lost

Factory setting
30 minDiagnostic behavior
The list of diagnostic messages displayed depends on the path selected. There are devicespecific messages, and messages that depend on what sensor is connected.
Menu/Setup/(General settings or Inputs<Sensor channel>)/Extended setup/Diagnostics settings/Diag.
behavior
Function

OptionsInfo‣ Select the message to be changed. Only then

List of diagnostic messages

is it possible to make the settings for thismessage.

Diag. code

Read only

Diagnostic message

Selection
• On
• Off
Factory setting
Depends on the message

Failure current

Deactivate the diagnostic message or activate itagain.
Deactivating means:• No error message in the measuring mode
• No failure current at the current output

Selection
• On
• Off

‣ Decide whether a failure current should be

Factory setting
Depends on the message

the event of general device errors, the Infailure
current is output at all the current

output at the current output if the diagnostic
message display is activated.

outputs. In the event of channel-specificerrors, the failure current is only output at
the assigned current output.
Status signal

Selection• Maintenance (M)• Out of specification (S)• Function check (C)• Failure (F)The messages are divided into different error
categories in accordance with NAMUR NE 107.

‣ Decide whether a status signal assignment
should be changed for the application.

Factory setting
Depends on the message
Diag. output

Selection• None• Alarm relay• Binary output• Relay 1 to n (depends onthe device version)
Factory setting
None

Select an output to which the diagnostic message
should be assigned.
A relay output must first be configured for
Diagnostics before it is possible to assign themessage to an output.
(Menu/Setup/Outputs: Assign the Diagnostics
function and set Operating mode to as
assigned.)

 Alarm relays are available, depending on the device version.

122

Endress+Hauser

Memosens

Inputs: Interface

Menu/Setup/(General settings or Inputs<Sensor channel>)/Extended setup/Diagnostics settings/Diag.
behavior
Function
Cleaning program(for sensors)

Options

Info

Selection• None• Cleaning 1• Cleaning 2• Cleaning 3• Cleaning 4‣ Decide whether the diagnostic message
should trigger a cleaning program.

The cleaning programs can be defined under:
Menu/Setup/Additional functions/Cleaning.

Factory setting
None
Detail information

14.4.4

Read only

Additional information on the diagnostic
message and instructions on how to resolve theproblem.

Restart the sensor signal

Restart sensor signal
The sensor is reinitialized with this action. The sensor starts in the automatic mode andsearches for the interface with the last sensor settings. The first measured value appears
after around 3 to 5 minutes.

14.4.5

Sensor change

Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: Sensor type/Extended setup/Sensor change• On
When the sensor is replaced, the last measured value is retained via the "hold" function.
A diagnostics message is not triggered.
• Off
When the sensor is replaced, the last measured value is not retained and triggers adiagnostics message.

14.4.6

Data processing factory setting

Possibility to restore the factory settings for the sensor input.
Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: Sensor type/Extended setup
1.
2.

Factory default measurement processing
Answer the question: OK (press the navigator button).
 Only the factory settings for this particular input are restored. All other settings
remain unchanged.

14.4.7

Sensor factory setting

Here you can restore the sensor factory settings.
Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: Sensor type/Extended setup
1.
2.

Endress+Hauser

Factory default sensor
Respond to prompt: OKwhen the prompt for the device software appears.
 Only the factory settings for the sensor are restored. The settings for the input
remain unchanged.

123Inputs: Interface

Memosens

14.4.8External holdA hold can be triggered for all the devices of a measuring point via a digital signal, e.g. afieldbus signal. Make sure that the hold signal is not used elsewhere. An external hold canbe assigned individually to every sensor input.
The function only appears in the Inputs menu if the signals for the external hold wereconfigured beforehand in the general hold settings:
Menu/Setup/General settings/Hold settings/External hold.
Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: <Sensor type>/Extended setup/

124

External hold

Function

Options

Info

SourceSelection• Binary inputs• Fieldbus signals

1.

For selecting the signal source of theexternal hold.
 Multiple selection is possible.

Factory setting
None

2.

OK: Confirm your selection.

Endress+Hauser

Memosens

Inputs: Spectrometer

15

Inputs: Spectrometer

15.1

Basic settings

15.1.1

Sensor identification

Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: sensor type
Function

Options

Info

ChannelSelection
• Off
• On

On
The channel display is switched on in themeasuring mode

Factory settingOn

OffThe channel is not displayed in the measuringmode, regardless of whether a sensor isconnected or not.

Read only(Only available if a sensor
is connected)

Connected sensor type

Sensor type
Order code

15.1.2

Order code of the connected sensor

Application type and data record

The sensor is precalibrated on leaving the factory. As such, it can be used in a wide range
of applications without the need for additional calibration. In addition to the factory
calibration data, which cannot be modified, the sensor has five other data records to be
used for storing process calibrations.
Calibration data records are saved under an individual name. You can add your own
data records with every calibration. You can then select them under Dataset.
Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: Spectrometer
Function

Options

Info

Application typeThe ordered parameter
package is displayed

Overview of parameter packages available:

Dataset15.1.3

Information for Memosens
 Technical
Wave CAS80E, TI01522C

Manual holdMenu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: Sensor type

Endress+Hauser

Function

Options

Info

Manual holdSelection
• Off
• On

On
You can use this function to set the channel
manually to "Hold".

Factory setting
Off

Off
No channel-specific hold125

Inputs: Spectrometer

Memosens

15.2

Extended setup

15.2.1

Measured value formats

Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: Spectrometer/

Extended setup

Function

Options

Info

Temperature format

Selection• #.#• #.##‣ Specify the number of decimal places.

Factory setting#.#
Main value format

The parameters are derived from the ordered parameter package. The format
can be determined individually for every parameter.
There is an individual factory setting for every parameter. Overview of thepossible parameters:

 Technical Information for Memosens Wave CAS80E, TI01522C
Format settings for every parameter

15.2.2

Measuring period

Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: Spectrometer/

Extended setup

Function

Options

Info

Measurement period

Selection• Default• Manual‣ Specify the interval in which measuring
should take place.

• DefaultInterval of 20 s
• Manual
Set an individual interval

Factory setting
Default
Measurement period

Selection
1.00 to 3600.00 s
Factory setting
20.00 s15.2.3

A fast measuring period is recommended forprocesses with frequent temperature or matrix
changes or permanently low processtemperatures (default = 20 s).

Cleaning holdMenu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: <Sensor type>/

Extended setup

Function

Options

Info

Cleaning holdSelection• None• Cleaning 1 ... 4‣ For selecting one or more cleaning programs

Factory settingNone(multiple selection).
 For the programs defined, the channel
switches to "Hold" while cleaning is inprogress.

Cleaning programs are executed:• At a specified interval
For this, the cleaning program must be
started.
• If a diagnostics message is pending on thechannel and a cleaning has been specified forthis message (→ Inputs/Channel: Sensor
type/Diagnostics settings/Diag. behavior/
Diagnostic number/Cleaning program).

The cleaning programs are defined in the menu: Setup/Additional functions/Cleaning.
126

Endress+Hauser

Memosens

Inputs: Spectrometer

15.2.4External holdA hold can be triggered for all the devices of a measuring point via a digital signal, e.g. afieldbus signal. Make sure that the hold signal is not used elsewhere. An external hold canbe assigned individually to every sensor input.
The function only appears in the Inputs menu if the signals for the external hold wereconfigured beforehand in the general hold settings:
Menu/Setup/General settings/Hold settings/External hold.
Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: <Sensor type>/Extended setup/

External hold

Function

Options

Info

SourceSelection• Binary inputs• Fieldbus signals

1.

For selecting the signal source of theexternal hold.
 Multiple selection is possible.

Factory setting
None

2.

OK: Confirm your selection.

15.2.5

Calibration settings

Stability criteria
You define the permitted measured value fluctuation which must not be exceeded in acertain timeframe during the calibration. If the permitted difference is exceeded, thecalibration is not permitted and is aborted automatically.
Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: Spectrometer/Extended setup/Calib. settings/

Stability criteria

Function

Options

Info

Delta temperature

0.10 to 2.00 K

Permitted temperature fluctuation duringcalibration

Factory setting
0.50 K
Duration

5 to 100 s
Factory setting
20 s

Timeframe within which the permitted
measured value fluctuation must not be
exceeded

Calibration monitoring
Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: Spectrometer/Extended setup/

Calib. settings

Function

Options

Info

Calib. expiration time

Selection
• Off
• On

Switches the function on or off

Factory setting
Off
Calib. expiration time

Selection
• Off
• On
Factory setting
Off

Endress+Hauser

The function checks whether the calibration of asensor is still valid.
Example: You install a precalibrated sensor.
The function checks how long ago the sensor
was last calibrated. A diagnostics message isdisplayed if the time since the last calibration islonger than specified by the predefined warningand alarm limit.

127

Inputs: Spectrometer

Memosens

Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: Spectrometer/Extended setup/
Function

Calib. settings

Options

Info

Warning limit

Factory setting
48 weeks

Diagnostic message: 105 Calibration validity

Alarm limit

Factory setting
52 weeks

Diagnostic message: 104 Calibration validity

Calib. expiration time

Warning and alarm limits mutually influence each other's possible range of adjustment.
Range of adjustment which must include both limits:
1 to 104 weeks
Generally, the following applies: alarm limit > warning limit

15.2.6

Diagnostics settings

In this menu branch, warning limits are specified or the use of diagnostics tools is defined.
The associated diagnostics code is displayed for every setting.
Operating hours limit values
The total operating time of the sensor and its use under extreme conditions is monitored.
If the operating time exceeds the defined threshold values, the device issues acorresponding diagnostics message.
Each sensor has a limited life expectancy which heavily depends on the operating
conditions. If warning limits for operating times under extreme conditions are
specified and maintenance tasks are performed in time, the operation of themeasuring point without any downtime can be guaranteed.
Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: Spectrometer/Extended setup/Diagnostics settings/
hours
Function

Options

Limits operating

Info The range of adjustment for the operating hours alarm and warning limits is generally 1 to 50000 h.
Function

Selection
• Off
• On
Factory settingOn

On
The operation of the sensor under extreme
conditions is monitored, recorded in the sensor
and diagnostics messages are displayed on thecontroller.
Off
No diagnostics messages. However, the time thesensor operates under extreme conditions isrecorded in the sensor and can be read in thesensor information in the Diagnostics menu.

Operating time
Warning limit

Total operating time of the sensor
Factory setting
10000 hDiagnostics code and associated message text:
199 Operating time

The names of the following menu functions depend on the sensor specification. For this reason, they
 cannotbe specified here.
Operation < 5 °C
Warning limit

Factory setting
10000 hDiagnostics code and associated message text:
935 Process temp. low

Factory setting
10000 hDiagnostics code and associated message text:
934 Process temp. highOperation > 50 °C
Warning limit

128

Endress+Hauser

Memosens

Inputs: Spectrometer

Diagnostic behavior
The list of diagnostic messages displayed depends on the path selected. There are devicespecific messages, and messages that depend on what sensor is connected.
Menu/Setup/(General settings or Inputs<Sensor channel>)/Extended setup/Diagnostics settings/Diag.
behavior
Function

OptionsInfo‣ Select the message to be changed. Only then

List of diagnostic messages

is it possible to make the settings for thismessage.

Diag. code

Read only

Diagnostic message

Selection
• On
• Off
Factory setting
Depends on the message

Failure current

Deactivate the diagnostic message or activate itagain.
Deactivating means:• No error message in the measuring mode
• No failure current at the current output

Selection
• On
• Off

‣ Decide whether a failure current should be

Factory setting
Depends on the message

the event of general device errors, the Infailure
current is output at all the current

output at the current output if the diagnostic
message display is activated.

outputs. In the event of channel-specificerrors, the failure current is only output at
the assigned current output.
Status signal

Selection• Maintenance (M)• Out of specification (S)• Function check (C)• Failure (F)The messages are divided into different error
categories in accordance with NAMUR NE 107.

‣ Decide whether a status signal assignment
should be changed for the application.

Factory setting
Depends on the message
Diag. output

Selection• None• Alarm relay• Binary output• Relay 1 to n (depends onthe device version)
Factory setting
None

Select an output to which the diagnostic message
should be assigned.
A relay output must first be configured for
Diagnostics before it is possible to assign themessage to an output.
(Menu/Setup/Outputs: Assign the Diagnostics
function and set Operating mode to as
assigned.)

 Alarm relays are available, depending on the device version.
Cleaning program(for sensors)

Selection• None• Cleaning 1• Cleaning 2• Cleaning 3• Cleaning 4‣ Decide whether the diagnostic message
should trigger a cleaning program.

The cleaning programs can be defined under:
Menu/Setup/Additional functions/Cleaning.

Factory setting
None
Detail information

15.2.7

Read only

Additional information on the diagnostic
message and instructions on how to resolve theproblem.

Signal processing

Measurement filter
Allows the user to adapt the behavior of the sensor over time to the medium.

Endress+Hauser

129Inputs: Spectrometer

Memosens

Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: Spectrometer/Extended setup/Signal processing/

Measurement filter

Function

Options

Info

Measurement filter

Selection• Default• Manual‣ Specify the number of spectra over which
the measured value should be averaged.

Factory setting
Default
Measurement filter

Selection
• Off
• Low
• Medium• HighFactory settingLow

15.2.8

Number of spectra over which the value isaveraged:• Low
Averaging over 3 spectra• Medium
Averaging over 7 spectra• HighAveraging over 11 spectra• Off
No smoothing

Spectrum

Spectrum visualization, configuration of the upper and lower limit frequency, andspectrum display type.
Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: Spectrometer/Extended setup/Signal processing/
Function

Options

Info

Spectrum

Selection• Intensity• Absorption• Reference

Spectrum display type

Spectrum

Factory setting
Absorption
Logging

Selection
• On
• Off

Logging of raw spectra for diagnostic and service
purposes. Saving of data to SD card.

Factory settingOn
Dspl. spctr. lower limit

Factory setting
190.0 nmStart and end value of the wavelength in the
spectrum display

Dspl. spctr. upper limit

Factory setting
1000.0 nm

Range of adjustment
160.0 to 1030.0 nm
The selected setting sets an upper or lower limit
for the range of adjustment available for the
opposite limit. For example, in the factory
setting the range of adjustment for the upper
limit (Dspl. spctr. upper limit) starts at
190.0 nm, the value of the lower limit (Dspl.
spctr. lower limit).
Recommendation for CAS80E:• Dspl. spctr. lower limit = 200 nm• Dspl. spctr. upper limit = 800 nm

130

Endress+Hauser

Memosens

Inputs: Spectrometer

15.2.9Tag control

This function is used to specify which sensors are accepted at the device.
Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: Sensor type/Extended setup/

Tag control

Function

Options

Info

Operating mode

Selection
• Off
• Tag
• Group

Off
No tag control, all sensors are accepted.

Factory setting
Off

Tag

User-defined text
Factory setting• EH_CM44_• EH_CM44R_

Group

Tag
Only sensors with the same tag name are
accepted.
Group
Only sensors in the same tag group are accepted.
Enter the tag name.
The controller checks every sensor to beconnected as to whether this sensor belongs to
the measuring point, and only accepts thesensors that have the same name.

Numerical
Factory setting
0

15.2.10 Sensor change
Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: Sensor type/Extended setup/Sensor change• On
When the sensor is replaced, the last measured value is retained via the "hold" function.
A diagnostics message is not triggered.
• Off
When the sensor is replaced, the last measured value is not retained and triggers adiagnostics message.

15.2.11 Sensor factory setting
Here you can restore the sensor factory settings.
Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: Sensor type/Extended setup
1.
2.

Endress+Hauser

Factory default sensor
Respond to prompt: OKwhen the prompt for the device software appears.
 Only the factory settings for the sensor are restored. The settings for the input
remain unchanged.

131Inputs: Fluorescence

Memosens

16

Inputs: Fluorescence

16.1

Basic settings

16.1.1

Sensor identification

Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: sensor type
Function

Options

Info

ChannelSelection
• Off
• On

On
The channel display is switched on in themeasuring mode

Factory settingOn

OffThe channel is not displayed in the measuringmode, regardless of whether a sensor isconnected or not.

Read only(Only available if a sensor
is connected)

Connected sensor type

Sensor type
Order code

16.1.2

Order code of the connected sensor

Damping

The damping causes a floating average curve of the measured values over the time
specified.
Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: Sensor type
Function

Options

Info

Depends on the sensor 1)

0 to 600 s

Damping temp.

Factory setting
0s

The damping of the main value and of theintegrated temperature sensor can be specified.

1)

Damping pH or Damping ORP or Damping Cond or Damping DO or Damping DI or Damping nitrate or
Damping SAC or Damping turbidity or Damping PAHphe

16.1.3Manual holdMenu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: Sensor type132

Function

Options

Info

Manual holdSelection
• Off
• On

On
You can use this function to set the channel
manually to "Hold".

Factory setting
Off

Off
No channel-specific holdEndress+Hauser

Memosens

Inputs: Fluorescence

16.2

Extended setup

16.2.1

Measured value formats

Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: Fluorescence/

Extended setup

Function

Options

Info

Temperature format

Selection• #.#• #.##

Specify the number of decimal places.

Factory setting#.#
Main value format

Selection• #• #.#• #.##• #.###
Factory setting#.#

16.2.2

Unit

Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: Fluorescence/
Function

Options

Main value unit

Selection• µg/l• ppb

Extended setup
Info

Factory settingµg/l

16.2.3Medium compensation

Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: Fluorescence/

Extended setup

Function

Options

Info

Medium comp. (TU)

Selection
• On
• Off

The measured value of the sensor is affected byturbidity that may occur. This function
compensates for the turbidity effects
automatically and in real-time.

Factory setting
Off
Medium comp. source
Medium comp. (TU) = On

Endress+Hauser

Selection depends on the
inputs available

Ways to compensate for turbidity:• Via a connected sensor, e.g. CUS52D• Via an analog input• Via the fieldbus

133Inputs: Fluorescence

Memosens

16.2.4

Cleaning holdMenu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: <Sensor type>/

Extended setup

Function

Options

Info

Cleaning holdSelection• None• Cleaning 1 ... 4‣ For selecting one or more cleaning programs(multiple selection).
 For the programs defined, the channel
switches to "Hold" while cleaning is inprogress.

Factory setting
None

Cleaning programs are executed:• At a specified interval
For this, the cleaning program must be
started.
• If a diagnostics message is pending on thechannel and a cleaning has been specified forthis message (→ Inputs/Channel: Sensor
type/Diagnostics settings/Diag. behavior/
Diagnostic number/Cleaning program).

The cleaning programs are defined in the menu: Setup/Additional functions/Cleaning.

16.2.5External holdA hold can be triggered for all the devices of a measuring point via a digital signal, e.g. afieldbus signal. Make sure that the hold signal is not used elsewhere. An external hold canbe assigned individually to every sensor input.
The function only appears in the Inputs menu if the signals for the external hold wereconfigured beforehand in the general hold settings:
Menu/Setup/General settings/Hold settings/External hold.
Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: <Sensor type>/Extended setup/

134

External hold

Function

Options

Info

SourceSelection• Binary inputs• Fieldbus signals

1.

For selecting the signal source of theexternal hold.
 Multiple selection is possible.

Factory setting
None

2.

OK: Confirm your selection.

Endress+Hauser

Memosens

Inputs: Fluorescence

16.2.6

Calibration settings

Calibration validity
Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: Fluorescence/Extended setup/

Calib. settings

Function

Options

Info

Calib. expiration time

Selection• Off• During operation

Switches the function on or off

Factory setting
During operation
Calibration validity

The function checks how long ago the sensor
was last calibrated. A diagnostics message isdisplayed if the time since the last calibration islonger than specified by the predefined warningand alarm limit.

Warning limit

Factory setting
5000 hDiagnostic message: 105 Calibration validity

Alarm limit

Factory setting
10000 hDiagnostic message: 104 Calibration validity

Warning and alarm limits mutually influence each other's possible range of adjustment.
Range of adjustment which must include both limits:
1 to 20000 h
Generally, the following applies: alarm limit > warning limit

16.2.7

Diagnostics settings

In this menu branch, warning limits are specified or the use of diagnostics tools is defined.
The associated diagnostics code is displayed for every setting.
Process Check System (PCS)The process check system (PCS) checks the measuring signal for stagnation. An alarm istriggered if the measuring signal does not change over a specific period (several measured
values).
y

y

yT

yT

tD

t

tA

A0028842

A0027276

 29
y
yT

Normal measuring signal, no alarm

Measuring signal
Set value for Tolerance width

t

 30
tD
tA

Stagnating signal, alarm is triggered

Set value for Duration
Time when the alarm is triggered

Main causes of stagnating measured values• Contaminated sensor, or sensor outside of medium• Sensor defective• Process error (e.g. through control system)

Endress+Hauser

135Inputs: Fluorescence

Memosens

Remedial measures1.

Clean sensor.

2.

Check positioning of sensor in medium.

3.

Check electrode system.

4.

Switch controller off and then switch it back on.

Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: Sensor type/Extended setup/Diagnostics settings/

Process check system

Function

Options

Info

Function

Selection
• Off
• On

Switches the function on or off

Factory setting
Off
Duration

1 to 240 min
Factory setting
60 minTolerance width
Not for pH/ORP sensors

The range depends on thesensor
Factory setting
Depends on the sensor

Enter the time after which the timer should timeout. After this time, the diagnostic message
Process check alarm is displayed with the code
904.
Interval around the measuring signal (raw value)for detecting stagnation.
Measured values within the set interval are
regarded as stagnating.

Operating hours limit values
The total operating time of the sensor and its use under extreme conditions is monitored.
If the operating time exceeds the defined threshold values, the device issues acorresponding diagnostics message.
Each sensor has a limited life expectancy which heavily depends on the operating
conditions. If warning limits for operating times under extreme conditions are
specified and maintenance tasks are performed in time, the operation of themeasuring point without any downtime can be guaranteed.
Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: Fluorescence/Extended setup/Diagnostics settings/
hours
Function

Options

Limits operating

Info The range of adjustment for the operating hours alarm and warning limits is generally 1 to 60000 h.
Function

Selection
• Off
• On
Factory setting
OffOn
The operation of the sensor under extreme
conditions is monitored, recorded in the sensor
and diagnostics messages are displayed on thecontroller.
Off
No diagnostics messages. However, the time thesensor operates under extreme conditions isrecorded in the sensor and can be read in thesensor information in the Diagnostics menu.

Operating time
Warning limit

Total operating time of the sensor
Factory setting
40000 hDiagnostics code and associated message text:
199 Operating time

Factory setting
10000 hDiagnostics code and associated message text:
935 Process temp. low

Operation < -20 °C
Warning limit

136

Endress+Hauser

Memosens

Inputs: Fluorescence

Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: Fluorescence/Extended setup/Diagnostics settings/
hours
Function

Limits operating

Options

Info

Factory setting
10000 hDiagnostics code and associated message text:
934 Process temp. highOperation > 60 °C
Warning limit

Diagnostic behavior
The list of diagnostic messages displayed depends on the path selected. There are devicespecific messages, and messages that depend on what sensor is connected.
Menu/Setup/(General settings or Inputs<Sensor channel>)/Extended setup/Diagnostics settings/Diag.
behavior
Function

OptionsInfo‣ Select the message to be changed. Only then

List of diagnostic messages

is it possible to make the settings for thismessage.

Diag. code

Read only

Diagnostic message

Selection
• On
• Off
Factory setting
Depends on the message

Failure current

Deactivate the diagnostic message or activate itagain.
Deactivating means:• No error message in the measuring mode
• No failure current at the current output

Selection
• On
• Off

‣ Decide whether a failure current should be

Factory setting
Depends on the message

the event of general device errors, the Infailure
current is output at all the current

output at the current output if the diagnostic
message display is activated.

outputs. In the event of channel-specificerrors, the failure current is only output at
the assigned current output.
Status signal

Selection• Maintenance (M)• Out of specification (S)• Function check (C)• Failure (F)The messages are divided into different error
categories in accordance with NAMUR NE 107.

‣ Decide whether a status signal assignment
should be changed for the application.

Factory setting
Depends on the message
Diag. output

Selection• None• Alarm relay• Binary output• Relay 1 to n (depends onthe device version)
Factory setting
None

Select an output to which the diagnostic message
should be assigned.
A relay output must first be configured for
Diagnostics before it is possible to assign themessage to an output.
(Menu/Setup/Outputs: Assign the Diagnostics
function and set Operating mode to as
assigned.)

 Alarm relays are available, depending on the device version.

Endress+Hauser

137Inputs: Fluorescence

Memosens

Menu/Setup/(General settings or Inputs<Sensor channel>)/Extended setup/Diagnostics settings/Diag.
behavior
Function
Cleaning program(for sensors)

Options

Info

Selection• None• Cleaning 1• Cleaning 2• Cleaning 3• Cleaning 4‣ Decide whether the diagnostic message
should trigger a cleaning program.

The cleaning programs can be defined under:
Menu/Setup/Additional functions/Cleaning.

Factory setting
None
Detail information

Read only

Additional information on the diagnostic
message and instructions on how to resolve theproblem.

Hardware limits
These limit values are used to assess the condition of the sensor in Heartbeat Diagnostics.
The menu is only available if the "Heartbeat Verification+Monitoring" software option
has been ordered and an additional activation code has been installed for this option.
Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: Fluorescence/Extended setup/Diagnostics settings/

Hardware limits

Function

Options

Info

Warn. limit lightsource

10 to 90

The function monitors the aging of the lightsource. A value of 100 is the best state.
The warning limit means that the sensor healthdeteriorates as of this value and lower values,
and the Heartbeat smiley changes as a result (or ).

Factory setting
50

Warn. limit adjustment

10 to 100
Factory setting
50

The function monitors the deviation from theadjustment with the solid state reference. The
smaller the deviation the better.
The warning limit means that the sensor healthdeteriorates as of this value and larger values,
and the Heartbeat smiley changes as a result (or ).

The current values can be read in the Expert menu (password required). (Expert/
Diagnostics/Sensor information/Current base value/Lightsource monitoring or
Adjustment deviation)

138

Endress+Hauser

Memosens

Inputs: Fluorescence

16.2.8Signal processing

Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: Fluorescence/Extended setup/Signal processing/

Measurement filter

Function

Options

Info

Configuration method

Selection• Standard• Specialist

Standard
Choice of 3 predefined configurations

Factory settingStandard
Filter level
Configuration method =Standard

Selection• Low• Medium• HighFactory setting
MediumRelative limit

0.000000 to 1.000000

Configuration method =Specialist

Factory setting
0.001000Dwell time before jump

Factory setting
10 s

Configuration method =Specialist

Specialist
You specify in detail how the measurement filter
should react.
• Low
The measurement filter only has a minor
influence on the measuring signal. The sensor
quickly follows all the changes in the process.
Potential interference from one-off events is
not ignored. The response time is short; thesensor responds quickly.
• HighThe measurement filter has a large influenceon the measuring signal. The sensor follows
the average turbidity value. Transient, one-off
events are ignored. The response time israther long; the sensor only responds to longterm process changes.
• Medium
The influence of the measurement filter isbetween the two extremes.
Specify the filter strength
0.000000 ... constant measured value
0.001000 ... standard
0.010000 ... low
1.000000 ... off‣ Specify the period of time after which themeasured value must change at the verylatest.

time before jump and Integ. time Dwell
before jump influence each other's
adjustment limits.
Total range of adjustment: 2 to 1000 s,
Dwell time before jump > Integ. time
before jump
Factory setting
4s‣ Specify the number of measured values

Dynamic

1 to 3

Configuration method =Specialist

Factory setting
3

How dynamically should the filter respond: slow
(1) to fast (3).

Integ. time before jumpConfiguration method =Specialist

Endress+Hauser(time span) which should be used for the
next change value.

139

Inputs: Fluorescence

Memosens

16.2.9Tag control

This function is used to specify which sensors are accepted at the device.
Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: Sensor type/Extended setup/

Tag control

Function

Options

Info

Operating mode

Selection
• Off
• Tag
• Group

Off
No tag control, all sensors are accepted.

Factory setting
Off

Tag

User-defined text
Factory setting• EH_CM44_• EH_CM44R_

Group

Tag
Only sensors with the same tag name are
accepted.
Group
Only sensors in the same tag group are accepted.
Enter the tag name.
The controller checks every sensor to beconnected as to whether this sensor belongs to
the measuring point, and only accepts thesensors that have the same name.

Numerical
Factory setting
0

16.2.10 Sensor change
Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: Sensor type/Extended setup/Sensor change• On
When the sensor is replaced, the last measured value is retained via the "hold" function.
A diagnostics message is not triggered.
• Off
When the sensor is replaced, the last measured value is not retained and triggers adiagnostics message.

16.2.11 Data processing factory setting
Possibility to restore the factory settings for the sensor input.
Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: Sensor type/Extended setup
1.
2.

Factory default measurement processing
Answer the question: OK (press the navigator button).
 Only the factory settings for this particular input are restored. All other settings
remain unchanged.

16.2.12 Sensor factory setting
Here you can restore the sensor factory settings.
Menu/Setup/Inputs/Channel: Sensor type/Extended setup
1.
2.

140

Factory default sensor
Respond to prompt: OKwhen the prompt for the device software appears.
 Only the factory settings for the sensor are restored. The settings for the input
remain unchanged.

Endress+Hauser

Memosens

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

17

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

17.1

Process errors without messages

17.1.1

pH/ORP measurement

ProblemPossible cause

Tests and/or remedial measures

Display deviates fromreference measurement

Incorrect calibration

Repeat calibration
Where necessary, check the calibration with thereference device and repeat.

Sensor fouled

Clean sensor

Temperature measurement

Check the temperature measured values of bothdevices

Temperature compensation

Check the settings for temperaturecompensation and adjustment for both devices

Measuring chain zeroContaminated reference system
point cannot be adjusted
Membrane clogged

Test with a new sensor
Clean or grind membrane

Asymmetric sensor voltage too
high

Clean junction or test with another sensor• Sensor fouled• Sensor old• Sensor defective (reference
lead)

Clean sensor

Reference has low level of KCl

Check KCl supply: 0.8 bar (12 psi) over medium
pressure

Measuring chain slope:• Cannot be adjusted• Too low
• No slope

Device input defective

Check device directly• Sensor old• Hair-line crack in the glass
membrane

Replace sensor

Constant, incorrect
measured value

Sensor does not immerse
properly or protection cap not
removedCheck installation position, remove protectioncap

Air pockets in assembly

Check assembly and installation position

Grounding short at or in device

Perform test measurement in insulated vessel,with buffer solution if applicableHair-line crack in the glass
membrane

Replace sensor

No or slow change ofreadings

Device in impermissible operating Switch off device and switch it on again
condition (does not respondwhen key pressed)
Incorrect temperature
value

Sensor defective

Change sensor

Fluctuations inmeasured value

Interference on signal output
cable

Check cable routing, possibly route cableseparatelyInterference potential in medium

Eliminate source of interference or groundmedium as close as possible to sensor.

Cable disconnected or shortcircuited

Disconnect cable and measure directly at device

Output defective→ "Device-specific errors" in the Operating
Instructions of the transmitter, sampler, analyzer

Current simulation active

Switch off simulation

No current output signal

Fixed current output
signalEndress+Hauser

141

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Memosens

ProblemPossible cause

Tests and/or remedial measures

Incorrect current output
signalTotal load in current loop too
highMeasure the load and reduce it to the permitted
value if necessary (→ "Technical data" in the
Operating Instructions of the transmitter,sampler, analyzer)

EMC (interference coupling)

Check the wiring, identify and eliminate cause ofinterference

17.1.2

Conductivity measurement

ProblemPossible cause

Tests and/or remedial measures

Display deviates fromreference measurement

Incorrect calibration

Repeat calibration
Where necessary, check the calibration with thereference device and repeat.

Sensor fouled

Clean sensor

Temperature measurement

Check the temperature measured values of bothdevices

Temperature compensation

Check the settings for temperaturecompensation and adjustment for both devices

Polarization errors

Use suitable sensor• Larger cell constant• Graphite instead of stainless steel (observe
material resistance properties)

Short-circuit/moisture in sensor

Check the sensor

Short-circuit in cable or socket

Check cable and socket

Disconnection in sensor

Check the sensor

Disconnection in cable or socket

Check cable and socket

Incorrect cell constant setting

Check cell constant

Incorrect output assignment

Check assignment of measured value to current
signalAir pockets in assembly

Check assembly and installation position

Grounding short at or in device

Measure in insulated vessel

Implausible measured
values:• Measured value
constantly 000• Measured value too
low• Measured value too
high• Measured value
frozen• Current output value
not as expected

Device in impermissible operating Switch off device and switch it on again
condition (does not respondwhen key pressed)

142

Incorrect temperature
value

Sensor defective

Change sensor

Measured value inprocess incorrect

No/incorrect temperaturecompensation

ATC: select type of compensation; if linear, set
suitable coefficients
MTC: set process temperature

Incorrect temperature
measurement

Check temperature measured value

Bubbles in medium

Suppress formation of bubbles by:• Gas bubble trap
• Creating counterpressure (orifice plate)• Measurement in bypass

Flow rate too high (can lead tobubble formation)

Reduce flow rate or select less turbulent
mounting location

Voltage potential in medium(only for conductive)

Ground medium close to sensor

Sensor fouling or buildup on
sensorClean sensor

Endress+Hauser

Memosens

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

ProblemPossible cause

Tests and/or remedial measures

Fluctuations inmeasured value

Interference on signal output
cable

Check cable routing, possibly route cableseparatelyInterference potential in medium

Eliminate source of interference or groundmedium as close as possible to sensor.

Interference on measuring cable

Connect cable shield as per wiring diagram

Cable disconnected or shortcircuited

Disconnect cable and measure directly at device

Output defective→ "Device-specific errors" in the Operating
Instructions of the transmitter, sampler, analyzer

Fixed current output
signalCurrent simulation active

Switch off simulation

Incorrect current output
signalTotal load in current loop too
highMeasure the load and reduce it to the permitted
value if necessary (→ "Technical data" in the
Operating Instructions of the transmitter,sampler, analyzer)

EMC (interference coupling)

Check the wiring, identify and eliminate cause ofinterference

No current output signal

17.1.3Oxygen measurement

ProblemPossible cause

Tests and/or remedial measures

Display value ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐Sensor defective

Test with a new sensor

Sensor cable disconnected

Check the cable or cable extension

Incorrect sensor connection

Check connection at input module (→  8)

Electronics module defective

Replace module

No or slow change ofreadings• Sensor fouled• Sensor old

Clean sensor
Where necessary, replace the electrolyte,
membrane cap (amperometric sensor) or
fluorescence cap (optical sensor)

Constant, incorrect
measured value

Device in impermissible operating Switch off device and switch it on again
condition (does not respondwhen key pressed)

Measured value too low

Membrane soiled

Clean sensor or replace cap

Electrolyte used up or
contaminatedReplace the electrolyte

Anode coating worn

Repolarize sensor

Black anode coating

Regenerate sensor in factory

Measured value too high Air pocket under membrane

Implausible measured
value

Polarization not complete

Wait for polarization time to finish (→ Techn.
data the Operating Instructions of the sensor)

Incorrect temperature
measurement

Check/correct value

Incorrect altitude setting

Incorrect calibration
Reconfigure and repeat calibration

Incorrect air pressure
Incorrect temperature
value

Endress+Hauser

Clean sensor, optimize installation where
necessarySensor defective

Change sensor

Incorrect sensor connection

Check input module (→  8)143

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Memosens

ProblemPossible cause

Tests and/or remedial measures

Fluctuations inmeasured value

Interference on signal output
cable

Check cable routing, possibly route cableseparatelyInterference potential in medium

Eliminate source of interference or groundmedium as close as possible to sensor.

Interference on measuring cable

Connect cable shield as per wiring diagram

Cable disconnected or shortcircuited

Disconnect cable and measure directly at device

Output defective→ "Device-specific errors" in the Operating
Instructions of the transmitter, sampler, analyzer

Fixed current output
signalCurrent simulation active

Switch off simulation

Incorrect current output
signalTotal load in current loop too
highMeasure the load and reduce it to the permitted
value if necessary (→ "Technical data" in the
Operating Instructions of the transmitter,sampler, analyzer)

EMC (interference coupling)

Check the wiring, identify and eliminate cause ofinterference

No current output signal

17.1.4

Measurement of disinfection parameters

ProblemPossible cause

Tests and/or remedial measures

Display value ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐Sensor defective

Test with a new sensor

Sensor cable disconnected

Check the cable or cable extension

Incorrect sensor connection

Check connection at input module (→  8)

Electronics module defective

Replace module

Slope too low

Sensor was in chlorine-free water Short conditioning over (not in!) chlorine bleachor in air
Wait for adjustment time in water to elapse
before calibration

No match with DPD
control measurement

Measurement takes place
without pH compensation, while
DPD measurement is always
buffered to pH 6.3.

Measure chlorine value pH-compensated

DPD measured value
much too highOrganic chlorination agent used(may also be used only at times
or for shock chlorination). In thiscase, no correlation between
actual free chlorine, DPD
measurement and amperometricmeasurement. DPD value toohigh by a factor of up to 5.

Use free (gaseous) chlorine or chlorine frominorganic chlorine compounds

Chlorine value too highMembrane defective

Replace membrane cap

Polarization not complete

Wait for polarization time to finish

Foreign oxidizing agent

Analyze medium

Shunt in chlorine sensor

Replace sensor

Measuring chamber not closed

Refill and screw closed carefully

Air cushion outside in front of
membraneRemove air bubble, possibly select better
installation position

Air cushion inside membrane

Refill and screw closed so that it is bubble-free

Sensor fouled

Clean sensor

Sensor old

Replace sensor

Sensor defective (reference lead)Replace sensor

Chlorine value too low

No or slow change ofreadings

144

Endress+Hauser

Memosens

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

ProblemPossible cause

Tests and/or remedial measures

Constant, incorrect
measured value

Sensor does not immerse
properly or protection cap not
removedCheck installation position, remove protectioncap

Air pockets in assembly

Check assembly and installation position

Cable disconnected or shortcircuited

Disconnect cable and measure directly at device

Output defective→ "Device-specific errors" in the Operating
Instructions of the transmitter, sampler, analyzer

Fixed current output
signalCurrent simulation active

Switch off simulation

Incorrect current output
signalTotal load in current loop too
highMeasure the load and reduce it to the permitted
value if necessary (→ "Technical data" in the
Operating Instructions of the transmitter,sampler, analyzer)

EMC (interference coupling)

Check the wiring, identify and eliminate cause ofinterference

No current output signal

17.1.5

Turbidity, SAC and nitrate measurement

ProblemPossible cause

Tests and/or remedial measures

Display value ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐Sensor defective

Test with a new sensor

Sensor cable disconnected

Check the cable or cable extension

Incorrect sensor connection

Check connection at input module (→  8)

Electronics module defective

Replace module

No or slow change ofreadings

Sensor fouled

Clean sensor

Constant, incorrect
measured value

Device in impermissible operating Switch off device and switch it on again
condition (does not respondwhen key pressed)

Implausible measured
value

Sensor not calibrated orincorrectly calibrated

Calibration with original sample might benecessary for concentration or solids content

Sensor fouled

Clean sensor

Sensor installed in "dead zone" or
air pocket in assembly or flange

Check installation position, move sensor to areathat receives good flow. Pay attention when
mounting in horizontal pipes

Incorrect sensor orientation

Align sensor:• Normal media: Direct flow to measuringwindow• For high solids content: Align measuringwindow at angle of 90° to flow

Incorrect temperature
value

Sensor defective

Change sensor

Incorrect sensor connection

Check input module (→  8)

Fluctuations inmeasured value

Interference on signal output
cable

Check cable routing, possibly route cableseparately

Irregular flow / turbulence / airbubbles / large solid particles

Select a better mounting location or reduceturbulence, use a large measured value damping
factor if necessary

Cable disconnected or shortcircuited

Disconnect cable and measure directly at device

Output defective→ "Device-specific errors" in the Operating
Instructions of the transmitter, sampler, analyzer

No current output signal

Endress+Hauser

145

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Memosens

ProblemPossible cause

Tests and/or remedial measures

Fixed current output
signalCurrent simulation active

Switch off simulation

Incorrect current output
signalTotal load in current loop too
highMeasure the load and reduce it to the permitted
value if necessary (→ "Technical data" in the
Operating Instructions of the transmitter,sampler, analyzer)

EMC (interference coupling)

Check the wiring, identify and eliminate cause ofinterference

Air bubbles

Do not mount sensor above aeration discs

Value switches to zeroand back to measured
value

17.1.6

Interface measurement

When troubleshooting, the entire measuring point must be taken into account:• Transmitter• Electrical connections and cables• Assembly• Sensor
The possible causes of errors in the following table refer primarily to the sensor.
Display

Check

Remedial action

Blank display, no sensor
reaction• Mains voltage connected to the transmitter• Sensor connected correctly• Deposit buildup on sensor membrane• Check sensor/channel configuration• Apply mains voltage• Make the right connection• Clean sensor• Assign sensor

Display value too high or
too low• Basin configuration• Check sensor installation

Configure sensor

Display value fluctuating
greatly• Check mounting location• Deposit buildup on sensor membrane• Basin configuration• Select a different mounting
location• Clean sensor• Configure sensor

Pay attention to the troubleshooting information in the Operating Instructions for thetransmitter. Check the transmitter if necessary.

146

Endress+Hauser

Memosens

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

17.1.7

Measurement with ion-selective sensors

ProblemPossible cause

Tests and/or remedial measures

Temperature value• Temperature sensor notalways 20 °C or incorrectconnected or connected
incorrectly• Temperature sensor defective• Cable to temperature sensor
defective

Check temperature sensor and replace where
necessary
Replace the cable

Display deviates fromreference measurement

Repeat calibration
Where necessary, check the calibration with thereference device and repeat.

Incorrect calibration

Electrode connected to the wrong Compare terminal assignment to setting on
slot
transmitter
Electrode is contaminatedClean the electrode

Temperature measurement

Check the temperature measured values of bothdevices

Temperature compensation

Check the settings for temperaturecompensation and adjustment for both devices

pH compensation (only forammonium), pH measurement

Check the settings and the pH measurement if
necessary

No or slow change ofreadings• Electrodes fouled• Electrodes too old• Electrodes defective• Clean the electrodes• Replace membrane cap and electrolyte• Replace the electrodes

Measured value drift

Reference of pH electrodedefective

Replace the pH electrodeContamination of referenceelectrode or ion-selective
electrodes

Application problem

Sensor does not immerse
properly or protection cap of thepH electrode not removed

Check installation position, remove protection
cap

Air bubble in the electrodebetween membrane and innerterminal leads

Tap the electrolyte in the electrode towards themembrane

Membrane cap or electrodedefective

Replace the membrane cap or electrode

Electrodes contaminatedTest with new electrodes

Reference of pH electrode used

Replace the pH electrode

Measuring chain zeropoint not stable andcannot be adjusted

Electrode connected to the wrong Compare terminal assignment to setting on
slot
transmitter
Display fluctuates
greatly

Air bubbles in the electrodes

Tap the electrolyte in the electrode towards themembrane

Fluctuations inmeasured value

Interference on signal output
cable

Check cable routing, possibly route cableseparatelyInterference potential in medium

Eliminate source of interference or groundmedium as close as possible to sensor.

Cable disconnected or shortcircuited

Disconnect cable and measure directly at device

Output defective→ "Device-specific errors" in the Operating
Instructions of the transmitter, sampler, analyzer

Current simulation active

Switch off simulation

No current output signal

Fixed current output
signalEndress+Hauser

147

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Memosens

ProblemPossible cause

Tests and/or remedial measures

Incorrect current output
signalTotal load in current loop too
highMeasure the load and reduce it to the permitted
value if necessary (→ "Technical data" in the
Operating Instructions of the transmitter,sampler, analyzer)

EMC (interference coupling)

Check the wiring, identify and eliminate cause ofinterference

17.1.8Spectrometer

When troubleshooting, the entire measuring point must be taken into account:• Transmitter• Electrical connections and cables• Assembly• Spectrometer
The possible causes of error in the following table relate mainly to the spectrometer.
Problem

Check

Remedial action

Nothing displayed, noreaction from thespectrometer• Mains voltage at transmitter?
• Current transmitter software
incorporated?
• Spectrometer connected correctly?
• Buildup on optical windows?

‣
‣
‣
‣

Display value too high or
too low• Buildup on optical windows?
• Spectrometer calibrated?

‣ Clean the windows.
‣ Calibrate the spectrometer.

Display value fluctuating
greatly• Air bubbles in the measurement gap? ‣• Is the mounting location correct?
‣

Measured value drift

Buildup on optical windows?

‣

Connect mains voltage.
Perform software update.
Establish correct connection.
Clean the spectrometer.

Clean the windows.
Select a different mounting location.
Adjust measurement filter.

‣ First clean the spectrometer.
‣ Record the reference spectrum.

Pay attention to the troubleshooting information in the Operating Instructions for thetransmitter. Check the transmitter if necessary.

17.1.9Fluorescence measurement

When troubleshooting, the entire measuring point must be taken into account:• Transmitter• Electrical connections and cables• Sensor
The possible causes of error in the following table refer primarily to the sensor.
Problem

Check

Remedial action

Blank display, no sensor reaction• Line voltage at transmitter?
• Sensor connected correctly?
• Buildup on optical windows?

‣ Connect mains voltage.
‣ Establish correct connection.
‣ Clean sensor.

Display value too high or too low• Buildup on optical windows?
• Sensor calibrated?

‣ Clean device.
‣ Calibrate device.

Display value fluctuating greatly

Is the mounting location correct?

‣ Select a different mounting location.
‣ Adjust measured value filter.

Pay attention to the troubleshooting information in the Operating Instructions for thetransmitter. Check the transmitter if necessary.

148

Endress+Hauser

Memosens

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

17.2

Overview of diagnostic information

17.2.1

Device-specific diagnostic messages

Operating Instructions of the transmitter, sampler or analyzer

17.2.2

Sensor-specific diagnostic messages

The following abbreviations for the various sensor types are used in the table:• P ... pH/ORP (general, applies for all pH sensors)• P (glass) ... only applies for glass electrodes• P (ISFET) ... only applies for ISFET sensors• C ... conductivity (general, applies for all conductivity sensors)• C (cond.) ... only applies for sensors with conductive measurement of conductivity• C (ind.) ... only applies for sensors with inductive measurement of conductivity• O ... oxygen (general, applies for all oxygen sensors)• O (opt.) ... only applies for optical oxygen sensors• O (amp.) ... only applies for amperometric oxygen sensors• N ... nitrate sensors• T ... turbidity and solids sensors• S ... SAC sensors• U ... interface sensors• I ... ion-selective sensors• DI ... disinfection sensors• SC ... spectrometer for water analysis• FL ... sensors for fluorescence measurement
No.

Factory settings
S 1)

D 2)

F 3)

Sensortype

Tests or remedial action‣ Replace sensor.

002

Sensor unknown

F

On

On

All

004

Sensor defective

F

On

On

All

005

Sensor data invalid

F

On

On

All

1.

Check the firmware compatibilityof the sensor and transmitter orload suitable firmware

2.

Set the sensor to the factory
settings, disconnect the sensor
and reconnect it.

3.

Update transmitter data

4.

Replace sensor.

010

Sensor scanning

F

Off

On

All

‣ Wait for initialization to be finished.

012

Writing data failed

F

On

On

All

1.

Repeat write process.

2.

Replace sensor.

013

018

Endress+Hauser

Message

Sensor type wrong

Sensor not ready

F

F

On

On

On

On

All

All

Sensor does not suit the device
configuration or device configurationmust be changed to new type of sensor
1.

Change to a sensor of the typethat is configured.

2.

Adapt the device configuration to
the connected sensor.

Sensor communication blocked
1.

Sensor fails tag check. Replace.

2.

Internal software error. Contact
the Service Department.

149

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

No.

022

061

Memosens

Message

Factory settings
S 1)

D 2)

F 3)

Temperature
sensorF

On

On

Sensor electronic

F

On

On

Sensortype

Tests or remedial action

P, C, O, I,
DI, SC, FL

Temperature sensor defectiveAll‣ Replace sensor.
Sensor electronics defective‣ Replace sensor.
062

Sensor connection

F

On

On

All

1.

Check sensor connection.

2.

Contact Service Department.

081

Initialization

F

On

On

All

‣ Wait for initialization to be finished.

100

Sensorcommunication

F

On

On

All

Sensor not communicating

101

102

Sensorincompatible

Calibration timer

1.

F

M

On

On

On

Off

All

All except
SC, FL

Check sensor connection.

2.

Check sensor connector.

3.

Contact Service Department.

1.

Update sensor firmware

2.

Replace sensor.

3.

Contact Service Department.

Calibration interval elapsed.
Measurement can still take place.

‣ Calibrate sensor.
103

Calibration timer

M

On

Off

All except
SC, FL

Calibration interval will elapse soon.
Measurement can still take place.

‣ Calibrate sensor.
104

Calibration validity

M

On

Off

All

Last calibration no longer valid.
Measurement can still take place.

‣ Calibrate sensor.
105

Calibration validity

M

On

Off

All

Last calibration will lose its validity soon.
Measurement can still take place.

‣ Calibrate sensor.
106

Sensor TAG

F

On

On

All

Sensor has invalid tag or tag group107

Calibration active

C

On

Off

P, C, O, I,
DI‣ Wait for calibration to be finished.

108

SIP, CIP,
autoclaving

M

On

Off

P, C, OSpecified number of sterilizations willsoon be reached. Measurement can stilltake place.

‣ Replace sensor.
109

SIP, CIP, autoclav
cap

M

On

Off

O (amp.)Specified number of sterilizations for thecap is reached. Measurement can stilltake place.

‣ Replace membrane cap.
110

Init. channel

F

On

On

All except
SC

Channel initialization has failed.
Measuring operation not possible.

‣ Contact Service Department.
111

Operating time cap

M

On

Off

DI

Hours of operation monitoring
The limit set for the total hours ofoperation for the cap has been reached.
Measurement can still take place.

150

1.

Replace the cap.

2.

Change monitoring limit.

Endress+Hauser

Memosens

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

No.

113

Message

Incompatible filter

Factory settings
S 1)

D 2)

F 3)

F

On

On

Sensortype

Tests or remedial action

O (opt)Incompatible filter setting in the sensor
1.

Switch to valid measurement filter(sensor settings).

2.

Update the device firmware.

3.

Contact Service Department.

114

Temp.offset high

M

On

Off

All except
U, SC, FL

Calibration alarm: Limit values fortemperature offset exceeded

115

Temp. offset low

M

On

Off

All except
U, SC, FL

1.

Check temperature sensor.

2.

Replace sensor.

116

Temp. slope high

M

On

Off

All except
U, SC, FL

Calibration alarm: Limit values fortemperature slope exceeded

117

Temp. slope low

M

On

Off

All except
U, SC, FL

Sensor old or defective

118

Sensor glass break.

F

On

Off

P (glass)

119

Sensor check

M

On

Off

P (glass)

120

Sensor reference

F

On

Off

P (glass)

121

Sensor reference

M

On

Off

P (glass)

1.

Repeat calibration.

2.

Replace sensor.

Glass breakage warning, impedance ofpH glass too low
Measuring can continue until the alarm(118) occurs.
1.

Inspect sensor for hair-line cracks
and breakage.

2.

Check medium temperature.

3.

Replace sensor.

Reference warning, impedance ofreference too low
Measuring can continue until the alarm(120) occurs.
1.

Check reference for clogging/
contamination.

2.

Clean reference/junction.

3.

Replace sensor.

122

Sensor glass

F

On

Off

P (glass)

123

Sensor glass

M

On

On

P (glass)

124

Sensor glass

M

On

Off

P (glass)

Measuring can continue until the alarm(122, 124) occurs.

125

Sensor glass

F

On

Off

P (glass)

1.

Inspect sensor for hair-line cracks
and breakage.

2.

Check or change limit values.

3.

Replace sensor.

126

Sensor check

M

On

Off

P (glass)

Impedance limit values exceeded/
undershot

Sensor condition check (SCC), poor
sensor condition
Glass membrane fouled or dry, junction
blocked1.

Clean sensor, regenerate2.

Replace sensor.

127

Sensor check

M

On

Off

P (glass)

Sensor condition check (SCC), adequate
sensor condition

128

Sensor leakage

F

On

Off

P (ISFET),O (amp.),DI

Leak current alarm
Defective due to abrasion or damage
Damage to the gate (only ISFET)‣ Replace sensor.

Endress+Hauser

151

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

No.

Memosens

Message

Factory settings
S 1)

D 2)

F 3)

Sensortype

Tests or remedial action

129

Sensor leakage

F

On

Off

P (ISFET),O (amp.),DI

Leak current warning
Measuring can continue until the alarm
occurs130

Sensor supply

F

On

Off

P, O, I, DI

Poor sensor power supply

131

Sensor calibration

M

On

Off

O (opt.)132

Sensor calibration

M

On

Off

O (opt.)1.

Check sensor connection.

2.

Replace sensor.

Limit values for sensor relaxation time
(fluorescence decay time) exceeded/
undershot
Reasons: high oxygen content, incorrect
calibration

133

134

Sensor signal

Sensor signal

F

M

On

On

Off

Off

O (opt.)O (opt.)1.

Repeat calibration.

2.

Replace sensor cap.

3.

Contact Service Department.

No signal (fluorescence decay)
1.

Replace sensor cap.

2.

Contact Service Department.

Low signal amplitude. Measurement canstill take place.
1.

Replace sensor cap.

2.

Contact Service Department.

135

Sensor temp. low

S

On

Off

O

Temperature outside specification

136

Sensor temp. high

S

On

Off

O

1.

Check process.

2.

Check installation.

137

Sensor LED

F

On

Off

O (opt.)Sensor LED: no voltage‣ Contact Service Department.
138

Sensor LED

F

On

Off

O (opt.)Sensor LED: no power‣ Contact Service Department.
140

Sensor check

F

On

Off

O

Sensor range errors‣ Contact Service Department.
141

Polarization

F

On

Off

C (cond.)Polarization warning
The measured value is corrupted at highconductivity levels.

‣ Use a sensor with a larger cell
constant.

142

143

144

Sensor signal

Sensor check

Conductivity range

F

F

S

On

On

Off

Off

Off

On

C

C

C

Reasons: sensor in air, sensor defective
1.

Check installation.

2.

Replace sensor.

Sensor self-test error
1.

Replace sensor.

2.

Contact Service Department.

Conductivity outside measuring range‣ Use a sensor with a suitable cell
constant.

152

Endress+Hauser

Memosens

Diagnostics and troubleshootingNo.

Message

Factory settings
S 1)

146

147

Sensor temperature S

Sensor check

F

D 2)

F 3)

Off

Off

On

On

Sensortype

Tests or remedial action

C, N, T, S,
FL

Temperature outside specification

C (ind.)1.

Check the temperature.

2.

Check electrode system.

3.

Replace sensor type.

Coil transmission current too highReasons: transmission coil short-circuit,inductance too low

148

149

151

152

Sensor check

Sensor LED

Sensor buildup

Sensor data invalid

F

F

F

M

On

On

On

Off

On

On

On

Off

C (ind.)TT

C (ind.)1.

Replace sensor.

2.

Contact Service Department.

Reasons: transmission coil interrupted,
inductance too high1.

Replace sensor.

2.

Contact Service Department.

Sensor LED error
1.

Replace sensor.

2.

Contact Service Department.

Buildup, high degree of contamination
1.

Clean sensor.

2.

Replace sensor.

3.

Contact Service Department.

No calibration data

‣ Perform air set calibration.
153

Sensor defective

F

On

On

N, T, S

Sensor strobe lamp defective
Reasons: aging, end of operating life,mechanical disturbance/vibration

154

Sensor data invalid

M

Off

Off

C

1.

Replace sensor.

2.

Contact Service Department.

Factory calibration is used

‣ Calibrate.
155

Sensor defective

F

On

On

N, T, S

Sensor defective
Error with analog evaluation

156

Organic pollution

F

On

On

N, T, S

1.

Replace sensor.

2.

Contact Service Department.

Excessive organic fouling
Reasons: sensor fouling, high organic
content, incorrect orientation

157

Filter change

M

On

Off

N, S

1.

Clean sensor

2.

Install automatic cleaning.

3.

Check application.

Optical filter must be replaced
Reasons: long period of operation,
moisture in sensor

Endress+Hauser

1.

Replace sensor.

2.

Contact Service Department.

153

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

No.

158

159

Memosens

Message

Sensor check

Sensor check

Factory settings
S 1)

D 2)

F 3)

F

On

Off

F

On

Off

Sensortype

Tests or remedial action

N, T, S

Invalid measured value

N, T, S

1.

Check sensor power supply.

2.

Restart the device.

3.

Contact Service Department.

Uncertain measured value
Reasons: sensor fouling, incorrect
application

160

161

Sensor data invalid

Filter change

F

F

On

On

Off

Off

N, T, S, DI,
SC, FLN, T, S

1.

Clean sensor.

2.

Check application.

No calibration data
Reasons: data deleted
1.

Select other data record.

2.

Use factory calibration.

3.

Contact Service Department.

Filter needs to be changed
Reasons: long period of operation,
moisture in sensor

162

Install.factor

M

On

Off

C (ind.)163

Install.factor

M

On

Off

C (ind.)164

Sensor data invalid

M

Off

Off

C

1.

Replace sensor.

2.

Contact Service Department.

Installation factor exceeded/undershot,alarm
Reason: distance between wall andsensor too small (< 15 mm)
1.

Check pipe diameter.

2.

Clean sensor.

3.

Calibrate sensor.

No temperature calibration data
Factory calibration is used

168

Polarization

S

On

Off

C (cond.)1.

Check process.

2.

Check or replace sensor.

Polarization warning
The measured value is corrupted at highconductivity levels.

‣ Use a sensor with a larger cell
constant.

169

170

154

Operating time

Operating time

M

M

On

On

Off

Off

S

S

Operating hours, conc. > 200 mg/l,
measurement can still take place
1.

Replace sensor.

2.

Change monitoring limit.

3.

Disable monitoring.

Operating hours, conc. < 50 mg/l,
measurement can still take place
1.

Replace sensor.

2.

Change monitoring limit.

3.

Disable monitoring.

Endress+Hauser

Memosens

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

No.

171

Message

Lamp change

Factory settings
S 1)

D 2)

F 3)

M

On

Off

Sensortype

Tests or remedial action

N, T, S, SC

Lamp change recommended‣ Contact the Service Department tohave the lamp replaced.

172

Echo lost

F

On

On

U

Echo signal lost173

Sludge level

F

On

On

U

Incorrect separation zone measurement‣ Replace sensor.
174

Turbid. failure

F

On

On

U

Incorrect turbidity measurement‣ Replace sensor.
175

Wiper failure

F

On

On

U

Wiper not working‣ Clean or replace sensor.
176

177

178

179

180

181

182

Endress+Hauser

Operating time

Operating time

Operating time

Operating time

Operating time

Operating time

Operating time

M

M

M

M

M

M

M

On

On

On

On

On

On

On

Off

Off

Off

Off

Off

Off

Off

DI

DI

DI

P

P

O (opt.)O (opt.)Operating hours > 100 nA, measurement
can still take place
1.

Replace sensor.

2.

Change monitoring limit.

3.

Disable monitoring.

Operating hours > 20 nA, measurement
can still take place
1.

Replace sensor.

2.

Change monitoring limit.

3.

Disable monitoring.

Operating hours > 15 °C, measurement
can still take place
1.

Replace sensor.

2.

Change monitoring limit.

3.

Disable monitoring.

Operating hours > 300 mV,
measurement can still take place
1.

Replace sensor.

2.

Change monitoring limit.

3.

Disable monitoring.

Operating hours < -300 mV,
measurement can still take place
1.

Replace sensor.

2.

Change monitoring limit.

3.

Disable monitoring.

Operating hours < 25 µS, measurement
can still take place
1.

Replace sensor.

2.

Change monitoring limit.

3.

Disable monitoring.

Operating hours > 40 µS, measurement
can still take place
1.

Replace sensor.

2.

Change monitoring limit.

3.

Disable monitoring.

155

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

No.

183

184

185

186

187

188

189

190

191

156

Memosens

Message

Operating time

Operating time

Operating time

Operating time

Operating time

Operating time

Operating time

Operating time

Operating time

Factory settings
S 1)

D 2)

F 3)

M

On

Off

M

M

M

M

M

M

M

M

On

On

On

On

On

On

On

On

Off

Off

Off

Off

Off

Off

Off

Off

Sensortype

Tests or remedial action

O (amp.)Operating hours > 10 nA (COS51D),
measurement can still take place

O (amp.)O (amp.)O (amp.)

C

C, O

O

O

O, I, DI

1.

Replace sensor.

2.

Change monitoring limit.

3.

Disable monitoring.

Operating hours > 30 nA (COS22D),
measurement can still take place
1.

Replace sensor.

2.

Change monitoring limit.

3.

Disable monitoring.

Operating hours > 40 nA (COS51D),
measurement can still take place
1.

Replace sensor.

2.

Change monitoring limit.

3.

Disable monitoring.

Operating hours > 160 nA (COS22D),
measurement can still take place
1.

Replace sensor.

2.

Change monitoring limit.

3.

Disable monitoring.

Operating hours > 80 °C, 100 nS/cm,
measurement can still take place
1.

Replace sensor.

2.

Change monitoring limit.

3.

Disable monitoring.

Operating hours < 5 °C, measurement canstill take place
1.

Replace sensor.

2.

Change monitoring limit.

3.

Disable monitoring.

Operating hours > 5 °C, measurement canstill take place
1.

Replace sensor.

2.

Change monitoring limit.

3.

Disable monitoring.

Operating hours > 25 °C, measurement
can still take place
1.

Replace sensor.

2.

Change monitoring limit.

3.

Disable monitoring.

Operating hours > 30 °C, measurement
can still take place
1.

Replace sensor.

2.

Change monitoring limit.

3.

Disable monitoring.

Endress+Hauser

Memosens

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

No.

192

193

194

195

196

197

198

199

Endress+Hauser

Message

Operating time

Operating time

Operating time

Operating time

Operating time

Operating time

Operating time

Operating time

Factory settings
S 1)

D 2)

F 3)

M

On

Off

M

M

M

M

M

M

M

On

On

On

On

On

On

On

Off

Off

Off

Off

Off

Off

Off

Sensortype

Tests or remedial action

O, I

Operating hours > 40 °C, measurement
can still take place

P, C, O

P

C

C

C

C

All except
U1.

Replace sensor.

2.

Change monitoring limit.

3.

Disable monitoring.

Operating hours > 80 °C, measurement
can still take place
1.

Replace sensor.

2.

Change monitoring limit.

3.

Disable monitoring.

Operating hours > 100 °C, measurement
can still take place
1.

Replace sensor.

2.

Change monitoring limit.

3.

Disable monitoring.

Operating hours > 120 °C, measurement
can still take place
1.

Replace sensor.

2.

Change monitoring limit.

3.

Disable monitoring.

Operating hours > 125 °C, measurement
can still take place
1.

Replace sensor.

2.

Change monitoring limit.

3.

Disable monitoring.

Operating hours > 140 °C, measurement
can still take place
1.

Replace sensor.

2.

Change monitoring limit.

3.

Disable monitoring.

Operating hours > 150 °C, measurement
can still take place
1.

Replace sensor.

2.

Change monitoring limit.

3.

Disable monitoring.

The limit set for the total operating hours
has been reached. Measurement can stilltake place.
1.

Replace sensor.

2.

Change monitoring limit.

215

Simulation active

C

On

Off

All, except
FL

Simulation active
End simulation by changing to measuring
mode.

408

Calibration aborted

M

Off

Off

P, C, O, I,
DI

Calibration aborted

157

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

No.

500

Memosens

Message

Sensor calibration

Factory settings
S 1)

D 2)

F 3)

M

On

Off

Sensortype

Tests or remedial action

All, except
SC, FL

Calibration aborted, main measured
value varies
Reasons: sensor too old, sensor
occasionally dry, calibration value notconstant

501

Sensor calibration

M

On

Off

All except
U, SC, FL

1.

Check sensor.

2.

Check calibration solution.

Calibration aborted, temperature
measured value varies
Reasons: sensor too old, sensor
occasionally dry, temperature ofcalibration solution not constant505

Sensor calibration

M

On

Off

P, O, I, DI

1.

Check sensor.

2.

Regulate calibration solution
temperature.

Max. zero point warning, measurement
can still take place
Possible reasons: sensor old or defective,reference blocked, calibration solution
too old or contaminated507

Sensor calibration

M

On

Off

P, O, I, DI

1.

Check or replace sensor.

2.

Check or replace calibration
solution.

3.

Repeat calibration.

Min. zero point warning, measurement
can still take place
Possible reasons: sensor old or defective,reference blocked, calibration solution
too old or contaminated509

Sensor calibration

M

On

Off

P, O, I, DI

1.

Check or replace sensor.

2.

Check or replace calibration
solution.

3.

Repeat calibration.

Min. slope warning, measurement canstill take place
Possible reasons: sensor old or defective,reference blocked, calibration solution
too old or contaminated511

Sensor calibration

M

On

Off

P, O, I, DI

1.

Check or replace sensor.

2.

Check or replace calibration
solution.

3.

Repeat calibration.

Max. slope warning, measurement canstill take place
Possible reasons: sensor old or defective,reference blocked, calibration solution
too old or contaminated

158

1.

Check or replace sensor.

2.

Check or replace calibration
solution.

3.

Repeat calibration.

Endress+Hauser

Memosens

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

No.

513

MessageZero warning

Factory settings
S 1)

D 2)

F 3)

M

On

Off

Sensortype

Tests or remedial action

O (amp.),DI

Zero point warning, measurement canstill take place
Possible reasons: sensor old or defective,reference blocked, calibration solution
too old or contaminated515

Sensor calibration

M

On

Off

P (ISFET)

1.

Check or replace sensor.

2.

Check or replace calibration
solution.

3.

Repeat calibration.

Max. operating point warning,measurement can still take place
Possible reasons: sensor old or defective,reference blocked, calibration solution
too old or contaminated517

Sensor calibration

M

On

Off

P (ISFET)

1.

Check or replace sensor.

2.

Check or replace calibration
solution.

3.

Repeat calibration.

Min. operating point warning,measurement can still take place
Possible reasons: sensor old or defective,reference blocked, calibration solution
too old or contaminated518

Sensor calibration

M

On

Off

P, O, I, DI

1.

Check or replace sensor.

2.

Check or replace calibration
solution.

3.

Repeat calibration.

Delta slope warning, measurement canstill take place
Possible reasons: sensor old or defective,reference blocked, calibration solution
too old or contaminated520

Sensor calibration

M

On

Off

P, O, I, DI

1.

Check or replace sensor.

2.

Check or replace calibration
solution.

3.

Repeat calibration.

Delta zero point warning, measurement
can still take place
Possible reasons: sensor old or defective,reference blocked, calibration solution
too old or contaminatedEndress+Hauser

1.

Check or replace sensor.

2.

Check or replace calibration
solution.

3.

Repeat calibration.

159

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

No.

522

Memosens

Message

Sensor calibration

Factory settings
S 1)

D 2)

F 3)

M

On

Off

Sensortype

Tests or remedial action

P (ISFET)

Delta operating point warning,measurement can still take place
Possible reasons: sensor old or defective,reference blocked, calibration solution
too old or contaminated534Electrolyte warning M

On

Off

DI

1.

Check or replace sensor.

2.

Check or replace calibration
solution.

3.

Repeat calibration.

Electrolyte consumption warning
The limit set for the electrolyte capacity
has been reached.

535

Sensor check

M

On

Off

O (amp.),DI

1.

Replace electrolyte.

2.

Reset consumption counter.

3.

Replace sensor.

Specified number of cap calibrations isreachedMeasurement can still take place.

‣ Replace sensor cap.
550

Process
temperature

S

On

On

C

551

Process
temperature

S

On

On

C

552

Conductivity low

S

On

On

C

553

Conductivity high

S

On

On

C

Process temperature above/below
concentration table• Process value outside specifications• Table incomplete‣ Extend table.
Process concentration above/below
concentration table• Process value outside specifications• Table incomplete‣ Extend table.
554

Concentration low

S

On

On

C

555

Concentration high

S

On

On

C

Process concentration above/below
concentration table• Process value outside specifications• Table incomplete‣ Extend table.
556

Temperature low

S

On

On

C

557

Temperature high

S

On

On

C

Process temperature above/below
compensation table• Process value outside specifications• Table incomplete‣ Extend table.
558

Conductivity low

S

On

On

C

559

Conductivity high

S

On

On

C

Process conductivity above/below
compensation table• Process value outside specifications• Table incomplete‣ Extend table.
560

Conduc.
compensation

S

On

On

C

561

Conduc.
compensation

S

On

On

C

Packageincompatible

C

566

Conductivity compensation above/below
compensation table• Process value outside specifications• Table incomplete‣ Extend table.
On

Off

SC

Incompatible model package‣ Check the configuration of theassigned outputs, measuring settings
and application calibration.

160

Endress+Hauser

Memosens

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

No.

720

722

723

Message

Membrane change

Sensor reference

Sensor reference

Factory settings
S 1)

D 2)

F 3)

M

On

Off

F

M

On

On

On

Off

Sensortype

Tests or remedial action

I

Membrane cap must be replaced

P

I

1.

Replace membrane cap.

2.

Reset timer.

Alarm: Reference membrane impedance
too low.
1.

Check or replace sensor.

2.

Check/correct reference limit
value.

Warning: Reference membrane
impedance too low.
Can continue measuring until the alarm
occurs.

724

725

Sensor reference

Sensor reference

F

M

On

On

On

Off

I

I

1.

Check or replace sensor.

2.

Check/correct reference limit
value.

Alarm: Reference membrane impedance
too high.
1.

Check or replace sensor.

2.

Check/correct reference limit
value.

Warning: Reference membrane
impedance too high.
Can continue measuring until the alarm
occurs.

734

Calibration quality

M

On

Off

O (opt.)1.

Check or replace sensor.

2.

Check/correct reference limit
value.

Warning: The calibration quality index
indicates a substantial change since thelast calibration.
Measurement can still take place.

740

771

Sensor defective

Lamp change

F

F

On

On

On

Off

C (only
four-pinsensor)N, T, S, SC

1.

Repeat calibration.

2.

Check the sensor and replace ifnecessary.

Internal electrode failure
1.

Replace sensor.

2.

Contact Service Department.

Lamp change alarm
Configured operating time has beenreached‣ Contact the Service Department tohave the lamp replaced.

772

Lamp change

M

On

Off

SC

Lamp change warning
Possible reasons: remaining lamp
intensity low, lamp service life was notreset after lamp replacement

Endress+Hauser

1.

Replace lamp and reset lamp
service life.

2.

Contact Service Department.

161

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

No.

773

Memosens

Message

Lamp change

Factory settings
S 1)

D 2)

F 3)

F

On

On

Sensortype

Tests or remedial action

SC

Lamp change alarm
Possible reasons: remaining lamp
intensity low, lamp service life was notreset after lamp replacement

774

832

841

Lamp defective

Temp. range
exceededOperating range

F

S

S

On

Off

Off

On

Off

Off

SC

All except
U, FL

All except
FL1.

Replace lamp and reset lamp
service life.

2.

Contact Service Department.

Possible reasons: cable defective, lamp
defective
1.

Check cable.

2.

Replace lamp.

3.

Contact Service Department.

Outside temperature specification
1.

Check application.

2.

Check temperature sensor.

Process value outside operational range
1.

Check application.

2.

Check sensor.

842

Process value

S

Off

Off

P

Process limit value exceeded/undershot

843

Process value

S

Off

Off

P

Reasons: sensor in air, air pockets inassembly, incorrect flow to sensor, sensor
defective

844

Process value

S

Off

Off

N, T, S

1.

Change process value.

2.

Check electrode system.

3.

Change sensor type.

Measured value outside specified range
Reasons: sensor in air, air pockets inassembly, incorrect flow to sensor, sensor
defective

904

162

Process check
alarm

F

On

On

All except
Phot

1.

Increase process value.

2.

Check electrode system.

3.

Change sensor type.

Stagnating measuring signal
Reasons: sensor in air, sensor fouling,
incorrect flow to sensor, sensor defective
1.

Check electrode system.

2.

Check sensor.

3.

Restart the device.

914

USP/ EP alarm

M

On

Off

C

USP limit values exceeded

915

USP / EP warning

M

On

Off

C

‣ Check process.

934

Process temp. high

S

Off

Off

N, S, U, SC,FL

Process temperature high1.

Do not increase processtemperature.

2.

Check electrode system.

3.

Change sensor type.

Endress+Hauser

Memosens

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

No.

935

942

943

944

Message

Process temp. low

Process value

Process value

Sensor range

Factory settings
S 1)

D 2)

F 3)

S

Off

Off

S

S

S

Off

Off

On

Off

Off

Off

Sensortype

Tests or remedial action

N, S, U, SC,FL

Process temperature low

N, P, UN, P, U

S, U, FL

1.

Do not lower process temperature.

2.

Check electrode system.

3.

Change sensor type.

Process value high1.

Do not increase process value.

2.

Check electrode system.

3.

Change sensor type.

Process value low
1.

Do not decrease process value.

2.

Check electrode system.

3.

Change sensor type.

Measurement at periphery of sensor
dynamic range
Reasons: changes in process to a higher
or lower measuring range

945

946

950

pH value highpH value low

Process
temperature

S

S

F

On

On

On

Off

Off

On

DI

DI

C

1.

Check application.

2.

Use sensor that suits themeasuring range of theapplication.

Warning maximum pH value exceeded1.

Check application.

2.

Check pH sensor.

Warning minimum pH value not reached.
Potential leaking of gaseous chlorine!
1.

Check application.

2.

Check pH sensor.

Concentration table (conductivity)
Process temperature below the lowest
value in the table‣ Extend table.
951

Process
temperature

F

On

On

C

Concentration table (conductivity)
Process temperature above the highest
value in the table‣ Extend table.
952

Conductivity low

F

On

On

C

Concentration table (conductivity)
Process conductivity below the lowest
value in the table‣ Extend table.
953

Conductivity high

F

On

On

C

Concentration table (conductivity)
Process conductivity above the highest
value in the table‣ Extend table.
954

Concentration low

F

On

On

C

Concentration table (conductivity)
Process concentration below the lowest
value in the table‣ Extend table.

Endress+Hauser

163

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

No.

955

Memosens

Message

Concentration highFactory settings
S 1)

D 2)

F 3)

F

On

On

Sensortype

Tests or remedial action

C

Concentration table (conductivity)
Process concentration above the highest
value in the table‣ Extend table.
983

984

985

987

1)
2)
3)

Sensor ISE check

Process temp. highSensor Interface

Calibration
required

F

S

F

M

On

On

On

On

On

On

On

On

I

I

I

I, DI, SC

Electrode or membrane defective
1.

Check or replace electrode.

2.

Check or replace membrane cap.

Temperature outside specification
1.

Check process temperature.

2.

Check electrode system.

Sensor interface error
1.

Check connector.

2.

Check or replace cable.

A calibration is required due to sensor
maintenance.

Status signal
Diagnostic message
Failure current

17.2.3

Configuration options for troubleshooting

The table only lists the diagnostics messages that depend on your settings in the menu.
The path where you can change the settings is specified in the table.
• The sensor type is only indicated if the message only applies to one type of sensor.
• If several types of sensor are affected, the abbreviation ../ is used for the path.

164

No.

Menu/Setup/Inputs/..

102../Extended setup/Calib. settings/Calibration timer

103../Extended setup/Calib. settings/Calibration timer

104../Extended setup/Calib. settings/Calib. expiration time/Alarm limit

105../Extended setup/Calib. settings/Calib. expiration time/Warning limit

108../Extended setup/Diagnostics settings/Sterilizations/Warning limit

109

Oxygen (amp.)/Extended setup/Diagnostics settings/Number of cap sterilizations/Warning limit

111

Disinfection/Extended setup/Diagnostics settings/Limits operating hours cap

122

pH Glass/Extended setup/Diagnostics settings/Glass impedance (SCS)/Lower alarm limit

123

pH Glass/Extended setup/Diagnostics settings/Glass impedance (SCS)/Lower warning limit

124

pH Glass/Extended setup/Diagnostics settings/Glass impedance (SCS)/Upper alarm limit

125

pH Glass/Extended setup/Diagnostics settings/Glass impedance (SCS)/Upper warning limit

126

pH Glass/Extended setup/Diagnostics settings/Sensor condition check127

pH Glass/Extended setup/Diagnostics settings/Sensor condition check145

pH Glass/Extended setup/Diagnostics settings/Sensor condition check

157

Nitrate/Extended setup/Diagnostics settings/Limits operating hours/Filter change

168

Cond c/Extended setup/Diagnostics settings/Polarization compensation

169

SAC/Extended setup/Diagnostics settings/Limits operating hours/Operation > 200 mg/l/Warning
limit

Endress+Hauser

Memosens

Endress+Hauser

Diagnostics and troubleshootingNo.

Menu/Setup/Inputs/..

170

SAC/Extended setup/Diagnostics settings/Limits operating hours/Operation < 50 mg/l/Warning
limit

176

Chlorine/Extended setup/Diagnostics settings/Limits operating hours/Operation > 100 nA/
Warning limit

178

Oxygen (amp.)/Extended setup/Diagnostics settings/Number of cap sterilizations/Alarm limit

179../Extended setup/Diagnostics settings/Limits operating hours/Operation > 300 mV/Warning
limit

180

../Extended setup/Diagnostics settings/Limits operating hours/Operation < -300 mVWarning
limit

181

Oxygen (opt. fixed cable)/Extended setup/Diagnostics settings/Limits operating hours/Operation< 25 µs/Warning limit

182

Oxygen (opt. fixed cable)/Extended setup/Diagnostics settings/Limits operating hours/Operation> 40 µs/Warning limit

183

Oxygen (amp.)/Extended setup/Diagnostics settings/Limits operating hours/Operation > 15 nA/
Warning limit

184

Oxygen (amp.)/Extended setup/Diagnostics settings/Limits operating hours/Operation > 30 nA/
Warning limit

185

Oxygen (amp.)/Extended setup/Diagnostics settings/Limits operating hours/Operation > 50 nA/
Warning limit

186

Oxygen (amp.)/Extended setup/Diagnostics settings/Limits operating hours/Operation > 160 nA/
Warning limit

187

Cond c/Extended setup/Diagnostics settings/Limits operating hours/Operation > 80°C <100nS/cm/Warning limit

188../Extended setup/Diagnostics settings/Limits operating hours/Operation < 5 °C/Warning limit

190../Extended setup/Diagnostics settings/Limits operating hours/Operation > 25 °C/Warning limit

192../Extended setup/Diagnostics settings/Limits operating hours/Operation > 40 °C/Warning limit

193../Extended setup/Diagnostics settings/Limits operating hours/Operation > 80 °C/Warning limit

194../Extended setup/Diagnostics settings/Limits operating hours/Operation > 100 °C/Warning limit

195../Extended setup/Diagnostics settings/Limits operating hours/Operation > 120 °C/Warning limit

196../Extended setup/Diagnostics settings/Limits operating hours/Operation > 125 °C/Warning limit

197../Extended setup/Diagnostics settings/Limits operating hours/Operation > 140 °C/Warning limit

198../Extended setup/Diagnostics settings/Limits operating hours/Operation > 150 °C/Warning limit

199../Extended setup/Diagnostics settings/Limits operating hours/Operating time/Warning limit

505../Extended setup/Diagnostics settings/Zero point/Upper warning limit

507../Extended setup/Diagnostics settings/Zero point/Lower warning limit

509

Oxygen (amp.)/Extended setup/Diagnostics settings/Slope/Lower warning limit

511

Oxygen (amp.)/Extended setup/Diagnostics settings/Slope/Upper warning limit

513

Oxygen (amp.)/Extended setup/Diagnostics settings/Zero point/Warning limit

515

pH ISFET/Extended setup/Diagnostics settings/Operating point/Upper warning limit

517

pH ISFET/Extended setup/Diagnostics settings/Operating point/Lower warning limit

518../Extended setup/Diagnostics settings/Delta slope/Warning limit

520../Extended setup/Diagnostics settings/Delta zero point/Warning limit

522

pH ISFET/Extended setup/Diagnostics settings/Delta operating point/Warning limit

535

Chlorine/Extended setup/Diagnostics settings/Number of calibrations cap/Warning limit

842

ORP/Extended setup/Diagnostics settings/ORP meas. value/Upper alarm limit

843

ORP/Extended setup/Diagnostics settings/ORP meas. value/Lower alarm limit

904../Extended setup/Diagnostics settings/Process check system

165

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Memosens

No.

Menu/Setup/Inputs/..

942

ORP/Extended setup/Diagnostics settings/ORP meas. value/Upper warning limit

943

ORP/Extended setup/Diagnostics settings/ORP meas. value/Lower warning limit

17.3

Sensor information‣ Select the channel you want from the list of channels.
Information in the following categories is displayed:• Extreme values
Extreme conditions to which the sensor was previously exposed, e. g. min./max.
temperatures 1)• Operating time
Operating time of the sensor under defined extreme conditions• Calibration information
Calibration data of the last calibration• Sensor specifications
Measuring range limits for main measured value and temperature• General information
Information on sensor identification
The specific data that are displayed depends on what sensor is connected.

1)

166

Not available for all sensor types.

Endress+Hauser

Memosens

Maintenance

18

Maintenance

18.1

Cleaning digital sensors

LCAUTION
Programs not switched off during maintenance activities.
Risk of injury due to medium or cleaning agent!
‣ Quit any programs that are active.
‣ Switch to the service mode.
‣ If testing the cleaning function while cleaning is in progress, wear protective clothing,goggles and gloves or take other suitable measures to protect yourself.
Replacing the sensor while ensuring measuring point availability
If an error occurs or the maintenance schedule stipulates that the sensor has to be
replaced, use a new sensor, or a sensor that has been precalibrated in the laboratory.
• A sensor is calibrated in the laboratory under optimum external conditions, thereby
ensuring better quality of measurement.
• You must perform onsite calibration if you use a sensor that is not precalibrated.
1.

Pay attention to the safety instructions regarding the removal of the sensor that areprovided in the Operating Instructions for the sensor.

2.

Remove the sensor that requires maintenance.

3.

Install the new sensor.
 The sensor data are automatically accepted by the transmitter. A release code is
not required.
Measurement is resumed.

4.

Take the used sensor back to the laboratory.
 In the laboratory get the sensor ready for reuse while ensuring the availability ofthe measuring point.

Prepare the sensor for reuse
1.

Clean sensor.
 For this purpose, use the cleaning agent specified in the sensor manual.

2.

Inspect the sensor for cracks or other damage.

3.

If no damage is found, regenerate the sensor. Where necessary, store the sensor in aregeneration solution (→ sensor manual).

4.

Recalibrate the sensor for reuse.

18.2

Cleaning assemblies

Refer to the assembly operating instructions for information on servicing andtroubleshooting the assembly. The assembly operating manual describes theprocedure for mounting and disassembling the assembly, replacing the sensors andseals, and contains information on the material resistance properties, as well as onspare parts and accessories.

Endress+Hauser

167

Maintenance

Memosens

18.3

Performing a decade resistance test on digital
inductive conductivity sensors

The inductive sensor cannot be simulated.
However, the overall system comprising the transmitter and inductive sensor can be tested
using equivalent resistors. Note the cell constant k (e.g. knominal = 1.98 cm-1 for CLS50D,
knominal = 6.3 cm-1 for CLS54D).
For accurate simulation, the actual cell constant used must be used to calculate the display
value.
The formula for calculation also depends on the type of sensor:• CLS50D: conductivity reading [mS/cm] = k[cm-1] ⋅1/R[kΩ]• CLS54D: conductivity reading [mS/cm] = k[cm-1] ⋅1/R[kΩ] ⋅ 1.21
Simulation with CLS50D at 25 °C (77 °F):
Simulation resistance R

Default cell constant k

Conductivity reading2Ω

1.98 cm-1

990 mS/cm

10 Ω

1.98 cm-1

198 mS/cm

100 Ω

1.98 cm-1

19.8 mS/cm

1 kΩ

1.98 cm-1

1.98 mS/cm

Simulation resistance R

Default cell constant k

Conductivity reading10 Ω

6.3 cm-1

520 mS/cm

26 Ω

6.3 cm-1

200 mS/cm

100 Ω

6.3 cm-1

52 mS/cm

260 Ω

6.3 cm-1

20 mS/cm

2.6 kΩ

6.3 cm-1

2 mS/cm

26 kΩ

6.3 cm-1

200 μS/cm

52 kΩ

6.3 cm-1

100 μS/cm

Simulation with CLS54D at 25 °C (77 °F):

Conductivity simulation
Guide a suitable cable through the opening of the sensor (sensor coil). Then connect thecable to a decade resistor.

168

Endress+Hauser

Memosens

Calibration

19

Calibration• Sensors with Memosens protocol are calibrated at the factory.
• Users must decide whether the process conditions present require calibration duringinitial commissioning.
• Additional calibration is not required in many standard applications.

‣ Calibrate sensors at sensible intervals depending on the process.

19.1

Definitions

Calibration(according to DIN 1319)
A calibration is defined as an operation to establish the relationship between themeasured value or expected value of the output variable and the related true or correct
value of the measured variable (input variable) for a measuring system under specified
conditions.
A calibration does not alter the performance of the measuring device.
Adjustment
An adjustment corrects the value displayed by a measuring device, in other words themeasured/displayed value (the actual value) is corrected so that the reading agrees withthe correct, set value.
The value determined during calibration is used to calculate the correct measured value
and saved in the sensor.

19.2

Terminology

19.2.1

Zero point and slope

Using a mathematical function, the transmitter converts the input signal of the sensor y(raw measured value) to the measured value x. In many cases, this function is a simple
linear function with the form y = a + b . x.
The linear element "a" is usually equivalent to the zero point and the factor "b" is the slopeof the line and is often known as the sensor slope.
y

y2
b=

y2-y1
x2-x1

y1

a
x1

Endress+Hauser

x2

x

169

Calibration

Memosens

The Nernst equation, which is used to calculate the pH value, is a typical linear
relationship:
Ui = U0 - 2.303 RT pH
F

pH = -lg(aH+), aH+ ... activity of the hydrogen ions
Ui ... raw measured value in mV
U0 ... zero point (=voltage at pH 7)
R ... universal gas constant (8.3143 J/molK)
T ... temperature [K]F ... Faraday constant (26.803 Ah/mol)
The slope of the Nernst equation (-2.303RT/F) is known as the Nernst factor and has
the value -59.16 mV/pH at 25 °C (298 K).

19.2.2

Delta slope

The device determines the difference in the slope between the calibration currently valid
and the last calibration. Depending on the sensor type, this difference is an indicator of thecondition of the sensor. The smaller the slope, the less sensitive the measurement, and theaccuracy deteriorates particularly in the low measuring range.
Depending on the operating conditions, users can define limit values that represent thestill tolerable absolute values of the slope and/or slope differentials. If the limit values are
exceeded, maintenance must be performed on the sensor at the very least. The sensor
must be replaced if the insensitivity problems persist after maintenance has been carried
out.
y

Db

x

a

 31
BU
RD
Δb

Delta slope

Last calibration
Current calibration
Delta slope

19.2.3

Delta zero point

The device determines the difference between the zero points or operating points (ISFET
sensor) of the last and second-last calibration. A shift in the zero point or operating point(= offset) does not alter the sensitivity of the measurement. However, if the offset is notcorrected this can falsify the measured value.

170

Endress+Hauser

Memosens

Calibration

As with the slope, you can also define and monitor limit values for the offset. If the limit
values are exceeded, this means that maintenance must be performed on the sensor. For
example, you may have to eliminate a blockage in the reference for the pH sensor.
y

Da

a1

 32
a1
a2
Δa

a2

x

Delta zero point/operating point

Zero point/operating point, penultimate
calibration
Zero point/operating point, last calibration
Delta zero point/operating point

19.3

Calibration instructions

The following rules apply for all parameters:
1.

Calibrate in a way that reflects conditions in the process.

• If the process medium is constantly moving, also move the calibration solution
accordingly (e.g. use a magnetic stirrer if calibrating in the laboratory).
• If your medium is relatively stationary, calibrate in solutions that are also stationary.
2.

Always make sure that the samples are homogeneous for reference measurements,
sample calibration etc.

3.

Avoid changes in the medium samples resulting from ongoing biological activity.
Example: Use outlet water instead of a sample from the aeration basin for nitratecalibration.

4.

Use the same menu settings as those in the process to perform the calibration.
Example: If you automatically compensate for the temperature effect during pH
measurement, switch on automatic temperature compensation for the calibrationalso.
It is advisable to perform the laboratory calibration using the "Memobase Plus"(→  222)database software. This improves the availability of your measuring points
and all the calibration and sensor data records are stored securely in the database.

19.4

pH sensors

19.4.1

Calibration intervals

The service life of a pH glass electrode is limited. This is due, in part, to the deterioration
and aging of the pH-sensitive membrane glass. This aging causes the gel-like layer tochange and become thicker over time.

Endress+Hauser

171

Calibration

Memosens

Symptoms of aging include:• Higher membrane resistance• Slow response• Decrease in the slope
A change in the reference system (e.g. due to contamination, i.e. unwanted redox
reactions at the reference electrode) or electrolyte solution dissolving away in thereference half cell can change the reference potential, which, in turn, causes a zero point
shift in the measuring electrode.
To ensure a high level of accuracy, it is important to readjust the pH sensors at set
intervals.
The calibration interval depends heavily on the area of application of the sensor, as well as
the required level of accuracy and reproducibility. The calibration interval can vary
between daily and once every few months.
Defining the calibration interval for the process1.

Check sensor using a buffer solution, e.g. pH 7.
 Proceed as specified in Step 2 only if the value deviates from the set point. No
calibration/adjustment is necessary if the value is within the defined deviation
tolerance range (→ Technical Information for the sensor).

2.

Calibrate and adjust the sensor.

3.

After 24 hours, check again with the buffer solution.
 a) If the deviation is within the permitted tolerance range, increase the test
interval by doubling it, for example.
b) If the deviation is larger, you must shorten the interval.

4.

Continue to proceed as defined in Steps 2 and 3 until you have identified theappropriate interval for your sensor.

Monitoring the calibration‣ Define the limit values for monitoring the slope and zero point differences: Menu/

Setup/Inputs/pH/Extended setup/Diagnostics settings/Delta slope or Delta zero
point (Delta operating point).
 These limit values depend on the process and must be determined by empiricalmeans.

During calibration a diagnostics message is displayed if the defined warning limits havebeen exceeded. You then have to service the sensor, e.g. by cleaning the sensor orreference, or by regenerating the glass membrane.
You have to replace the sensor if warning messages continue to be displayed despite themaintenance measure.
Monitoring the calibration interval
You can also allow the device to monitor the calibration intervals for your process.

‣ Menu/Setup/Inputs/pH/Extended setup/Calib. settings/Calib. expiration time Set time limits to specify how long a calibration should be regarded as valid.
Memosens sensors save all the calibration data. In this way it is easy to see
whether the last calibration took place in the specified timeframe and is therefore
still valid. This is particularly advantageous when working with precalibrated
sensors.

172

Endress+Hauser

Memosens

Calibration

19.4.2

Types of calibration

The following types of calibration are possible:• Two-point calibration
With calibration buffers• One-point calibration• Entry of an offset or a reference value• Sample calibration with laboratory comparative value• Data entry
Entry of the zero point, slope and temperature• Temperature adjustment by entering a reference value
In the case of a combined sensor (CPS16E/CPS76E/CPS96E), you must calibrate boththe pH and the ORP electrode to obtain reliable rH values.

19.4.3Two-point calibration

Applications and requirements
Two-point calibration is the preferred method for pH sensors, particularly in the following
applications:• Municipal and industrial wastewater• Natural waters and drinking water• Boiler feedwater and condensates• Beverages
Calibrating with buffers with pH 7.0 and 4.0 is recommended for most applications.
Alkaline buffer solutions have the disadvantage that carbon dioxide from the air can alter
the pH value of the buffer on the long term. If calibrating with alkaline buffers it is best to
do so in closed systems, such as flow assemblies or retractable assemblies with a rinsechamber, to minimize the effect of air.
You use calibration buffers to perform two-point calibration. The quality buffers
supplied by Endress+Hauser are certified and measured in an accredited laboratory.
The accreditation (DAR registration number "DKD-K-52701") confirms that the actual
values and the maximum deviations are correct and traceable.
With calibration buffers
To calibrate the sensor, remove it from the medium and calibrate it in the laboratory. Since
Memosens sensors save the data, you can always work with "precalibrated" sensors and do
not have to stop monitoring the process to perform a calibration.

Endress+Hauser

1.

Open the menu: CAL/pH Glass or pH ISFET/2-pnt. calibration.

2.

Follow the instructions of the software.

3.

After you have immersed the sensor in the first buffer and the measured value hasstabilized, press OK.
 The system starts calculating the measured value for the first buffer. Once thestability criterion is met, the measured value is displayed in mV.

4.

Continue to follow the instructions.

5.

After you have immersed the sensor in the second buffer and the measured value
has stabilized, press OK.
 The system starts calculating the measured value for the second buffer. Once thestability criterion is met, the measured values of the two buffers and thecalculated values for the slope and zero point are displayed.

6.

Respond to the prompt to accept the calibration data for adjustment.

7.

Return the sensor to the medium and press OK again.
 This deactivates the hold and the system starts measuring again.

173

Calibration

Memosens

You can cancel the calibration any time by pressing ESC. No data are then used to adjust
the sensor.
Only use calibration buffers once.

19.4.4

One-point calibration

Applications and requirements
Single-point calibration is particularly useful if the deviation of the pH value from areference value, and not the absolute pH value itself, is of interest to the user. Applications
for single-point calibration include:• Process control• Quality assurance
Fluctuations in the process value should not exceed ±0.5 pH and the process temperaturemust remain relatively constant. As the measuring range is limited as a result, it is possible
to set the slope to -59 mV/pH (at 25 °C). To adjust the sensor, you enter an offset or areference value.
Alternatively, you can also use the Sample calibration. Here, you take a sample from theprocess and determine the pH value in the laboratory. In the case of the laboratory sample,
you must make sure that the pH value is determined at the process temperature.
Entering a reference value
You enter a previously determined reference measured value. This then shifts thecalibration function along the X-axis (pH). The slope is not affected.
1.

Open the menu: CAL/pH Glass or pH ISFET/1-pnt. calibration.

2.

Reference: Enter previously determined value.

3.

Accept the calibration data and then return to the measuring mode.

You can cancel the calibration any time by pressing ESC. No data are then used to adjust
the sensor.
Sample calibration
With this type of calibration, you take a sample of the medium and determine its pH value(at process temperature) in the laboratory. You then use this laboratory value to adjust thesensor. This does not change the slope of the calibration function.
1.

Open the menu: CAL/pH Glass or pH ISFET/Sample calibration.

2.

Follow the instructions of the software.

3.

After you have taken the sample: Press OK.
 The following message appears on the display:

Sample calibration.

4.

After you have determined the laboratory value, press the navigation button.
 A line appears where you can enter the laboratory value.

5.

Enter the laboratory measured value here and then go to Continue.
 The measured value, laboratory value and the resulting offset (zero point for ISE)
are displayed.

6.

Accept the calibration data and then return to the measuring mode.

You can cancel the calibration any time by pressing ESC. No data are then used to adjust
the sensor.

174

Endress+Hauser

Memosens

Calibration

19.4.5

Data entry

You enter the slope, zero point and temperature manually. The function for determining
the pH value is calculated from these values. Thus, the data entry returns the same result
as two-point calibration.
1.

Determine the slope, zero point and temperature in an alternative way (reference
measurement).

2.

Open the menu: CAL/pH Glass or pH ISFET/Numeric input.
 The slope, zero point and temperature are shown on the display.

3.

Select each value one after the other and then enter the desired numerical value.
 Since you are entering all the variables for the Nernst equation directly, no
additional information is displayed by the software.

4.

Respond to the prompt to accept the calibration data for adjustment by selecting OK.

You can cancel the calibration any time by pressing ESC. No data are then used to adjust
the sensor.

19.4.6

Temperature adjustment

1.

Determine the temperature of the process medium with an alternative measurement,such as a precision thermometer.

2.

Open the menu: CAL/<Sensor type>/Temperature adjustment.

3.

Leave the sensor in the process medium and keep clicking OK until temperature
measurement is started via the sensor.

4.

Enter the reference temperature from the alternative measurement. You can either
enter the absolute value or an offset for this purpose.

5.

Then keep clicking OK until the new data have been accepted.
 This completes the temperature adjustment.

19.4.7

Error messages when performing the calibration

Display message

Causes and possible remedial measures

The calibration is invalid.
Do you want to start a new calibration?

The calibration buffer is contaminated or the pH value
is no longer within the permitted limits. As a result,the permitted measured value deviation is exceeded.

Slope out of tolerance.
Zeropoint out of tolerance.
Sample concentration too low.
The stability criterion is not fulfilled.
Do you want to repeat the last step?

Calibration aborted.
Please clean sensor before
immersing in process medium.
(Hold will be disabled)

Endress+Hauser

1.

Check the expiry date2.

Use a fresh buffer

The measured value or temperature is not stable. As aresult, the stability criterion is not met.
1.

Keep the temperature constant duringcalibration.

2.

Replace the buffer.

3.

Sensor old or contaminated. Clean orregenerate.

4.

Adjust stability criteria →  15.

The user has aborted the calibration.

175

Calibration

Memosens

19.5

ORP sensors

19.5.1

Types of calibration

The following types of calibration are possible:• Two-point calibration with medium samples(Main value = ORP %)• Single-point calibration with calibration buffer(Main value = ORP mV)• Entry of data for an offset(Main value = ORP mV)• Temperature adjustment by entering a reference value

19.5.2One-point calibration

The buffers contain ORP pairs with a high exchange current density. Such buffers have theadvantage of higher accuracy levels, better reproducibility and faster measurement
response times.
Temperature compensation does not take place when measuring the ORP since thethermal behavior of the medium is not known. However, the temperature is indicated withthe measurement result and for this reason it makes sense to adjust the temperature
sensor at process-dependent intervals.
Single-point calibration with calibration buffers
With this type of calibration, you work with calibration buffers, e.g. ORP buffers fromEndress+Hauser. For this purpose, you remove the sensor from the medium and calibrate
it in the laboratory. Since Memosens sensors save the data, you can always work with"precalibrated" sensors and do not have to stop monitoring the process for extended periods
to perform a calibration (does not apply to ISE).
1.

Open the menu: CAL/ORP/1-pnt. calibration.

2.

Follow the instructions of the software.

3.

Accept the calibration data and then return to the measuring mode.

You can cancel the calibration any time by pressing ESC. No data are then used to adjust
the sensor.

19.5.3

Numeric input (offset)

Entry of data for an offset
You enter the offset directly with this type of calibration. Use the measured value of areference measurement, for example, to determine the offset.
1.

Open the menu: CAL/ORP/Numeric input (offset).
 Display Offset.

2.

Decide whether you wish to retain the current value or enter a new value.

3.

Change value or retain value.

4.

Accept the calibration data and then return to the measuring mode.

You can cancel the calibration any time by pressing ESC. No data are then used to adjust
the sensor.

19.5.4Two-point calibration (only ORP %)You must adapt the sensor to your process to obtain useful ORP % values. This is achieved
through two-point calibration. The two calibration points are characteristic of the mostimportant states your medium can assume in the process.
176

Endress+Hauser

Memosens

Calibration

You require two different compositions of your medium that represent the characteristic
limits of your process (e.g. 20% and 80% value). The absolute value in mV is not relevant
for the ORP % measurement.
1.

Open the menu: CAL/ORP/2-pnt. calibration.

2.

Follow the instructions of the software.

3.

Determine ORP of medium for the first calibration point.

4.

Specify which % value this point represents.

5.

Continue.

6.

Follow the instructions of the software.

7.

Determine ORP of medium for the second calibration point.

8.

Specify which % value this point represents.

9.

Accept the calibration data and then return to the measuring mode.

You can cancel the calibration any time by pressing ESC. No data are then used to adjust
the sensor.

19.5.5Temperature adjustment

1.

Determine the temperature of the process medium with an alternative measurement,such as a precision thermometer.

2.

Open the menu: CAL/<Sensor type>/Temperature adjustment.

3.

Leave the sensor in the process medium and keep clicking OK until temperature
measurement is started via the sensor.

4.

Enter the reference temperature from the alternative measurement. You can either
enter the absolute value or an offset for this purpose.

5.

Then keep clicking OK until the new data have been accepted.
 This completes the temperature adjustment.

19.5.6

Error messages when performing the calibration

Display message

Causes and possible remedial measures

The calibration is invalid.
Do you want to start a new calibration?

The calibration buffer is contaminated or the ORP
potential is no longer within the permitted limits. As aresult, the permitted measured value deviation isexceeded.

The stability criterion is not fulfilled.
Do you want to repeat the last step?

Calibration aborted.
Please clean sensor before
immersing in process medium.
(Hold will be disabled)

Endress+Hauser

1.

Check the expiry date2.

Use a fresh buffer

The measured value is not stable. As a result, thestability criterion is not met.
1.

Replace the buffer.

2.

Sensor old or contaminated. Clean orregenerate.

3.

Adjust stability criteria →  15.

The user has aborted the calibration.

177

Calibration

Memosens

19.6

Conductivity sensors

19.6.1

Types of calibration

The following types of calibration are possible:• Cell constant with calibration solution• Installation factor(Only inductive sensors and CLS82D)• Air set (residual coupling)(Only inductive sensors)• Temperature adjustment by entering a reference value

19.6.2Cell constant

A conductivity measuring system is generally calibrated in such a way that the exact cell
constant is determined or checked using suitable calibration solutions.
This process is described in the standards EN 27888 and ASTM D 1125, for example, andthe method for producing a number of calibration solutions is explained.
Another alternative is to purchase international calibration standards from national
measurement institutes. This is particularly important in the pharmaceutical industry,
which requires a calibration to be traced to internationally recognized standards. To
calibrate its testing units, the manufacturer, uses special reference material (SRM) fromthe US National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST).
Calibrating the cell constant
You enter a reference value for the conductivity with this type of calibration. In addition,
you specify how the system should compensate for the influence of temperature. In the
result, the device calculates a new cell constant for the sensor.
1.

Open the menu: CAL/Cond c or Cond i or Cond c 4-pol/Cell constant.

2.

Make the settings:

CAL/Cond c or Cond i or Cond c 4-pol/Cell constant
Function

Options

Info

Current cell const.

Read only

Value currently saved in the sensor

Temp. compensation

Selection
• Yes
• No

As an alternative to the compensatedconductivity (Yes) you can also determine thecell constant by calibrating the uncompensatedconductivity (No).

Factory setting
Yes
Coeff. Alpha0.00 to 20.00 %/K

Temp. compensation = Yes

Factory setting
Depends on the sensor

The alpha coefficients and alpha reference
temperatures of Endress+Hauser can be found in
the documentation supplied with the calibration
solutions.

Alpha ref. temp.

-5.0 to 100.0 °C(23.0 to 212.0 °F)‣ Enter the appropriate values.

Temp. compensation = Yes

Factory setting
25.0 °C (77.0 °F)
Temp. source

Selection• Sensor• Manual
Factory setting
Sensor

178

Decide how you want to compensate the medium
temperature:• Automatically using the temperature sensor
of your sensor• Manually by entering the medium
temperature

Endress+Hauser

Memosens

Calibration

CAL/Cond c or Cond i or Cond c 4-pol/Cell constant
Function

Options

Info

Medium temperature-50.0 to 250.0 °C(-58.0 to 482.0 °F)‣ Enter the temperature of your medium.

Temp. source = Manual

Factory setting
25.0 °C (77.0 °F)
Conductivity ref.

0.000 to 2000000 µS/cm
Factory setting
0.000 µS/cm

Temp. compensation = Yes‣ Enter the compensated conductivity of yourcalibration solution here.
Temp. compensation = No

‣ Enter the uncompensated conductivity ofyour calibration solution here.

3.

Start calibration.

4.

Follow the instructions.

5.

Decide whether to use the calibration data captured, or to abort or repeat thecalibration.

After calibration, the transmitter automatically switches back to the measuring mode andyour measuring point is now ready for operation.

19.6.3Air set (residual coupling, only inductive sensors)

While the calibration line goes through zero for physical reasons in the case of conductive
sensors (a current flow of 0 corresponds to a conductivity of 0), when working withinductive sensors, the residual coupling between the primary coil (transmitter coil) andsecondary coil (receiver coil) must be taken into account or compensated for. The residual
coupling is not only caused by the direct magnetic coupling of the coils but also by
crosstalk in the supply cables. For this reason, the process of commissioning an inductive
sensor always starts with an "air set". Here, the sensor is connected to the transmitter withthe cables provided, held in air in a dry state (zero conductivity) and an air set calibrationis performed at the transmitter.
The cell constant is then determined using a precise calibration solution, as is the casewith conductive sensors.
Sensors with a Memosens protocol are already calibrated at the factory and theirresidual coupling generally does not have to be adjusted on site.

19.6.4

Installation factor (only inductive conductivity sensors and
CLS82D)

In confined installation conditions, the conductivity measurement is affected by the pipe
walls. The installation factor compensates for this effect. The transmitter corrects the cell
constant by multiplying by the installation factor. The value of the installation factor
depends on the diameter and the conductivity of the pipe nozzle as well as the sensor's
distance to the wall.
If there is a sufficient distance between the wall and the sensor, the installation factor fdoes not have to be taken into consideration (f = 1.00). If the distance to the wall issmaller, the installation factor increases for electrically insulating pipes (f > 1) anddecreases for electrically conductive pipes (f < 1).
There are two ways to compensate the installation factor:• Determine the installation factor using calibration solutions• Enter a known installation factor
Calibrating the installation factor
1.
Endress+Hauser

Open the menu: CAL/Cond i or Cond c 4-pol/Inst. factor/Calibration.
179

Calibration

Memosens

2.

Make the settings:

CAL/Cond i or Cond c 4-pol/Inst. factor/Calibration
Function

Options

Info

Current cell const.

Read only

Value currently saved in the sensor

Temp. compensation

Selection
• Yes
• No

As an alternative to the compensatedconductivity (Yes) you can also determine thecell constant by calibrating the uncompensatedconductivity (No).

Factory setting
Yes
Coeff. Alpha0.00 to 20.00 %/K

Temp. compensation = Yes

Factory setting
Depends on the sensor

The alpha coefficients and alpha reference
temperatures of Endress+Hauser can be found in
the documentation supplied with the calibration
solutions.

Alpha ref. temp.

-5.0 to 100.0 °C(23.0 to 212.0 °F)‣ Enter the appropriate values.

Temp. compensation = Yes

Factory setting
25.0 °C (77.0 °F)
Temp. source

Selection• Sensor• Manual
Factory setting
SensorMedium temperatureTemp. source = Manual-50.0 to 250.0 °C(-58.0 to 482.0 °F)

Decide how you want to compensate the medium
temperature:• Automatically using the temperature sensor
of your sensor• Manually by entering the medium
temperature‣ Enter the temperature of your medium.

Factory setting
25.0 °C (77.0 °F)
Conductivity ref.

0.000 to 2000000 µS/cm
Factory setting
0.000 µS/cm

Temp. compensation = Yes‣ Enter the compensated conductivity of yourcalibration solution here.
Temp. compensation = No
‣ Enter the uncompensated conductivity ofyour calibration solution here.

3.

Start calibration.

4.

Follow the instructions.

5.

Decide whether to use the calibration data captured, or to abort or repeat thecalibration.

You can cancel the calibration any time by pressing ESC. No data are then used to adjust
the sensor.
Entering the installation factor
1.

Open the menu: CAL/Cond i or Cond c 4-pol/Inst. factor/Entry.
 The installation factor currently used is displayed.

2.

New inst. factor: Enter the installation factor which you took from the Operating
Instructions for your sensor, for example.

3.
4.

Start calibration.
Decide whether to use the calibration data captured, or to abort or repeat thecalibration.

You can cancel the calibration any time by pressing ESC. No data are then used to adjust
the sensor.

180

Endress+Hauser

Memosens

Calibration

19.6.5Temperature adjustment

1.

Determine the temperature of the process medium with an alternative measurement,such as a precision thermometer.

2.

Open the menu: CAL/Cond c or Cond i or Cond c 4-pol/Temperature adjustment.
 The offset (of the last calibration) and the actual temperature value are shown on
the display.

3.

Mode: Decide on the mode of temperature adjustment.

• 1-point calibration
You measure the medium temperature with a reference measurement and use this value
to adjust the temperature sensor.
• 2-point calibration
You use two samples of different temperatures.
• TableAdjustment based on data entries. You enter value pairs comprising the measured
temperature of the temperature sensor and the related reference temperature. The
temperature function is calculated from these value pairs. Press SAVE once you haveentered all the points and select OK.
4.

Follow the instructions of the software.

5.

Accept the calibration data and then return to the measuring mode.

You can cancel the calibration any time by pressing ESC. No data are then used to adjust
the sensor.

19.6.6

Error messages when performing the calibration

Display message

Causes and possible remedial measures

The calibration is invalid.
Do you want to start a new calibration?

Calibration solution exhausted. As a result, thepermitted measured value deviation is exceeded.

Currently no calibration possible
due to sensor failure.

Calibration aborted.
Please clean sensor before
immersing in process medium.
(Hold will be disabled)

1.

Check the expiry date2.

Use a fresh calibration solution

Sensor communication problem
1.

Replace sensor.

2.

Contact the Service Department.

The user has aborted the calibration.

19.7

Oxygen sensors

19.7.1Signal generation with amperometric sensors

The amperometric oxygen sensor is based on the reduction of oxygen at the noble metal
cathode of a system filled with electrolyte.
Oxygen coming from the medium (e.g. air) diffuses through a membrane into theelectrolyte film and is reduced at the cathode. This means that there is practically nomolecular oxygen at the cathode. Intense oxygen consumption takes place here and theoxygen partial pressure approaches zero.
The oxygen partial pressure of the medium is present in front of the membrane. Thispressure is approx. 209 hPa in water vapor-saturated air under reference conditions (1013hPa, 20°C). The partial pressure acts as the driving force to transport oxygen molecules
Endress+Hauser

181

Calibration

Memosens

through the membrane. The membrane acts as a diffusion barrier, i.e. oxygen molecules
permeate the membrane depending on the difference in partial pressure.
In summary, an amperometric oxygen sensor has two important features:• The rate of oxygen consumption at the cathode is extremely high. Oxygen permeates themembrane depending on the external oxygen partial pressure (the internal pressure ispractically zero) ‐ the external oxygen partial pressure is the driving force.
• Due to the diffusion-inhibiting properties of the membrane, the flow of oxygen throughthe membrane and thus the electric signal current subsequently generated is in direct
proportion to the oxygen partial pressure in front of the membrane, i.e. the sensor
provides a linear signal current that depends on the oxygen partial pressure.
→ The amperometric oxygen sensor is therefore an oxygen partial pressure sensor.

19.7.2Signal generation with optical sensors

The optical oxygen sensor is based on the principle of fluorescence quenching.
The basic concept is as follows:
The medium to be measured and the sensor optics are separated by an area that issensitive to oxygen, known as the sensor spot.
Towards the process this sensor spot is protected against pressure, temperature and otherinfluences of medium by a black covering that is permeable to oxygen. This covering
therefore allows the oxygen that is present in the medium to diffuse into the sensor spot,
based on the equilibrium of the oxygen partial pressure in the medium.
The sensor optics direct light at a constant wavelength A or color A onto the sensor spot
containing a fluorescent dye (stimulation). As a result of this stimulation, the molecules ofthe dye emit a light at a constant wavelength B or color B (response).
The oxygen in the medium and therefore in the sensor spot changes the fluorescence
properties of the dye. This process is known as quenching.
The relation between the stimulation and response therefore depends on the oxygen
partial pressure in the medium, and is used in the sensor for measurement purposes. Froma technical perspective, the concentration of oxygen is often calculated based on therelation of the signals over time (also known as the phase angle).

19.7.3

Calibration intervals

Specifying the intervals
If you want to calibrate the sensor intermittently for a special application and/or on
account of a special type of installation, you can calculate the intervals using the following
method:1.

Remove the sensor from the medium.

2.

Clean the outside of the sensor with a damp cloth.

3.

Then dry the sensor diaphragm carefully with a soft paper towel for example.

4.

NOTICE
Incorrect measurements caused by atmospheric influences!
‣ Protect the sensor against external influences such as sunlight and wind.
After 20 minutes (amperometric sensors) or 10 minutes (optical sensors), measure
the oxygen saturation index in air.

5.

Decide using the results:a) Amperometric sensor: Measured value is not 102 ± 2 %SAT (COS51D) or 100 ± 2 %SAT
(COS22D) → Calibrate sensor.
Optical sensor: Measured value is not 100 ± 2 %SAT → Calibrate sensor.
b) If the values are within the specified interval, the sensor does not need to be calibrated.
The time period between inspections can be extended.
182

Endress+Hauser

Memosens

Calibration

6.

Repeat the steps specified after two, four or eight months to determine the optimum
calibration interval for your sensor.

Monitoring the calibration‣ Determine the imit values for monitoring slope and zero point differentials: Menu/
Setup/Inputs/Oxygen (amp.) or Oxygen (opt.)/Extended setup/Diagnostics
settings/Delta slope or Delta zero point (amperometric sensors or COS61D) or
Calibration quality index (COS81D).
 These limit values depend on the process and must be determined by empiricalmeans.

During calibration a diagnostics message is displayed if the defined warning limits havebeen exceeded. You then have to service the sensor by cleaning the sensor or reference, orby regenerating the glass membrane.
You have to replace the sensor if warning messages continue to be displayed despite themaintenance measure.
Monitoring the calibration interval
Once you have established the calibration intervals for your process, you can also have thedevice monitor them.

‣ Menu/Setup/Inputs/Oxygen (amp.) or Oxygen (opt.)/Extended setup/Calib.

settings/Calib. expiration time Set time limits to specify how long a calibration should be regarded as valid.
Memosens sensors save all the calibration data. In this way it is easy to see
whether the last calibration took place in the specified timeframe and is therefore
still valid. This is particularly advantageous when working with precalibrated
sensors.

19.7.4

Types of calibration

The following types of calibration are possible:• Zero point• 1-point cal. (single-point calibration in nitrogen or COY8 zero-point gel)
• Numeric input• Slope (amperometric sensors and COS61D) or Point at oxygen (COS81D)• Air 100% rh (air, water vapor-saturated)• H2O air-saturated (air-saturated water)• Air variable (air, variable)• Test gas calibration (only COS81D)• Numeric input• Sample calibration• Slope (only amperometric sensors and COS61D)• Point at oxygen (only COS81D)• Zero point (only amperometric sensors)• Fermenter scaling (only COS81D)• Temperature adjustment
Furthermore, the calibration menu for amperometric sensors and COS81D contains two
additional functions to reset the sensor's internal counters:• Change electrolyte (only amperometric sensors)• Change sensor cap (amperometric sensors and COS81D)• Reset to factory calibration (only COS81D)

19.7.5

Slope calibration (COS22D, COS51D, COS61D) or point at
oxygen (COS81D)In the case of slope calibration, the dependency on partial pressure is used to compare thesignal current to a known and readily available reference – air.
Endress+Hauser

183

Calibration

Memosens

The composition of dry air is known:• 20.95 % oxygen• 79.05 % nitrogen and other gases
Altitude and partial pressure
The oxygen partial pressure otherwise only depends on the altitude or the current absolute
air pressure.
At an air pressure of 1013 hPa at sea level, the oxygen partial pressure is approximately
212 hPa. The absolute pressure and thus also the oxygen partial pressure change
depending on the altitude. Using the barometric formula, the expected oxygen partialpressure can be calculated with only marginal errors up to a height of several kilometers.
As a result, calibration is independent of the altitude.
Three methods for obtaining reliable values for the absolute pressure of air
1.

Using the altitude and the barometric formula which provide the correlation between
the expected value for the average absolute air pressure and the altitude (also saved
and accessible in the transmitter or sensor).

2.

By measuring the absolute pressure of air with a pressure cell, for example.

3.

The relative air pressure reduced to sea level is often available from weather reports.
This relative air pressure can be converted to the absolute value using the barometricformula.

Water vapor
In reality, water in the form of water vapor is also always present in air. This is acontributing factor to the total pressure. This means that the water vapor in the airchanges the oxygen partial pressure.
However, air can only hold a specific maximum volume of water. The rest is given off ascondensate in liquid form (e.g. drops). The maximum amount of water vapor in air
depends on the temperature and follows known functions.
Air 100% rh
In this calibration model, the percentage of water vapor is deducted on the basis of thealtitude and temperature so that information is available on the oxygen partial pressure
actually present.
For this model to work correctly, the sensor to be calibrated must be close to a water
surface or be located in the headspace of a vessel partially filled with water. In this way,
oxygen sensors can be precisely calibrated in a wide variety of applications, ranging frompower stations to water treatment.
H2O air-saturated
After an adequate amount of time, water which has been aerated sufficiently is inequilibrium with the oxygen partial pressure of the air above the water. This calibration
model uses this property.
Here too, the model uses the temperature value to automatically reference back to the
expected oxygen partial pressures. This model is often used to measure oxygen in closed
tanks, such as fermenters filled with water.
Air variableThis calibration model is for all applications in which the air pressure and air humidity inthe vicinity of the sensor do not correspond to the standard atmospheric values previously
mentioned, but are still known. Both variables can be specified here.
The model is used, for example, for installed sensors that should be calibrated in operation
at known conditions, such as in dry rinse air at 1020 hPa.
Test gas calibration (only COS81D)This calibration model allows the user to calibrate the slope of the sensor using a definedoxygen gas mixture. Traceable calibration can be performed in conjunction with anabsolute pressure measurement (to determine the gas pressure at the sensor membrane)
and a certified calibration gas. The reference variable in oxygen volume concentration andthe gas pressure are entered here as input variables in the transmitter. The model assumes
a dry gas mixture with 0% humidity.
184

Endress+Hauser

Memosens

Calibration

Sample calibration
Sample calibration is another calibration option. Here, the measured value of the sensor isadjusted to a reference, obtained externally, of the same medium.
Calibrating the sensor in the media mentioned
The calibration procedure is identical regardless of whether you are calibrating in water
vapor-saturated air, air-saturated water or variable air:
1.

Open the menu: CAL/Oxygen (amp.) or Oxygen (opt.)/Slope or Point at oxygen.

2.

Choose from the following: Air 100% rh or H2O air-saturated or Air variable or
Test gas calibration (COS81D only) or Sample calibration.

3.

Follow the instructions of the software.

4.

Accept the calibration data and then return to the measuring mode.

You can cancel the calibration any time by pressing ESC. No data are then used to adjust
the sensor.
Calibrating the sensor by data entry
1.

Open the menu: CAL/Oxygen (amp.) or Oxygen (opt.)/Slope/Numeric input.

2.

New slope: Enter value.

3.

Respond to the prompt to accept the calibration data for adjustment by selecting OK.
 The new slope is used.

19.7.6

Zero point calibration

The zero point is not so important when working with relatively high concentrations ofoxygen.
This situation changes, however, as soon as oxygen sensors are used in the trace range andcalibration should be performed in the zero point. Zero point calibrations are demanding
as the ambient medium - usually air - already has a high oxygen content. This oxygenmust be excluded for the zero point calibration of the sensor and existing residual oxygenmust be eliminated from the sensor environment.
There are two preferred methods of doing so:
1.

Calibration of the zero point in a flow assembly that has been rinsed with gaseous
nitrogen of acceptable quality (N5).

2.

The calibration in oxygen-depleting zero point gel.

Alternatively you can also adjust the zero point via data entry. You require a reference
measured value for this.
Prior to sensor zero point calibration• Has the sensor signal settled and is it steady?
• Is the value displayed plausible?
If the oxygen sensor is calibrated too early, this can result in an incorrect zero point.
As a general rule, operate the sensor in a zero point gel for 0.5 hours and then assess
the signal current in the steady state. If the sensor was already operated in the trace
range before the zero point calibration, the time specified above generally suffices. If thesensor was operated in air, significantly more time must be factored in to also remove
residual oxygen from any dead volume inherent to the design. Here a value of 2 hours
applies as a general rule.
The zero point can be calibrated as soon as the sensor signal has settled. Here, the current
measured value is calibrated to the zero value. The reference method (sample calibrationin zero point) can also be used here if appropriate collecting vessels or reference
measurement are available.

Endress+Hauser

185

Calibration

Memosens

Zero point calibration with zero point gel
As an alternative to the zero point gel, you can also work in an atmosphere that is freefrom oxygen, such as high-purity nitrogen.
1.
2.
3.
4.

Open the menu: CAL/Oxygen (amp.) or Oxygen (opt.)/Zero point.
1-point cal..
Immerse the sensor in zero-point gel or hold it in nitrogen (not in air!).
Start calibration.

5.

Decide whether to use the calibration data captured, or to abort or repeat thecalibration.

6.

Clean the sensor and then place it back in the medium.

You can cancel the calibration any time by pressing ESC. No data are then used to adjust
the sensor.
Calibrating the sensor by data entry
You can calibrate the zero point by entering a percentage offset. To do this, determine thezero point by comparing with a reference measurement.
1.

Open the menu: CAL/Oxygen (amp.) or Oxygen (opt.)/Zero point/
input.

2.

New zeropoint: Enter value.

3.

Accept calibration data.
 The new zero point is used.

19.7.7

Numeric

Sample calibration

Calibration is possible both in the medium (in the process or in the laboratory) and in air.
For this purpose, you measure the raw oxygen value using a reference measurement. You
use this reference value to adjust the sensor.
You can either calibrate the slope or the zero point with the reference value.
1.

Open the menu: CAL/Oxygen (amp.) or Oxygen (opt.)/Sample calibration.

2.

Choose from the following: Slope or Zero point (amperometric sensor only).
 Use the calibration of the zero point if you want to align the measurement withanother measurement. You can correct the sensitivity of your measurement withthe slope calibration.

3.

Follow the instructions of the software.
 The current measured value is displayed.

4.

ReferenceEnter the comparative value from the external measurement.

5.

Continue.

6.

Accept calibration data.
 Sample calibration is completed.

7.

If you have performed the calibration in the laboratory, clean the sensor and thenimmerse it in the medium again.

You can cancel the calibration any time by pressing ESC. No data are then used to adjust
the sensor.

19.7.8Fermenter scaling

As a general rule, overpressure is present in a fermenter before fermentation begins. In
addition, the sensor was subjected to stress in the form of sterilization in place (SIP).

186

Endress+Hauser

Memosens

Calibration

Using the Fermenter scaling method, the measured value of the installed sensor isadjusted to match your preferred start value in %SAT.
You determine the set point of the saturation (Required saturation) to which themeasured saturation should correspond (100 %SAT generally). This results in a factor forthe calibration function (Scaling factor). In the menu, select the saturation index as
primary value and you will then see the scaled saturation index in the measured value
display.
1.
2.

Open the menu: CAL/Oxygen (opt.)/Fermenter scaling.
Activate.

3.

Respond to the prompt by selecting OK.
 The current measured saturation (Current saturation) is displayed.

4.

Required saturation: Specify the saturation to which this value should correspond.

5.

Continue.
 The scaling factor is calculated and displayed (Scaling factor).

6.

Respond to the prompt by selecting OK.

If you no longer wish to use fermenter scaling, deactivate the function in the calibrationmenu.

19.7.9Resetting the counters

These functions do not adjust the sensor, but reset the sensor's internal counters to "0".
The counters can be used to set warning limits and alarm limits for changing themembrane cap (fluorescence cap) or the electrolyte (amperometric sensors only). This
ensures that exhausted caps and electrolyte are replaced in time.
Reset the counters to "0" after replacing the cap or electrolyte.
1.

Select the desired action:

Change sensor cap or2.

Respond to query: Save.
 The sensor's internal counter is reset.

Change electrolyte.

19.7.10 Temperature adjustment

Endress+Hauser

1.

Determine the temperature of the process medium with an alternative measurement,such as a precision thermometer.

2.

Open the menu: CAL/<Sensor type>/Temperature adjustment.

3.

Leave the sensor in the process medium and keep clicking OK until temperature
measurement is started via the sensor.

4.

Enter the reference temperature from the alternative measurement. You can either
enter the absolute value or an offset for this purpose.

5.

Then keep clicking OK until the new data have been accepted.
 This completes the temperature adjustment.

187

Calibration

Memosens

19.7.11 Error messages when performing the calibration
Display message

Causes and possible remedial measures

The calibration is invalid.
The range was overrun.
Do you want repeat the last step?

Sensor contaminated or zero point gel used up. As aresult, the permitted limit values for the zero point are
exceeded.

The stability criterion is not fulfilled.
Do you want to repeat the last step?

Storage of the data failed.
Do you want to retry?

Calibration aborted.
Please clean sensor before
immersing in process medium.
(Hold will be disabled)

19.8

Disinfection sensors

19.8.1

Calibration intervals

1.

Clean sensor

2.

Renew the zero point gel

3.

Repeat calibration

The measured value is not stable. As a result, thestability criterion is not met.
1.

Replace exhausted electrolyte and/or sensor cap

2.

Adjust stability criteria →  49.

Optical fixed cable sensor only
The calibration data could not be stored in the sensor
1.

Check the sensor connection2.

Repeat calibration

The user has aborted the calibration.

The calibration intervals depend greatly on:• The application• The installation position of the sensor
Specifying the intervals
If you want to calibrate the sensor intermittently for a special application and/or on
account of a special type of installation, you can calculate the intervals using the following
method:1.

Check the sensor three months (in the case of drinking water) or one month (in thecase of process water) after commissioning using a reference measured value (DPD
method) of a medium sample.

2.

Compare the sensor measured value to the reference measured value.

3.

Depending on your requirements, decide whether the deviation is acceptable orwhether the sensor should be recalibrated.

Make sure to calibrate the sensor at least twice a year.
Please note that the DPD method itself is susceptible to high measured errors whenthe measured values are very low (< 0.2 mg/l) and can then no longer be regarded asa reliable method.
Monitoring the calibration‣ Define the limit values for monitoring the slope and zero point differences: Menu/

Setup/Inputs/Disinfection /Extended setup/Diagnostics settings/Delta slope orDelta zero point.
 These limit values depend on the process and must be determined by empiricalmeans.

188

Endress+Hauser

Memosens

Calibration

During calibration a diagnostics message is displayed if the defined warning limits havebeen exceeded. You then have to service the sensor by cleaning the sensor or reference, orby regenerating the glass membrane.
You have to replace the sensor if warning messages continue to be displayed despite themaintenance measure.
Monitoring the calibration interval
Once you have established the calibration intervals for your process, you can also have thedevice monitor them.

‣ Menu/Setup/Inputs/Disinfection/Extended setup/Calib. settings/

Calib. expiration time Set time limits to specify how long a calibration should be regarded as valid.
Memosens sensors save all the calibration data. In this way it is easy to see
whether the last calibration took place in the specified timeframe and is therefore
still valid. This is particularly advantageous when working with precalibrated
sensors.

19.8.2

Polarization

The voltage applied between cathode and anode by the transmitter polarizes the surface of
the working electrode. Therefore, after switching on the transmitter with the senor
connected, you must wait until the polarization period has elapsed before starting
calibration.
To achieve a stable display value, the sensor requires the following polarization periods:
First commissioning
Sensor for standard
60 min.
measuring range
Sensor for trace
90 min.
measuring range
Recommissioning
Sensor for standard
30 min.
measuring range
Sensor for trace
45 min.
measuring range

19.8.3

Types of calibration

The following types of calibration are possible:• Slope• Sample calibration• Data entry• Zero point• Sample calibration• Data entry• Temperature adjustment
Furthermore, the calibration menu contains additional functions to reset the sensor's
internal counters:• Change electrolyte• Change sensor cap• Reset to factory settings of the sensor channel

Endress+Hauser

189

Calibration

Memosens

19.8.4

Reference measurement

Reference measurement according to the DPD method
To calibrate the measuring system, carry out a colorimetric comparison measurement inaccordance with the DPD method. Chlorine as well as chlorine dioxide react with diethyl‐p‐phenylenediamine (DPD) and turn red. The intensity of the red coloration is proportional
to the chlorine content.
This red coloration is measured with a photometer (e.g. CCM182) and indicated as thechlorine content.
Prerequisites
The sensor reading is stable (no drifts or unsteady values for at least 5 minutes). This isnormally guaranteed once the following preconditions have been met:
• The polarization period has elapsed.
• The flow is constant and within the correct range.
• The sensor and the medium are at the same temperature.
• The pH value is within the permitted range.

19.8.5

Slope calibration

You can correct the sensitivity of your measurement with the slope calibration.
Sample calibration
Measure the raw chlorine value using a reference measurement. You use this reference
value to adjust the sensor.
1.
2.

Open the menu: CAL/Disinfection/Slope.
Sample calibration.

3.

Follow the software instructions.

4.

Choose between the following:(finish cal. later).

5.

Nominal value: Enter the reference value.

6.
7.

Continue calibration or Back to measurement

Accept calibration data.
Accept the calibration data and then return to the measuring mode.

You can cancel the calibration any time by pressing ESC. No data are then used to adjust
the sensor.
Data entry
Measure the raw chlorine value using a reference measurement. You use this reference
value to adjust the sensor.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Open the menu: CAL/Disinfection/Slope.
Numeric input.
New abs. slope or New rel. slope: Enter value.
 The other value is calculated by the device.
Accept calibration data.
Accept the calibration data and then return to the measuring mode.

You can cancel the calibration any time by pressing ESC. No data are then used to adjust
the sensor.

19.8.6

Zero point calibration

Zero point calibration is particularly important if measuring close to the zero point.

190

Endress+Hauser

Memosens

Calibration

Sample calibration
Measure the raw chlorine value using a reference measurement. You use this reference
value to adjust the sensor.
1.
2.

Open the menu: CAL/DisinfectionZero point/.
Sample calibration.

3.

Follow the software instructions.

4.

Choose:5.

Nominal value: enter the reference value.

6.
7.

Continue calibration or Back to measurement (finish cal. later).

Accept calibration data.
Accept the calibration data and then return to the measuring mode.

You can cancel the calibration any time by pressing the ESC key. No data are then used toadjust the sensor.
Data entry
Measure the raw chlorine value using a reference measurement. You use this reference
value to adjust the sensor.
1.
2.

Open the menu: CAL/Disinfection/Zero point.
Numeric input.

3.

New zero point: enter the value.

4.

Accept calibration data.

5.

Accept the calibration data and then return to the measuring mode.

You can cancel the calibration any time by pressing the ESC key. No data are then used toadjust the sensor.

19.8.7

Change electrolyte and Change sensor cap and electrolyte:
resetting the counters

These functions do not adjust the sensor, but reset the sensor's internal counters to "0".
The counter for sensor cap calibrations is used to set warning limits and alarm limits
for changing the cap. This ensures that exhausted membrane caps are replaced intime.
Reset the counters to "0" after replacing the cap or electrolyte.
1.

Select the desired action: Change electrolyte or Change sensor cap and electrolyte.

2.

Respond to query: Save.
 The sensor's internal counter is reset.

19.8.8Endress+Hauser

Resetting to factory calibration

1.

CAL/Channel No. <Sensor DI>/Disinfection/

Reset to factory calibration

2.

OK The calibration data are reset to the factory setting.

191

Calibration

Memosens

19.8.9Error messages when performing the calibration

Display message

Causes and possible remedial measures

The calibration is invalid.
Do you want to start a new calibration?

Sensor contaminated. As a result, the permitted limit
values for the zero point are exceeded.

The stability criterion is not fulfilled.
Do you want to repeat the last step?

Calibration aborted.
Please clean sensor before
immersing in process medium.
(Hold will be disabled)

19.9

1.

Clean sensor

2.

Repeat calibration

The measured value is not stable. As a result, thestability criterion is not met.
1.

Replace exhausted electrolyte and/or sensor cap

2.

Adjust stability criteria →  64.

The user has aborted the calibration.

Ion-selective sensors

Some measured values from other electrodes or sensors are used for measured value
compensation of ion-selective electrodes:• Measured value of temperature sensor for temperature compensation• pH measured value for pH compensation of ammonium (optional)• Potassium or chloride measured value for compensation of interference ions in the caseof ammonium or nitrate (optional)
For this reason, there is a sequence for calibration and adjustment that must be followed
in order to achieve a reliable measurement:
1.

Temperature adjustment

2.

Calibration and adjustment of pH electrode3.

If compensation electrodes are used:
Calibration and adjustment of ion-selective compensation electrodes (potassium,chloride)4.

If no compensation electrodes are used:
A correct manual offset is configured for the ammonium and nitrate electrode5.

Calibration and adjustment of ion-selective measuring electrodes (ammonium,
nitrate)19.9.1

Types of calibration

The following types of calibration are possible:• pH electrode:• Two-point calibration• Single-point calibration• Ion-selective electrodes:• Single-point calibration• Data entry• Two-point calibration• Standard addition ("Expert" user role only)• Sample calibration ("Expert" user role only)• ORP sensor:
Single-point calibration• Temperature adjustment by entering a reference value

192

Endress+Hauser

Memosens

Calibration

19.9.2pH sensor

Two-point calibration
You use calibration buffers to perform two-point calibration. The quality buffers
supplied by Endress+Hauser are certified and measured in an accredited laboratory.
The accreditation (DAR registration number "DKD‐K‐52701") confirms that the actual
values and the maximum deviations are correct and traceable.
1.

Open the menu: CAL/ISE/2-pnt. calibration.

2.

Select the pH sensor and3.

Follow the instructions of the software.

4.

After you have immersed the sensor in the first buffer and the measured value hasstabilized, press OK.
 The system starts calculating the measured value for the first buffer. Once thestability criterion is met, the measured value is displayed in mV.

5.

Continue to follow the instructions.

6.

After you have immersed the sensor in the second buffer and the measured value
has stabilized, press OK.
 The system starts calculating the measured value for the second buffer. Once thestability criterion is met, the measured values of the two buffers and thecalculated values for the slope and zero point are displayed.

7.

Respond to the prompt to accept the calibration data for adjustment by selecting Yes .

8.

Return the sensor to the medium and press OK again.
 This deactivates the hold and the system starts measuring again.

Start calibration.

You can cancel the calibration any time by pressing ESC. No data are then used to adjust
the sensor.
Only use calibration buffers once.
One-point calibration
1.

Open the menu: CAL/ISE/1-pnt. calibration.

2.

Select the pH sensor and Start calibration.
 A question is displayed: Do you know the measured value of the reference
medium?

3.

Respond by selecting

4.

Reference value: Enter the value of the buffer.

5.

Follow the software instructions, and immerse the sensor in the buffer.

6.

Yes.

Continue.

7.

OK: Start calibration.
 The system starts calculating the measured value for the buffer. Once thestability criterion is met, the measured value is displayed in mV.

8.

Respond to the prompt to accept the calibration data for adjustment by selecting Yes.

9.

Return the sensor to the medium and press OK again.
 This deactivates the hold and the system starts measuring again.

You can cancel the calibration any time by pressing ESC. No data are then used to adjust
the sensor.
Only use calibration buffers once.

Endress+Hauser

193

Calibration

Memosens

19.9.3Ammonium, nitrate, potassium, chloride

In the case of potentiometric methods to determine the ion concentration, the voltage
supplied by the electrochemical measuring cell (comprising the ion-selective electrode anda reference electrode), is proportional to the logarithm of the concentration (or activity) of
the ions under analysis within the "linear" or preferably "NERNST" range (→  33, redarrow). The slope and zero point calibration parameters refer to this logarithmic
relationship, which gives these parameters a completely different meaning in thismeasurement method compared with other measurement methods.

A0029189

 33
A
B

The measuring signal of ion-selective electrodes depends on the concentration

Real curve
Ideal curve

Within this range, the following applies for the correlation between the logarithm of theconcentration and the measured voltage:

E ... measured voltage
E0 ... voltage at concentration of 1 mol/l
S ... slope of electrode in mV/mol
Single-point calibration
You use a calibration solution with a known concentration.

194

1.

Open the menu: CAL/ISE/1-pnt. calibration.

2.

Select the electrode to be calibrated and Start calibration.
 A question is displayed: Do you know the measured value of the reference
medium?

3.

Respond by selecting

4.

Reference value: Enter the value of the buffer.

Yes.

Endress+Hauser

Memosens

Calibration

5.

Follow the software instructions, and immerse the sensor in the buffer.
During the calibration, move the sensor in the tank to ensure the necessary flow of
medium to the ion-selective electrode.

6.

Continue.

7.

OK: Start calibration.
 The system starts calculating the measured value for the buffer. Once thestability criterion is met, the measured value is displayed in mV.

8.

Respond to the prompt to accept the calibration data for adjustment by selecting Yes.

9.

Return the sensor to the medium and press OK again.
 This deactivates the hold and the system starts measuring again.

You can cancel the calibration any time by pressing ESC. No data are then used to adjust
the sensor.
Two-point calibration
Remove the sensor from the medium for calibration.
1.

Open the menu: CAL/ISE/2-pnt. calibration.

2.

Select the electrode to be calibrated and3.

Follow the instructions of the software.

4.

Immerse the sensor in the first calibration solution and, once the measured value hasstabilized, press OK.
 The sensor starts calculating the measured value. Once the stability criterion ismet, the measured value is displayed.

5.

Continue to follow the instructions.

6.

Immerse the sensor in the second calibration solution and, once the measured value
has stabilized, press OK.
 The sensor starts calculating the measured value. Once the stability criterion ismet, the measured values of the two calibration solutions and the calculated
values for the slope and zero point are displayed.

7.

Respond to the prompt to accept the calibration data for adjustment by selecting Yes .

8.

Return the sensor to the medium and press OK again.
 This deactivates the hold and the system starts measuring again.

Start calibration.

You can cancel the calibration any time by pressing ESC. No data are then used to adjust
the sensor.
Data entry
You enter the slope and zero point manually. The calibration function is calculated fromthese values. Thus, the data entry returns the same result as two-point calibration. You
must determine the slope and zero point in an alternative way.
1.

Open the menu: CAL/ISE/Numeric input.

2.

Select the electrode to be calibrated and Start calibration.
 The slope and zero point are shown on the display.

3.

Select each value one after the other and enter value.

4.

Then Accept calibration data.
 Since you are entering all the variables directly, no additional information isdisplayed by the controller.

You can cancel the calibration any time by pressing ESC. No data are then used to adjust
the sensor.
Endress+Hauser

195

Calibration

Memosens

19.9.4ORP

Single-point calibration with calibration buffers
With this type of calibration, you work with calibration buffers, e.g. ORP buffers fromEndress+Hauser. For this calibration, you remove the sensor from the medium.
1.

Open the menu: CAL/ISE/ORP/1-pnt. calibration.

2.

Select the ORP sensor and3.

Buffer:: Enter the value of the buffer.

4.

Start calibration.

Continue.

5.

Follow the software instructions, and immerse the sensor in the buffer.

6.

OK: Start calibration.
 The system starts calculating the measured value for the buffer. Once thestability criterion is met, the measured value is displayed in mV.

7.

Accept the calibration data and then return to the measuring mode.

You can cancel the calibration any time by pressing ESC. No data are then used to adjust
the sensor.

19.9.5

Error messages when performing the calibration

Display message

Causes and possible remedial measures

The calibration is invalid.
Do you want to start a new calibration?

The calibration buffer is contaminated or the pH value
is no longer within the permitted limits. As a result,the permitted measured value deviation is exceeded.

Slope out of tolerance.
Zeropoint out of tolerance.
Sample concentration too low.

1.

Check the expiry date2.

Use a fresh buffer

Incorrect buffers used. As a result, the buffer
recognition function - for example - does not work
correctly.
1.

pH values of the buffers are too close together,e.g. pH 9 and 9.2

2.

Use buffers with a larger pH difference

Sensor aging or contaminated. As a result, thepermitted limit values for the slope and/or zero point
are exceeded

The stability criterion is not fulfilled.
Do you want to repeat the last step?

Calibration aborted.
Please clean sensor before
immersing in process medium.
(Hold will be disabled)

196

1.

Clean sensor

2.

Adjust the limit values

3.

Regenerate or replace the sensor

The measured value or temperature is not stable. As aresult, the stability criterion is not met.
1.

Keep the temperature constant duringcalibration2.

Replace the buffer

3.

Clean or regenerate aged or contaminatedsensor4.

Adjust stability criteria →  114.

The user has aborted the calibration.

Endress+Hauser

Memosens

Calibration

19.10 Turbidity and solids sensors
19.10.1 Sensor for turbidity and solids content (CUS51D)The sensor is precalibrated on leaving the factory. As such, it can be used in a wide range
of applications (e.g. clear water measurements) without the need for additional
calibration. The Kaolin and Formazine applications are already fully calibrated and can beused without any further calibration.
All other applications are precalibrated with reference samples and require calibration to
the corresponding application.
In addition to the factory calibration data, which cannot be modified, the sensor has fiveother data records to be used for storing process calibrations.
Operating Instructions Turbimax CUS51D, BA00461C
All information regarding the range of applications, recommended calibration types,
sampling, handling and use of the sensor during calibration and reference
measurement can be found in the Operating Instructions for the sensor.
One to five points can be calibrated for each application.
Opening the calibration menu
1.

Press CAL.

2.

<Channel no.>: select TU/TS.

Creating a calibration data record
1.

Perform a single-point or multi-point calibration.
 A new calibration data record is created.

2.

Alternatively:
Duplicate an existing data record.

One-point or multiple point calibration
If possible, start the calibration at the same time as the sampling procedure and enter thelaboratory value of the sample as the set point. If no laboratory value is available duringcalibration, enter an approximate value as the set point. As soon as the laboratory value isavailable, amend the set point on the transmitter.
From Liquiline-software version 01.06.04:
1.

Select an empty data record (identified by an empty box before the name, e.g.
Dataset1).

2.

Dataset name: Assign a name to the data record.

3.

Basic application: Select application.

4.

Unit: Select unit.

5.

Calibration table: Select table.

6.

Add calibration points: Select function.

7.

Confirm prompts (start calibration, clean sensor): OK.

8.

Enter reference value (set point).

9.

Where necessary, select Calibrate next assay.

10. Once you have determined the last measuring point:
Accept calibration data.
 A message is displayed informing you whether the data record is valid.
11. Confirm prompt (clean sensor): OK.
 Decide if you wish to activate the calibrated data record.
Endress+Hauser

197

Calibration

Memosens

Only set points can be changed in the case of activated data records. It is then no longer
possible to delete measuring points.
Duplicating a data record
1.

Duplicate dataset: Start function.

2.

Copy from: Select source data record.

3.

Copy to: Select target data record.

4.

Dataset name: Enter a name for the duplicated record.

5.

Duplicate dataset.

Editing a data record
You can apply a factor or an offset to the data records created. This factor or offset isdetermined by means of a reference measurement. In addition, the active table can be alsoedited or extended to include additional calibration points.
Editing options:• Factor/offset• Data input (offset)• Data input (factor)• Edit table• Add calibration points• Substitute calib. point
Factor/offset
1.
2.

Data input (offset)
Offset: Enter offset from reference measurement.

3.

Accept calibration data.

1.

Data input (factor)

2.
3.

Cal. factor: Enter the factor calculated from the measured value and reference value.
Accept calibration data.

Calibration table
1.

Edit table You will receive a warning if the data record is the one that is currently active.
Take note of this warning before continuing.

2.

OK: Adjust values.

3.

SAVE.

Adding a calibration point1.

Add calibration points
 You will receive a warning if the data record is the one currently active for themeasurement. Adding calibration points can result in invalid data.

2.

OK: Add additional calibration points.

3.

Immerse the sensor in the calibration solution, and wait for the measured value tostabilize.

4.

Enter set point.

5.

Add additional points or

Accept calibration data.

Calibration points can also be added to the table by entering data for target and actual
values (INSERT).

198

Endress+Hauser

Memosens

Calibration

Replacing a calibration point
You can replace a calibration point if is regarded as valid.
6.

Substitute calib. point Prompt, asking if calibration should be started.

7.

OK.

8.

Immerse the sensor in the calibration solution, and wait for the measured value tostabilize.

9.

Select the point to be replaced.

10.

Accept calibration data.

Measurement filter
Measured value filter

Description

Weak

Low filtering, high sensitivity, fast response time

Normal (factory setting)Medium filtering

StrongStrong filtering, low sensitivity, slow response to changes

1.

Configuration method: Select Standard.

2.

Filter level: Select in accordance with the above table.

3.

Accept calibration data.
Configuration method = Specialist
The individual parameters for filtering must be entered here. This task should be left
to Endress+Hauser Service.

Editing the name of the sample set
1.
2.

Dataset name: Enter the desired name.
Accept calibration data.

19.10.2 Turbidity sensor for drinking water applications (CUS52D)The sensor is precalibrated on leaving the factory. As such, it can be used in a wide range
of applications without the need for additional calibration. The Formazine application isalready fully calibrated and can be used without any further calibration.
All other applications are precalibrated with reference samples and require calibration to
the corresponding application.
In addition to the factory calibration data, which cannot be modified, the sensor has six
other data records to be used for storing process calibrations.
Operating Instructions Turbimax CUS52D, BA01275C
All information regarding the range of applications, recommended calibration types,
sampling, handling and use of the sensor during calibration and reference
measurement can be found in the Operating Instructions for the sensor.
One to six points can be calibrated for each application.
Opening the calibration menu

Endress+Hauser

1.

Press CAL.

2.

<Channel no.>: Select TU.

199

Calibration

Memosens

Creating a calibration data record
1.

Perform a single-point or multi-point calibration.
 A new calibration data record is created.

2.

Alternatively:
Duplicate an existing data record.

One-point or multiple point calibration
If possible, start the calibration at the same time as the sampling procedure and enter thelaboratory value of the sample as the set point. If no laboratory value is available duringcalibration, enter an approximate value as the set point. As soon as the laboratory value isavailable, amend the set point on the transmitter.
From Liquiline-software version 01.06.04:
1.

Select an empty data record (identified by an empty box before the name, e.g.
Dataset1).

2.

Dataset name: Assign a name to the data record.

3.

Basic application: Select application.

4.

Unit: Select unit.

5.

Calibration table: Select table.

6.

Add calibration points: Select function.

7.

Confirm prompts (start calibration, clean sensor): OK.

8.

Enter reference value (set point).

9.

Where necessary, select Calibrate next assay.

10. Once you have determined the last measuring point:
Accept calibration data.
 A message is displayed informing you whether the data record is valid.
11. Confirm prompt (clean sensor): OK.
 Decide if you wish to activate the calibrated data record.
Only set points can be changed in the case of activated data records. It is then no longer
possible to delete measuring points.
Activating a data record at a later time1.

Menu/Setup/Inputs/TU/Application: Select application.

2.

If the application is selected correctly:
Select data record.

Duplicating a data record
1.

Duplicate dataset: Start function.

2.

Copy from: Select source data record.

3.

Copy to: Select target data record.

4.

Dataset name: Enter a name for the duplicated record.

5.

Duplicate dataset.

Editing a data record
You can apply a factor or an offset to the active data record. This factor or offset isdetermined by means of a reference measurement. In addition, the active table can be alsoedited or extended to include additional calibration points.

200

Endress+Hauser

Memosens

Calibration

Editing options:• Factor/offset• Data input (offset)• Data input (factor)• Edit table
Add calibration points
Factor/offset
1.
2.

Data input (offset)
Offset: Enter offset from reference measurement.

3.

Accept calibration data.

1.

Data input (factor)

2.

Cal. factor: Enter the factor calculated from the measured value and reference value.

3.

Accept calibration data.

Calibration table
1.

Edit table You will receive a warning if the data record is the one that is currently active.
Take note of this warning before continuing.

2.

OK: Adjust values.

3.

SAVE.

Adding a calibration point1.

Add calibration points
 You will receive a warning if the data record is the one currently active for themeasurement. Adding calibration points can result in invalid data.

2.

OK: Add additional calibration points.

3.

Immerse the sensor in the calibration solution, and wait for the measured value tostabilize.

4.

Enter set point.

5.

Add additional points or

Accept calibration data.

Calibration points can also be added to the table by entering data for target and actual
values (INSERT).
Assembly adjustment
Both the optical design of the CUS52D turbidity sensor and the CUA252 and CUA262 flow
assemblies are optimized to minimize measured errors from the effects of walls in
assemblies or pipes (measured error in CUA252 < 0.02 FNU).
The Assembly adjustment function can automatically compensate for the remaining
measured errors caused by wall effects. The functionality is based on formazine
measurements and may thus require a calibration downstream in order to adapt themeasurement to the corresponding application or medium.

Endress+Hauser

Adjustment

Description

PE100

Adjustment to CUA252 flow assembly (material: polyethylene)

1.4404 / 316L

Adjustment to CUA262 weld-in flow assembly (material: stainless steel 1.4404)

Customized

Adjustment to any pipe/assembly

Customized advanced

Adjustment only recommended for Endress+Hauser Service staff

201

Calibration

Memosens• PE100 and 1.4404 / 316L
All of the parameters are assigned default values in the firmware and cannot bechanged.
• Customized
It is possible to select the material, surface (matte/shiny) and the internal diameter of
the assembly in which the sensor is installed.
• Customized advanced
For special adjustments, the following table provides recommendations. Alternatively,
adjustments can be performed by the manufacturer's service department.
Assembly/pipe built-in adapter

Zero adjustment

Upper limit

Adjustment characteristic

CUA250

1)

0.14

33

1.001

CYA251

1)

0.075

25

1.5

VARIVENT N DN 65

1.28

500

6

VARIVENT N DN 80

0.75

500

6

VARIVENT N DN 100

0.35

500

6

VARIVENT N DN 125

0.20

500

6

1)

Sensor adapter required for the installation of CUS52D in this assembly, see the Operating Instructions forthe sensor

Performing an assembly adjustment
1.

Open the function: .../TU/Assembly adjustment.

2.

Select adjustment.

3.

Accept calibration data.

Editing the name of the sample set
1.
2.

Dataset name: Enter the desired name.
Accept calibration data.

19.10.3 Absorption sensor for the measurement of turbidity andsuspended solids (CUS50D)
The "Absorption" and "Formazine" applications are calibrated at the factory. The absorption
factory calibration is used as the basis for precalibrating additional applications andoptimizing them for the different media characteristics.
Application

Specified operating range

Factory calibration for absorption

0.000 to 5.000 AU or
0.000 to 10.000 OD

Factory calibration for formazine

40 to 4,000 FAUApplication: Kaolin

0 to 60 g/l

Application: Sludge

0 to 25 g/lApplication: Auto sludge

0 to 25 g/l

Product loss

0 to 100 %To adapt to a specific application, it is possible to perform customer calibrations with up to
10 points.

202

Endress+Hauser

Memosens

Calibration

Factory calibration for the formazine application is carried out with the formazine turbidity
standard.
Sensor measured values in the unit [FAU] are only comparable to the measured
values of any other sensor e.g. scattered light sensor with the unit [FNU] or [NTU] inthis standard medium. In any other medium, the measured values will be different tothose obtained when measuring with another scattered light sensor.
The absorption and formazine applications are calibrated at the factory. All otherapplications are merely precalibrated and must therefore be adapted to the corresponding
application and medium.
The sensor has 8 data records. Six of these are prepopulated at the factory with sample
data records, i.e. typical settings, for all available applications:• Absorption• Formazine• Kaolin• Sludge• Auto sludge• Product loss
The desired data record is activated by selecting the corresponding application. It can beadapted to that application using the following options:• Calibration (1 to 10 points)• Entering of a factor (multiplication of measured values by a constant factor)• Entering of an offset (addition/subtraction of a constant factor to/from the measured
values)• Duplication of factory calibration data records
Further data records can be created in the sensor and adapted to the application bymeans of calibration or by entering a factor or offset. Two free, unused data records
are available for this. The number of free data records can be increased if necessary bydeleting (sample) data records that are not required. The sample data records arerestored to factory status when the sensor is reset.
Operating Instructions Turbimax CUS50D, BA01846C
All information regarding the range of applications, recommended calibration types,
sampling, handling and use of the sensor during calibration and reference
measurement can be found in the Operating Instructions for the sensor.
Opening the calibration menu
1.

Press CAL.

2.

<Channel no.>: Select TU/AU.

Single-point or multi-point calibration for data records already created
If possible, start the calibration at the same time as the sampling procedure and enter thelaboratory value of the sample as the set point. If no laboratory value is available duringcalibration, enter an approximate value as the set point. As soon as the laboratory value isavailable, amend the set point on the transmitter.
From Liquiline-software version 01.06.04:

Endress+Hauser

1.

Select sample data record (e.g. Absorption).

2.

Calibration table: Select table.

3.

Add calibration points: Select function.

4.

Confirm prompts (start calibration, clean sensor): OK.

5.

Enter reference value (set point).

6.

Where necessary, select Calibrate next assay.

203

Calibration

Memosens

7.

Once you have determined the last measuring point:
Accept calibration data.
 A message is displayed informing you whether the data record is valid.

8.

Confirm prompt (clean sensor): OK.
 Decide if you wish to activate the calibrated data record.

Only set points can be changed in the case of activated data records. It is then no longer
possible to delete measuring points.
Single-point or multi-point calibration for empty data records
1.

Select empty data record (identified by empty box before the name, e.g. Dataset7).

2.

Dataset name: Assign a name to the data record.

3.

Basic application: Select application.

4.

Measurement path: Select path length.

5.

Unit: Select unit.

6.

Calibration table: Select table.

7.

Add calibration points: Select function.

8.

Confirm prompts (start calibration, clean sensor): OK.

9.

Enter reference value (set point).

10. Where necessary, select Calibrate next assay.
11. Once you have determined the last measuring point:
Accept calibration data.
 A message is displayed informing you whether the data record is valid.
12. Confirm prompt (clean sensor): OK.
 Decide if you wish to activate the calibrated data record.
Once you have activated the data record you can only change the set points. It is then nolonger possible to delete measuring points.
Activating a data record at a later time1.

Select application: Menu/Setup/Inputs/TU/AU/Application.

2.

If the application is selected correctly:
Select data record.

Duplicating a data record
1.

Duplicate dataset: Start function.

2.

Copy from: Select source data record.

3.

Copy to: Select target data record.

4.

Dataset name: Enter a name for the duplicated record.

5.

Duplicate dataset.

Editing a data record
You can apply a factor or an offset to the active data record. This factor or offset isdetermined by means of a reference measurement. In addition, the active table can be alsoedited or extended to include additional calibration points.

204

Endress+Hauser

Memosens

Calibration

Editing options:• Factor/offset• Data input (offset)• Data input (factor)• Edit table
Add calibration points
Factor/offset
1.
2.

Data input (offset)
Offset: Enter offset from reference measurement.

3.

Accept calibration data.

1.

Data input (factor)

2.

Cal. factor: Enter the factor calculated from the measured value and reference value.

3.

Accept calibration data.

Calibration table
1.

Edit table You will receive a warning if the data record is the one that is currently active.
Take note of this warning before continuing.

2.

OK: Adjust values.

3.

SAVE.

Adding a calibration point1.

Add calibration points
 You will receive a warning if the data record is the one currently active for themeasurement. Adding calibration points can result in invalid data.

2.

OK: Add additional calibration points.

3.

Immerse the sensor in the calibration solution, and wait for the measured value tostabilize.

4.

Enter set point.

5.

Add additional points or

Accept calibration data.

Calibration points can also be added to the table by entering data for target and actual
values (INSERT).
Measurement filter
Measured value filter

Description

Weak

Low filtering, high sensitivity, fast response time

Normal (factory setting)Medium filtering

StrongStrong filtering, low sensitivity, slow response to changes

1.

Configuration method: Select Standard.

2.

Filter level: Select in accordance with the above table.

3.

Accept calibration data.
Configuration method = Specialist
The individual parameters for filtering must be entered here. This task should be left
to Endress+Hauser Service.

Endress+Hauser

205

Calibration

Memosens

Air bubble trap
In addition to the measured value filter, the sensor also features a filter function to
suppress the measured errors caused by air bubbles.
Air bubbles cause the measured value to increase in liquids with low turbidity or with a low
solids content. The filter function cuts off these measured value peaks by outputting theminimum value within a specified time interval. The time interval can be configured using
a numerical value between 0 and 180 seconds. The air bubble trap is disabled (value 0) by
default. Enabling the air bubble trap in the case of liquids with high turbidity or high solids
content is not of any benefit. Air bubbles do not cause the measured value to increase inmedia of this type and thus cannot be eliminated with the minimum filter.
1.
2.

Bubble suppression filter: Select function.
Accept calibration data.

Editing the name of the sample set
1.
2.

Dataset name: Enter the desired name.
Accept calibration data.

19.10.4 Error messages during calibration (all sensors)
Display message

Causes and possible remedial measures

The calibrated dataset is invalid.
Do you want to restart the calibration?

Calibration point not plausible

The stability criterion is not fulfilled.
Do you want to repeat the last step?

Calibration aborted.
Please clean sensor before
immersing in process medium.
(Hold will be disabled)1.

Repeat calibration

2.

Check the position of the sensor in thecalibration vessel (fixed position, wall effects
etc.)

3.

Ensure the medium is mixed thoroughly (e.g.
use a magnetic stirrer)

4.

Exchange the calibration medium

5.

Clean any dirt from the sensor

The measured value or temperature is not stable. As aresult, the stability criterion is not met.
1.

Keep the temperature constant duringcalibration

2.

Check the position of the sensor in thecalibration vessel (fixed position, wall effects
etc.)

3.

Ensure the medium is mixed thoroughly (e.g.
use a magnetic stirrer)

4.

Clean any dirt from the sensor

5.

Adjust stability criteria →  86.

The user has aborted the calibration.

19.11 SAC sensors
19.11.1 Types of calibration
In addition to the factory calibrations, which cannot be changed, the sensor contains six
additional data records for storing process calibrations or for adaptation to the relevant

206

Endress+Hauser

Memosens

Calibration

measuring point (application). Each calibration data record can have up to five calibration
points.
The sensor offers a wide range of options for adapting the measurement to the applicationin question:• Calibration or adjustment (1 to 5 points)• Entry of a factor (multiplication of measured values by a constant factor)• Entry of an offset (addition/subtraction of a constant factor to/from the measured
values)• Duplication of factory calibration data records
One-point or multiple point calibration
Do not remove the sensor from the medium for calibration purposes; it can be calibrated
directly in the application.
1.

For the calibration, ensure that the measuring gap is not soiled with deposit buildup:
Clean the measuring gap of the sensor (remove soiling and deposits).

2.

To perform the calibration, immerse the sensor in the medium in such a way that themeasuring gap is completely filled with the medium.
 All air bubbles and air pockets must be cleaned out of the measuring gap during
immersion.
• In the calibration table, the actual values can be edited as well as the set points(right and left columns).
• Additional pairs of calibration values (actual values and set points) can be added, if
required, even without measurement in a medium.

19.11.2 SAC
Factory calibration
The sensor is precalibrated on leaving the factory (calibrated with KHP).
Calibration to the customer process is nevertheless advantageous in the majority of cases.
Reason: Organic compounds other than KHP react differently in the spectrum.
The factory calibration is based on 20 calibration points and is adjusted at three points
during production. The factory calibration cannot be deleted and can be retrieved at any
time. Single-point and two-point calibrations - performed as customer calibrations - arereferenced to this factory calibration.
Principle of calibrationLines interpolate between the calibration points.

‣ Give your calibration data records meaningful and useful names.
For example, the name can contain the name of the application on which the data record
was originally based. This makes it easier to distinguish between different data records.
Determining the reference values in the laboratory
Different methods are available for the calibration:• Serial dilution of a medium sample• Serial calibration with standard solutions (KHP = potassium hydrogen phthalate)• Combination of both (medium sample with added standard)

Endress+Hauser

1.

Take a representative sample of the medium.

2.

Take suitable measures to ensure that the process of biological and chemical
reduction in the sample does not progress any further.

207

Calibration

Memosens

3.

Determine the measured values of your sample array using the laboratory method(for example, by colorimetric means using a cuvette test).

Calibration and adjustment of the sensor
To calibrate the sensor, use the same medium sample or sample array that was used todetermine the laboratory measured values. The sample array can also be pure standard
solutions.
The general sequence of a calibration is as follows:1.

Select data record.

2.

Place sensor in medium.

3.

During calibration, ensure that the medium is well homogenized.

4.

Start the calibration for the measuring point.

5.

If only one point should be calibrated:
End the calibration by accepting the calibration data.
 Otherwise continue with the next step.

6.

Add parent solution to the sample for the 2nd measuring point.

7.

Determine the measured value.

8.

Calculate the reference value from the laboratory measured value plus the addedconcentration.

9.

Repeat the previous step as often as needed until you have reached the desired
number of calibration points (maximum 5).

To avoid incorrect calibration from carryover:• Always go from a low concentration to a high concentration.
• Clean and dry the sensor after each measurement.
• Make sure to remove medium residue in the sensor gap and in the connection opening
for the compressed air (e.g. by rinsing with the next calibration solution).
Calibration on the transmitter

208

1.

CAL: Select sensor and open its calibration menu.

2.

Dataset: Select data record. This must not be the active data record (identifiable by amarker in front of the data record name).

3.

Dataset name: Assign a name to the data record.

4.

Basic application: Decide which value you want to calibrate. SAC, COD, TOC, DOC or
BOD are available for selection.
 Only if Basic application = SAC:
The transmitter can determine the derived variables COD, TOC, DOC and BODfrom the SAC value. Different calculation factors exist for this depending on thereference method. You can adapt the calculation factor saved at the factory for
COD/BOD and TOC/DOC to your application and also enter an SAC offset.

5.

Unit: Select the unit. Use the unit in which you also obtained the laboratory values.

6.

Start calibration: Follow the instructions to record the first measuring point(lowest concentration).
 Once a stable measured value has been determined, you will be asked for the set
point (=laboratory value) of the sample.

7.

Enter set point.

8.

Decide whether you want to add another calibration point (Calibrate next assay) or
whether you want to end the calibration and accept the data for adjustment (Takeover the calibration data?).

9.

Determine all the desired measuring points.
Endress+Hauser

Memosens

Calibration

10. Once you have determined the last measuring point:
Accept data.
 A message is displayed informing you whether the data record is valid.
11. Respond to the prompt to accept the calibration data for adjustment by selecting OK.
 You are asked whether you want to activate the data record just recorded. If you
select OK, the measured values are calculated on the basis of the new calibration
function.
You still have the possibility of editing the data record.
Once you have activated the data record you can only change the set points. It is then nolonger possible to delete measuring points.
You can cancel the calibration any time by pressing ESC. No data are then used to adjust
the sensor.
Editing data records
You can apply a factor or an offset to the active data record. This factor or offset isdetermined by means of a reference measurement. In addition, the active table can be alsoedited or extended to include additional calibration points.
Editing options:• Edit offset• Edit factor• Edit table• Start calibration• Substitute calib. point
Edit offset
1.
2.

Offset: Enter offset from reference measurement.
Accept calibration data.

Edit factor
1.
2.

Cal. factor: Enter the factor calculated from the measured value and reference value.
Accept calibration data.

Edit table
You will receive a warning indicating that the data record is the one that is currently active.
Take note of this warning before continuing.
1.

OK: Adjust values.

2.

SAVE.

Start calibration
You will receive a warning indicating that the data record is the one currently active for themeasurement. Adding calibration points can result in invalid data. If you proceed, thefactory calibration automatically becomes active for the current measurement.
1.

OK: Add additional calibration points.

2.

Immerse sensor in calibration solution, and wait for the measured value to stabilize.

3.

Enter set point.

4.

Add additional points or

Accept calibration data.

Substitute calib. point
You can replace a calibration point if is regarded as valid.
1.

Endress+Hauser

Respond to prompt asking if calibration should be started by selecting OK.

209

Calibration

Memosens

2.

Immerse sensor in calibration solution, and wait for the measured value to stabilize.

3.

Select the point to be replaced.

4.

Accept calibration data.

Duplicating data records
This function makes it possible to edit an existing calibration data record, such as thefactory calibration, for example.
By entering appropriate data you can then configure an offset for the copied data record orchange the nominal values using a table. This provides a quick and easy way to react tomodified conditions in your process which you are aware of without the need forcalibration.
1.

Duplicate dataset: Start function.

2.

Select data record to be duplicated.

3.

Select memory location and enter a name for the duplicated record.
 You can only duplicate a record if you have not yet used all the available space fordata records. If no more room is available you must first delete a data record.

You can now:
• Configure an offset for the new data record• Change the nominal values of the individual calibration points via the function Edit
table.
4.

If you want to use the modified data record as the active data record:
Open the menu Setup/Inputs.

5.

Select the new data record under Application.

19.11.3 Temperature adjustment

210

1.

Determine the temperature of the process medium with an alternative measurement,such as a precision thermometer.

2.

Open the menu: CAL/<Sensor type>/Temperature adjustment.

3.

Leave the sensor in the process medium and keep clicking OK until temperature
measurement is started via the sensor.

4.

Enter the reference temperature from the alternative measurement. You can either
enter the absolute value or an offset for this purpose.

5.

Then keep clicking OK until the new data have been accepted.
 This completes the temperature adjustment.

Endress+Hauser

Memosens

Calibration

19.11.4 Error messages when performing the calibration
Display message

Causes and possible remedial measures

The calibrated dataset is invalid.
Do you want to restart the calibration?

Calibration point not plausible

The stability criterion is not fulfilled.
Do you want to repeat the last step?

Calibration aborted.
Please clean sensor before
immersing in process medium.
(Hold will be disabled)1.

Repeat calibration

2.

Check the position of the sensor in thecalibration vessel (fixed position, wall effects,
air bubbles, etc.)

3.

Ensure the medium is mixed thoroughly (e.g.
use a magnetic stirrer)

4.

Exchange the calibration medium

5.

Clean any dirt from the sensor

The measured value or temperature is not stable. As aresult, the stability criterion is not met.
1.

Keep the temperature constant duringcalibration

2.

Check the position of the sensor in thecalibration vessel (fixed position, wall effects,
air bubbles, etc.)

3.

Ensure the medium is mixed thoroughly (e.g.
use a magnetic stirrer)

4.

Clean any dirt from the sensor

5.

Adjust stability criteria →  94.

The user has aborted the calibration.

19.12 Nitrate sensors
Processes with nitrate values > 0.1 mg/l
1.

Take sample and determine nitrate concentration in the laboratory.

2.

Calibrate and adjust the sensor using the laboratory value.

Processes with very different nitrate values
1.

At time A, take a sample with a high concentration, and measure and calibrate thesample.

2.

At time B - which can be a few days later - take a sample with a low concentration,and measure and calibrate the second value.

Calibration with the addition of standard
If the sludge parameters tend to be constant, you can perform the calibration with asample with a low concentration of nitrate and then add standard to the sample.

Endress+Hauser

1.

Take a larger sample (bucket) and analyze some of it by colorimetric means.

2.

Calibrate the value of the calorimetric measurement in the sensor.

3.

Add standard to the sample and determine the laboratory value.

4.

Calibrate the laboratory value of the sample with added standard in the sensor.

211

Calibration

Memosens

Avoid incorrect measurements:• Drinking water may contain higher concentrations of nitrate and is not suitable as a
blank value. Use fully deionized water as a blank value.
• During calibration, make sure the sample is homogeneous.
• When calibrating, start with a low concentration and increase the concentrations
gradually to prevent nitrate carryover.
• Clean and dry the sensor after a calibration. Ensure that there is no medium residue inthe cuvette gap. In this way, you avoid mixing the different samples and changing thenitrate concentrations.

19.12.1 Types of calibration
In addition to the factory calibrations, which cannot be changed, the sensor contains six
additional data records for storing process calibrations or for adaptation to the relevantmeasuring point (application). Each calibration data record can have up to five calibration
points.
The sensor offers a wide range of options for adapting the measurement to the applicationin question:• Calibration or adjustment (1 to 5 points)• Entry of a factor (multiplication of measured values by a constant factor)• Entry of an offset (addition/subtraction of a constant factor to/from the measured
values)• Duplication of factory calibration data records
One-point or multiple point calibration
Do not remove the sensor from the medium for calibration purposes; it can be calibrated
directly in the application.
1.

For the calibration, ensure that the measuring gap is not soiled with deposit buildup:
Clean the measuring gap of the sensor (remove soiling and deposits).

2.

To perform the calibration, immerse the sensor in the medium in such a way that themeasuring gap is completely filled with the medium.
 All air bubbles and air pockets must be cleaned out of the measuring gap during
immersion.
• In the calibration table, the actual values can be edited as well as the set points(right and left columns).
• Additional pairs of calibration values (actual values and set points) can be added, if
required, even without measurement in a medium.

19.12.2 Nitrate
Factory calibration
The sensor is precalibrated on leaving the factory.
As such, it can be used in a wide range of clear water measurements without the need for
additional calibration.
The factory calibration is based on 20 calibration points and is adjusted at three points
during production. The factory calibration cannot be deleted and can be retrieved at any
time. Single-point and two-point calibrations - performed as customer calibrations - arereferenced to this factory calibration.
Principle of calibrationLines interpolate between the calibration points.

‣ Give your calibration data records meaningful and useful names.
212

Endress+Hauser

Memosens

Calibration

For example, the name can contain the name of the application on which the data record
was originally based. This makes it easier to distinguish between different data records.
Determining the reference values in the laboratory
1.

Take a representative sample of the medium.

2.

Take suitable measures to ensure that the process of nitrate reduction in the sample
does not progress any further, such as immediate filtration (0.45 µm) of the sample
as per DIN 38402.

3.

Determine the concentration of nitrate in the sample using the laboratory method(for example, by colorimetric means using a cuvette test ‐ the standard method as per
DIN 38405 Part 9).

Calibration and adjustment of the sensor
To calibrate the sensor, use the same medium sample or sample array that was used todetermine the laboratory measured values. The sample array can also be pure standard
solutions.
The general sequence of a calibration is as follows:1.

Select data record.

2.

Place sensor in medium.

3.

During calibration, ensure that the medium is well homogenized.

4.

Start the calibration for the measuring point.

5.

If only one point should be calibrated:
End the calibration by accepting the calibration data.
 Otherwise continue with the next step.

6.

Add parent solution to the sample for the 2nd measuring point.

7.

Determine the measured value.

8.

Calculate the reference value from the laboratory measured value plus the addedconcentration.

9.

Repeat the previous step as often as needed until you have reached the desired
number of calibration points (maximum 5).

To avoid incorrect calibration from carryover:• Always go from a low concentration to a high concentration.
• Clean and dry the sensor after each measurement.
• Make sure to remove medium residue in the sensor gap and in the connection opening
for the compressed air (e.g. by rinsing with the next calibration solution).
Calibration on the transmitter

Endress+Hauser

1.

CAL: Select sensor and open its calibration menu.

2.

Dataset: Select data record. This must not be the active data record (identifiable by amarker in front of the data record name).

3.

Dataset name: Assign a name to the data record.

4.

Unit: Select the unit. Use the unit in which you also obtained the laboratory values.

5.

Start calibration: Follow the instructions to record the first measuring point(lowest concentration).
 Once a stable measured value has been determined, you will be asked for the set
point (=laboratory value) of the sample.

6.

Enter set point.

213

Calibration

Memosens

7.

Decide whether you want to add an additional value (next highest concentration,
Calibrate next assay) or whether you want to end the calibration and accept thedata for adjustment (Take over the calibration data?).

8.

Determine all the desired measuring points.

9.

Once you have determined the last measuring point:
Accept data.
 A message is displayed informing you whether the data record is valid.

10. Respond to the prompt to accept the calibration data for adjustment by selecting OK.
 You are asked whether you want to activate the data record just recorded. If you
select OK, the measured values are calculated on the basis of the new calibration
function.
You still have the possibility of editing the data record.
Once you have activated the data record you can only change the set points. It is then nolonger possible to delete measuring points.
You can cancel the calibration any time by pressing ESC. No data are then used to adjust
the sensor.
Editing data records
You can apply a factor or an offset to the active data record. This factor or offset isdetermined by means of a reference measurement. In addition, the active table can be alsoedited or extended to include additional calibration points.
Editing options:• Edit offset• Edit factor• Edit table• Start calibration• Substitute calib. point
Edit offset
1.
2.

Offset: Enter offset from reference measurement.
Accept calibration data.

Edit factor
1.
2.

Cal. factor: Enter the factor calculated from the measured value and reference value.
Accept calibration data.

Edit table
You will receive a warning indicating that the data record is the one that is currently active.
Take note of this warning before continuing.
1.

OK: Adjust values.

2.

SAVE.

Start calibration
You will receive a warning indicating that the data record is the one currently active for themeasurement. Adding calibration points can result in invalid data. If you proceed, thefactory calibration automatically becomes active for the current measurement.

214

1.

OK: Add additional calibration points.

2.

Immerse sensor in calibration solution, and wait for the measured value to stabilize.

3.

Enter set point.

4.

Add additional points or

Accept calibration data.

Endress+Hauser

Memosens

Calibration

Substitute calib. point
You can replace a calibration point if is regarded as valid.
1.

Respond to prompt asking if calibration should be started by selecting OK.

2.

Immerse sensor in calibration solution, and wait for the measured value to stabilize.

3.

Select the point to be replaced.

4.

Accept calibration data.

Duplicating data records
This function makes it possible to edit an existing calibration data record, such as thefactory calibration, for example.
By entering appropriate data you can then configure an offset for the copied data record orchange the nominal values using a table. This provides a quick and easy way to react tomodified conditions in your process which you are aware of without the need forcalibration.
1.

Duplicate dataset: Start function.

2.

Select data record to be duplicated.

3.

Select memory location and enter a name for the duplicated record.
 You can only duplicate a record if you have not yet used all the available space fordata records. If no more room is available you must first delete a data record.

You can now:
• Configure an offset for the new data record• Change the nominal values of the individual calibration points via the function Edit
table.
4.

If you want to use the modified data record as the active data record:
Open the menu Setup/Inputs.

5.

Select the new data record under Application.

19.12.3 Temperature adjustment

Endress+Hauser

1.

Determine the temperature of the process medium with an alternative measurement,such as a precision thermometer.

2.

Open the menu: CAL/<Sensor type>/Temperature adjustment.

3.

Leave the sensor in the process medium and keep clicking OK until temperature
measurement is started via the sensor.

4.

Enter the reference temperature from the alternative measurement. You can either
enter the absolute value or an offset for this purpose.

5.

Then keep clicking OK until the new data have been accepted.
 This completes the temperature adjustment.

215

Calibration

Memosens

19.12.4 Error messages when performing the calibration
Display message

Causes and possible remedial measures

The calibrated dataset is invalid.
Do you want to restart the calibration?

Calibration point not plausible

The stability criterion is not fulfilled.
Do you want to repeat the last step?

Calibration aborted.
Please clean sensor before
immersing in process medium.
(Hold will be disabled)1.

Repeat calibration

2.

Check the position of the sensor in thecalibration vessel (fixed position, wall effects,
air bubbles, etc.)

3.

Ensure the medium is mixed thoroughly (e.g.
use a magnetic stirrer)

4.

Exchange the calibration medium

5.

Clean any dirt from the sensor

The measured value or temperature is not stable. As aresult, the stability criterion is not met.
1.

Keep the temperature constant duringcalibration

2.

Check the position of the sensor in thecalibration vessel (fixed position, wall effects,
air bubbles, etc.)

3.

Ensure the medium is mixed thoroughly (e.g.
use a magnetic stirrer)

4.

Clean any dirt from the sensor

5.

Adjust stability criteria →  94.

The user has aborted the calibration.

19.13 Spectrometer
Operating Instructions for Memosens Wave CAS80E, BA02005C
The calibration always depends on the application. With the field calibration, you adapt
the factory-calibrated spectrometer more accurately to your process. Use calibration points
that limit the expected measuring range at the highest and lowest point. This improves theresolution and accuracy of the measurement.
1.

LWARNING
Mineral acids
Risk of serious or fatal injury from caustic burns!
‣ Wear goggles to protect eyes.
‣ Wear protective gloves and appropriate protective clothing.
‣ Avoid all contact with the eyes, mouth and skin.
Clean the optical windows before the calibration (with 5 to 10% H3PO4 or
5 to 10% HCl or 5 to 10% H2SO4).

216

2.

Take the reference sample (laboratory sample) at the same time and place as the
sample for the calibration point of the spectrometer.

3.

The following applies for a nitrate reference sample:
Filter the sample immediately through a 0.45 μm filter (e.g. filter paper or syringe
filter). Reason: The nitrate concentration changes quickly if microorganisms are left
in the sample.

4.

If the sample cannot be measured quickly in the laboratory:
Set the sample with H2SO4 to pH < 2 and preserve it in this way.
Endress+Hauser

Memosens

Calibration

5.

Check whether the factory calibration demonstrates an acceptable level of accuracy inthe required measuring range.

6.

If the performance of the spectrometer is not sufficient due to the factory calibration:
Perform a factor calibration.

7.

If the performance of the spectrometer is not sufficient due to the factor calibration:
Perform an offset calibration.

8.

If the factor and/or offset calibration cannot be used or is not sufficient:Enter a calibration table.

Calibrating the parameters
1.

CAL/Channel No. Spectrometer/Spectrometer/Application calibration2.

Select the data record. The factory calibration is preselected.

3.

Select the parameter to be calibrated and the associated unit.

4.

Select the type of calibration: Edit factor, Edit offset or Calibration table.

19.13.1 Edit factor
This type of calibration can be used if a fixed factor applies between the laboratory andsensor measured value for the entire desired measuring range.
1.

CAL/Channel No. Spectrometer/Spectrometer/Application calibration/Edit factor

2.

Cal. factor: Enter the factor.

3.

Accept calibration data The new factor is saved for the selected parameter.

19.13.2 Edit offset
This type of calibration can be used if the spectrometer deviates from the laboratory
measured value. The deviation must apply in the entire desired measuring range.
1.

CAL/Channel No. Spectrometer/Spectrometer/Application calibration/Edit offset

2.

Offset: Enter the value.

3.

Accept calibration data The offset is saved for the selected parameter.

19.13.3 Calibration table
This type of calibration is useful if the factor and/or offset calibration are not sufficient.
1.

CAL/Channel No. Spectrometer/Spectrometer/Application calibration/
Calibration table

2.

INSERT: Specify the calibration point by entering measured values and nominal
values.

3.

Enter a maximum of 6 calibration points in this way.

4.

SAVE.
 If the table is valid, the calibration data are saved for the selected parameter.

19.13.4 Take reference spectrum (zero calibration)
The zero calibration is the reference calibration on which the calculations are based. The
spectrometer leaves the factory with a zero calibration performed in ultrapure water.
1.

Endress+Hauser

Clean the spectrometer.

217

Calibration

Memosens

2.

Record spectrum in ultrapure water: CAL/Channel No. Spectrometer/Spectrometer/
Take reference spectrum

3.

Follow the instructions on the display.

19.13.5 Temperature adjustment
1.

Determine the temperature of the process medium with an alternative measurement,such as a precision thermometer.

2.

CAL/Channel No. Spectrometer/Temperature.
 You have 2 options: Edit offset or Start calibration.

3.

If you only want to enter a deviation of the sensor value in relation to the reference
measurement:
Edit offset: Enter the deviation in relation to the reference measurement in K.

4.

If you want to adjust the temperature sensor by entering a reference temperature:
Start calibration/OK.

5.

Leave the sensor in the process medium and select OK.
 Temperature measurement via the sensor is started.

6.

Enter the reference temperature from the alternative measurement.

7.

Continue and OK (several times).
 This completes the temperature adjustment.

19.14 Fluorescence
19.14.1 Types of calibration
The sensor is precalibrated on leaving the factory. It can be used directly without the needfor additional calibration.
The following calibrations are possible:• Calibration• In-situ calibration with the certified solid state reference• Recalibration by the manufacturer• Application adjustment• Calibration or adjustment using reference samples via a value table (1-6 points)• Entry of a factor (multiplication of the measured values by a constant factor)• Entry of an offset (add/subtract a constant value to/from the measured values)

19.14.2 Solid state reference
The sensor is adjusted ex-works in compliance with Resolution MEPC 259(68).
1.

To comply with the MEPC 256 (68) criteria, calibrate the sensor at regular intervals
using the solid state reference.

2.

If necessary, adjust the sensor with the solid state reference.

We recommend you send in the device to the manufacturer every 4 years for inspection
and recalibration.
During factory calibration, the solid state reference is adapted to the sensor. The solid statereference can only be used with this sensor. The solid state reference and the sensor are
therefore permanently assigned to one another.
The functional integrity of the sensor can be checked using the solid state reference. The
sensor can be calibrated and adjusted. Adjustment is performed automatically by the218

Endress+Hauser

Memosens

Calibrationtransmitter following calibration. The reference value indicated by the solid state referenceis used to adjust the sensor.

A0046813

 34

Solid state reference

Calibration with solid state reference

LCAUTION
High pressure and high temperatures when removing the sensor
Risk of injury!
‣ Pay attention to the process pressure and process temperature.
‣ If the process pressure is elevated, reduce the process pressure before removing thesensor. Use the manual valve mounted onsite for this purpose.

LCAUTION
Medium leaking
Risk of injury, damage to clothing and the system!
‣ Make sure that the inlet and outlet of the assembly are shut off.
‣ Make sure that automatic cleaning is switched off before performing the calibration.
NOTICE
Condensation and fouling cause incorrect calibration results!
‣ Clean the sensor and the optical windows thoroughly beforehand.
‣ Avoid condensation on the sensor.
‣ Pay attention to the ambient conditions of the sensor, particularly the ambient
temperature range.
For detailed information on transmitter settings, see the Operating Instructions forthe transmitter
Pay attention to the following conditions for the calibration:• No condensation on the sensor or the solid state reference• Stable temperature of the sensor and the solid state reference• Compliance with ambient temperature ranges• Optical windows have been cleaned of dirt
Start calibration

Endress+Hauser

1.

Select Calibration on the transmitter.

2.

Select the fluorescence sensor.

3.

Select Fluorescence.

4.

Select Solid state reference.

5.

Follow the instructions of the transmitter.

219

Calibration

Memosens

Function check in air:‣

NOTICE
Objects and items of clothing in front of the optical windows result in incorrect
measured values!
‣ Keep a sufficient distance from the device.
‣ Remove any objects below the sensor.

1

A0048475

1

Free space

Hold the sensor in the free space.
Failed function check in air:
1.

Clean the optical windows again.

2.

Repeat the measurement procedure.

3.

If the measurement is still outside the specified limits after multiple rounds ofcleaning, send the sensor to your local Endress+Hauser sales organization.

Once the process of calibrating with the solid state reference is completed, the following
statuses are possible:• Calibration completed successfully
The measured value is within the limit values indicated and therefore an automatic
adjustment was not necessary• Calibration completely successfully and automatic adjustment performed
The measured value has exceeded the limit values and has been successfully corrected by
the automatic adjustment• Calibration has failed, no automatic adjustment has been performed
The measured value is outside the limit values and an automatic adjustment was notpossible. The device is therefore no longer operational according to MEPC.

‣ If the calibration fails, send the sensor in to your Endress+Hauser sales organization.
19.14.3 Factor/offset
Data input (factor)
With the "Factor" function, the measured values are multiplied by a constant factor. The
functionality corresponds to that of a 1-point calibration.
Example:220

Endress+Hauser

Memosens

Calibration

This type of adjustment can be selected if the measured values are compared to thelaboratory values over a longer period of time and all values are too low by a constantfactor, e.g. 10%, in relation to the laboratory value (target sample value).
In the example, the adjustment is made by entering the factor 1.1.
y

b

6
a
5

f = 1.1

4
3
2
1

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

x
A0039329

 35
x
y
a
b

Principle of factor calibration

Measured value
Target sample value
Factory calibration
Factor calibration

Numeric input (offset)
With the "Offset" function, the measured values are offset by a constant amount (added or
subtracted).
y

b

6
a

5
4
3
2
1

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

x
A0039330

 36
x
y
a
b

Endress+Hauser

Principle of an offset

Measured value
Target sample value
Factory calibration
Offset calibration

221

Calibration

Memosens

19.14.4 Calibration table
This type of calibration is useful if the factor and/or offset calibration are not sufficient.
1.

CAL/Channel No. Fluorescence/Fluorescence/Calibration table/

Edit table

2.

INSERT: Specify the calibration point by entering measured values and nominal
values.

3.

Enter a maximum of 6 calibration points in this way.

4.

SAVE.
 If the table is valid, the calibration data are saved for the selected parameter.

19.14.5 Temperature adjustment
Adjust the measured value of the internal temperature sensor to a reference measurement
1.

Determine the temperature of the process medium with an alternative measurement,such as a precision thermometer.

2.

CAL/Channel No. Fluorescence/Temperature/Edit offset.

3.

Enter the deviation of the sensor measured value in relation to the reference
measurement in K.

4.

Accept calibration data.
 This completes the temperature adjustment.

19.15 Calibration accessories
19.15.1 Memobase Plus
Memobase Plus CYZ71D• PC software to support laboratory calibration• Visualization and documentation of sensor management• Sensor calibrations stored in database• Product Configurator on the product page: www.endress.com/cyz71d
Technical Information TI00502C

19.15.2 pH calibration buffer
High-quality buffer solutions from Endress+Hauser - CPY20
The secondary buffer solutions have been referenced to primary reference material of the
PTB (German Federal Physico-technical Institute) or to standard reference material of
NIST (National Institute of Standards and Technology) according to DIN 19266 by alaboratory accredited by the DAkkS (German accreditation body) according to DIN 17025.
Product Configurator on the product page: www.endress.com/cpy20

19.15.3 ORP buffer
ORP buffer solution CPY3
• 220 mV, pH 7
• 468 mV, pH 0.1
Product Configurator on the product page: www.endress.com/cpy3

222

Endress+Hauser

Memosens

Calibration

19.15.4 Conductivity calibration solutions
Conductivity calibration solutions CLY11
Precision solutions referenced to SRM (Standard Reference Material) by NIST for qualified
calibration of conductivity measuring systems in accordance with ISO 9000
CLY11-B, 149.6 μS/cm (reference temperature 25 °C (77 °F)), 500 ml (16.9 fl.oz)
Order No. 50081903
Technical Information TI00162C

19.15.5 Oxygen
COY8
Zero-point gel for oxygen and disinfection sensors• Disinfectant-free gel for the verification, zero point calibration and adjustment of oxygenand disinfection measuring points• Product Configurator on the product page: www.endress.com/coy8
Technical Information TI01244C
Calibration vessel• For COS61D/61• Order No.: 51518599

19.15.6 Disinfection
Photometer• Photometer for determining chlorine and pH value• Order no.: 71257946

19.15.7 ISE and nitrate
CAY40• Standard solutions for ammonium, nitrate, potassium and chloride• Ordering information: www.endress.com/cas40d under "Accessories/spare parts"

19.15.8 Nitrate
Nitrate standard solutions, 1 liter• 5 mg/l NO3-N, order number: CAY342-V10C05AAE• 10 mg/l NO3-N, order number: CAY342-V10C10AAE• 15 mg/l NO3-N, order number: CAY342-V10C15AAE• 20 mg/l NO3-N, order number: CAY342-V20C10AAE• 30 mg/l NO3-N, order number: CAY342-V20C30AAE• 40 mg/l NO3-N, order number: CAY342-V20C40AAE• 50 mg/l NO3-N, order number: CAY342-V20C50AAE

19.15.9 SAC
KHP standard solution
CAY451‐V10C01AAE, 1000 ml parent solution 5 000 mg/l TOC

Endress+Hauser223

Index

Memosens

Index
A

Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Air set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

C

Calibration
Conductivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Disinfection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Fluorescence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
ISE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Nitrate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
ORP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Oxygen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
pH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
SAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Spectrometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Turbidity and solids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Calibration monitoring
Conductivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Calibration settings
Disinfection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Drinking water turbidity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77, 127
Fluorescence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
ISE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Nitrate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Oxygen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
pH/ORP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
SAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Turbidity and solids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Cell constant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27, 178
Conductivity
Basic settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Calibration monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Diagnostics settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Extended setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Operating hours limit values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Process errors without messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Conductivity calibration solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

D

Device-specific diagnostic messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Diagnostic messages
Device-specific . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Possible settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Sensor-specific . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Diagnostics settings
Conductivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Disinfection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Drinking water turbidity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78, 128
Fluorescence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
ISE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Nitrate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Oxygen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
224

pH/ORP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
SAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Turbidity and solids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Disinfection
Basic settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Calibration accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Calibration settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Diagnostics settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Extended setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Medium and temperature compensation . . . . . . . . 62
Operating hours limit values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Polarization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Process errors without messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Reference measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Types of calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Drinking water turbidity
Basic settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Calibration settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77, 127
Diagnostics settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78, 128
Extended setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Operating hours limit values . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79, 128
Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

EElectrolyte counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

F

Fermenter scaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Flash rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92, 100
Fluorescence
Basic settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Calibration settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Diagnostics settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Extended setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Hardware limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Medium compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Operating hours limit values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Process errors without messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Signal processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

H

Hardware limits
Fluorescence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

I

Impedance monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
InputsConductivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Disinfection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Drinking water turbidity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Fluorescence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Endress+Hauser

Memosens

Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
ISE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Nitrate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Oxygen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
pH/ORP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
SAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Spectrometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Turbidity and solids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Installation factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27, 179
Interface
Basic settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Diagnostics settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Extended setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Process errors without messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Tank configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
ISE
Basic settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Calibration accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Calibration settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Diagnostics settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Extended setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Measured variable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Operating hours limit values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Process errors without messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

Index

ORP buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
OxygenBasic settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Calibration accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Calibration settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Diagnostics settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Electrolyte counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Extended setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Operating hours limit values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55, 56
Process errors without messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

P

LED settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

pH buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
pH/ORP
Basic settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Calibration settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Diagnostics settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Extended setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Operating hours limit values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Process errors without messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Pharmaceutical water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Point at oxygen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Polarization compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Process Check System (PCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Process errors without messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

M

R

L

Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Measured variable ISE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Measurement filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

N

NitrateBasic settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Calibration accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Calibration settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Diagnostics settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Extended setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Operating hours limit values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Process errors without messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

O

Operating hours limit values
Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Conductivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Disinfection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Drinking water turbidity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79, 128
Fluorescence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
ISE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Nitrate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Oxygen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
pH/ORP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
SAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Turbidity and solids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Operating mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Endress+Hauser

Recommended values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Residual coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

S

SAC
Basic settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Calibration accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Calibration settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Diagnostics settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Extended setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Operating hours limit values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Process errors without messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Sample calibration
Oxygen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Sensor Check System (SCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Sensor Condition Check (SCC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Sensor information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Sensor-specific diagnostic messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Signal processing
Fluorescence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Slope calibration
Disinfection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Oxygen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Solid state reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Spectrometer
Basic settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
225

Index

Memosens

Extended setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Measuring period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Process errors without messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

TTank configuration interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Turbidity and solids
Basic settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Calibration settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Diagnostics settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Extended setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Operating hours limit values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Process errors without messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

WWarnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

Z

Zero point calibration
Disinfection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Oxygen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

226

Endress+Hauser

*71569838*
71569838

www.addresses.endress.com